Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Commissioning Guide: Enodeb V100R005C00
Commissioning Guide: Enodeb V100R005C00
V100R005C00
Commissioning Guide
Issue 04
Date 2012-06-29
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Purpose
This document describes how to commission an eNodeB after the eNodeB is successfully
installed and configured to verify that the eNodeB works properly as designed. The eNodeB
supports three commissioning modes: M2000-based remote commissioning, USB-based local
commissioning+M2000-based remote commissioning, and LMT-based local commissioning.
Product Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l eNodeB installation engineers
l Field engineers
Organization
1 Changes in eNodeB Commissioning Guide
2 Commissioning Mode
The eNodeB supports the following commissioning modes: PnP remote commissioning, local
commissioning using a Universal Serial Bus (USB) flash drive, and local commissioning on the
LMT. Each commissioning mode can be applied to the scenario where the SeGW is deployed
and the scenario where no SeGW is deployed. In the security scenario, PnP remote
commissioning is classified into PnP remote commissioning in unified encryption mode and
PnP remote commissioning in differentiated encryption mode; local commissioning using a USB
flash drive is classified into local commissioning using a USB flash drive in unified encryption
mode and local commissioning using a USB flash drive in differentiated encryption mode. You
can select a commissioning mode based on site conditions. PnP remote commissioning is
recommended.
This chapter describes the following procedures when no security gateway (SeGW) is deployed:
eNodeB automatic discovery, plug and play (PnP) remote commissioning, local commissioning
using a Universal Serial Bus (USB) flash drive, and local commissioning on the LMT.
This chapter describes the following procedures when the SeGW is deployed in the network:
eNodeB automatic discovery, PnP remote commissioning in unified encryption mode, PnP
remote commissioning in differentiated encryption mode, local commissioning using a USB
flash drive in unified encryption mode, local commissioning using a USB flash drive in
differentiated encryption mode, and local commissioning on the LMT.
5 Appendix
This chapter describes how to encrypt files in a Universal Serial Bus (USB) storage device and
provides the eNodeB commissioning data sheet.
6 FAQ
This chapter describes some common problems and solutions during commissioning.
Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
Symbol Description
General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Keyboard Operations
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Format Description
Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.
Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt
+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.
Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means
the two keys should be pressed in turn.
Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Action Description
Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving
the pointer.
Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the
pointer to a certain position.
Contents
5 Appendix.....................................................................................................................................417
5.1 eNodeB Binding Using a Bar Code Scanner..................................................................................................418
5.1.1 Printing a Bar Code on the M2000........................................................................................................418
5.1.2 Setting a Bar Code Scanner...................................................................................................................421
5.1.3 Binding the eNodeB by Scanning a Bar Code......................................................................................423
5.2 Triggering Monitoring Device Alarms...........................................................................................................424
5.2.1 Triggering PMU Alarms........................................................................................................................424
5.2.2 Triggering FMU Alarms........................................................................................................................430
5.2.3 Triggering TCU Alarms........................................................................................................................432
5.2.4 Triggering EMU Alarms.......................................................................................................................434
5.3 Checking the Status of Indicators...................................................................................................................436
5.4 Configuring the Default Configuration File...................................................................................................442
5.5 Encrypting Files in the USB Flash Drive.......................................................................................................442
5.6 Data Sheet for eNodeB Commissioning.........................................................................................................445
6 FAQ.............................................................................................................................................. 450
6.1 Failing to Identify the USB Flash Drive.........................................................................................................451
6.2 Failing to Read Files in the USB Flash Drive................................................................................................452
6.3 Failing to Activate the Software.....................................................................................................................453
6.4 Failing to Download the Software Based on the Default Configuration File.................................................453
04 (2012-06-29)
This is the fourth official release.
Compared with issue 03 (2012-05-11) of V100R005C00, this issue includes the following new
information.
4.3.6 Obtaining an Operator's Device Added the procedure for manually obtaining
Certificate Manually (with PKI) operators' certificates.
Compared with issue 03 (2012-05-11) of V100R005C00, this issue includes the following
changes.
The following information in issue 03 (2012-05-11) of V100R005C00 is deleted from this issue:
l Deleted the section "Obtaining the Common Configuration File."
03 (2012-05-11)
This is the third official release.
Compared with issue 02 (2012-04-28) of V100R005C00, this issue includes the following new
information.
Compared with issue 02 (2012-04-28) of V100R005C00, this issue does not include any changes
or delete any information.
02 (2012-04-28)
This is the second official release.
Compared with issue 01 (2012-03-30) of V100R005C00, this issue does not include any new
information.
Compared with issue 01 (2012-03-30) of V100R005C00, this issue includes the following
changes.
The following information in issue 01 (2012-03-30) of V100R005C00 is deleted from this issue:
l Obtaining the Common Configuration File
01 (2012-03-30)
This is the first official release.
Compared with draft B (2012-02-15) of V100R005C00, this issue includes the following new
information.
5.3 Checking the Status of Indicators Added the descriptions of ACT indicator on
the main control board.
l Preparing a USB Flash Drive for Local Added the description of downloading the
Commissioning board software by using default configuration
l Preparing a USB Flash Drive for Local file.
Commissioning
3.3.3 Downloading and Activating the Added the figure of the USB port on UMPT
Software, Data Configuration File, and and the method of downloading the LMT
License File Using a USB Flash Drive complete package by using a USB flash drive
when the LMPT is used.
Compared with draft B (2012-02-15) of V100R005C00, this issue does not include any changes.
The following information in draft B (2012-02-15) of V100R005C00 is deleted from this issue.
l 3.2 PnP Remote Commissioning Deleted the procedure for comparing the
(Without the SeGW) license and configuration data in the
l 4.2 PnP Remote Commissioning in commissioning.
Unified Encryption Mode (with the
SeGW)
l 3.3 Local Commissioning Using a USB
Flash Drive (Without the SeGW)
l 4.4 Local Commissioning Using a USB
Flash Drive in Unified Encryption
Mode (with the SeGW)
l 3.4 Local Commissioning on the LMT
(Without the SeGW)
l 4.6 Local Commissioning on the LMT
(with the SeGW)
Draft B (2012-02-15)
This is draft B.
Compared with draft A (2012-01-10) of V100R005C00, this issue includes the following new
information.
Compared with draft A (2012-01-10) of V100R005C00, this issue includes the following
changes.
Compared with draft A (2012-01-10) of V100R005C00, this issue has no information deleted.
Draft A (2012-01-10)
This is draft A.
Compared with issue 02 (2011-11-15) of V100R004C00, this issue includes the following new
information.
l 3.2 PnP Remote Commissioning Added the procedure for comparing the
(Without the SeGW) license and configuration data in all
l 4.2 PnP Remote Commissioning in commissioning scenarios.
Unified Encryption Mode (with the
SeGW)
l 3.3 Local Commissioning Using a USB
Flash Drive (Without the SeGW)
l 4.4 Local Commissioning Using a USB
Flash Drive in Unified Encryption
Mode (with the SeGW)
l 3.4 Local Commissioning on the LMT
(Without the SeGW)
l 4.6 Local Commissioning on the LMT
(with the SeGW)
3.3.3 Downloading and Activating the Added the procedure for activating the
Software, Data Configuration File, and license file using the USB flash drive.
License File Using a USB Flash Drive
3.2.12 Setting an NE to the NORMAL Added the procedure for querying the
Mode eNodeB state.
Compared with issue 02 (2011-11-15) of V100R004C00, this issue includes the following
change.
3.3.3 Downloading and Activating the Changed the description of downloading the
Software, Data Configuration File, and LMT complete package using the USB flash
License File Using a USB Flash Drive drive.
The following information in issue 02 (2011-11-15) of V100R004C00 is deleted from this issue.
2 Commissioning Mode
The eNodeB supports the following commissioning modes: PnP remote commissioning, local
commissioning using a Universal Serial Bus (USB) flash drive, and local commissioning on the
LMT. Each commissioning mode can be applied to the scenario where the SeGW is deployed
and the scenario where no SeGW is deployed. In the security scenario, PnP remote
commissioning is classified into PnP remote commissioning in unified encryption mode and
PnP remote commissioning in differentiated encryption mode; local commissioning using a USB
flash drive is classified into local commissioning using a USB flash drive in unified encryption
mode and local commissioning using a USB flash drive in differentiated encryption mode. You
can select a commissioning mode based on site conditions. PnP remote commissioning is
recommended.
Prerequisites
l Requirements for the device status and commissioning environment are described as
follows:
– All hardware devices and cables have been properly installed. For details, see related
installation guides, which can be obtained at http://support.huawei.com/.
– The eNodeB has passed a hardware check before power-on.
– Before remote commissioning on the M2000, you have installed the mediation software
matching the target version of the eNodeB to be commissioned on the M2000 server.
l Requirements for the network are described as follows:
The eNodeB is connected to the mobility management entity (MME) or serving gateway
(S-GW) in the evolved packet core (EPC), and the MME or S-GW is configured with the
interconnection data required for commissioning and can provide the basic functions of the
EPC.
l Requirements for data configuration are described as follows:
Based on live network and eNodeB design requirements, the eNodeB configuration data
are configured using the configuration management express (CME) or man-machine
language (MML) command. For details, see eNodeB Initial Configuration Guide.
Application Scenario
Table 2-1 lists the application description for each commissioning scenario.
PnP remote l The operation and maintenance (OM) channel between the
commissioning eNodeB and the M2000 works properly.
(without the SeGW) l The eNodeB is relocated with permissible downtime greater than
or equal to 1 hour.
l No SeGW is deployed in the network.
PnP remote l The operation and maintenance (OM) channel between the
commissioning in eNodeB and the M2000 works properly.
unified encryption l The eNodeB is relocated with permissible downtime greater than
mode (with the or equal to 1 hour.
SeGW)
l The SeGW is deployed in the network. A public Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server is available and it
supports option43.
l The eNodeB and the M2000 belong to different domains. The
eNodeB communicates with the M2000 through the SeGW.
PnP remote l The operation and maintenance (OM) channel between the
commissioning in eNodeB and the M2000 works properly.
differentiated l The eNodeB is relocated with permissible downtime greater than
encryption mode or equal to 1 hour.
(with the SeGW)
l The SeGW is deployed in the network.
l The eNodeB and the M2000 belong to the same domain. The
eNodeB can communicate with the M2000 without the SeGW.
CAUTION
If you select the local commissioning, ensure that you have all required items, such as a laptop,
the software package of the target version, the license file, a USB flash drive and reference
documents before starting commissioning. For details about the required items, see the section
on preparations for the commissioning mode used.
This chapter describes the following procedures when no security gateway (SeGW) is deployed:
eNodeB automatic discovery, plug and play (PnP) remote commissioning, local commissioning
using a Universal Serial Bus (USB) flash drive, and local commissioning on the LMT.
If the eNodeB and the M2000 server are deployed on different network segments, you need to
configure the router closest to the eNodeB on the path between the eNodeB and the M2000
server as a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) relay. The IP address of the DHCP
server for the M2000 is used as the DHCP relay address.
NOTE
If the M2000 server is deployed by using Server Load-Sharing (SLS), the previous IP address of the M2000
DHCP server refers to the IP address of the master M2000 server.
Figure 3-1 shows the eNodeB automatic discovery process in this scenario. The process is as
follows:
1. The eNodeB performs power on self-test (POST).
2. The eNodeB learns virtual local area networks (VLANs) and obtains VLAN IDs (in VLAN
networking scenarios).
3. The eNodeB sends a DHCP request to the DHCP server provided by the M2000 to obtain
the information, such as OM IP address, OM IP mask, IP address of the M2000, and IP
mask of the M2000.
4. The eNodeB sets up an OM channel with the M2000 after receiving a response to the DHCP
request from the M2000.
5. The eNodeB downloads and activates the eNodeB software and configuration files from
the M2000.
NOTE
l When the M2000 server is deployed by using SLS, if you want to create an eNodeB on the master
server, the IP address of the M2000 refers to the IP address of the master server; if if you want to create
an eNodeB on the slave server, the IP address of the M2000 refers to the IP address of the slave server.
l Check DHCP message in the following ways:
l Log in to the LMT and create a PnP tracing task on the LMT. For details, see eNodeB LMT User
Guide.
l Log in to the M2000 client, choose Configuration > DHCP Configuration Management. The
DHCP Configuration Management tab page is displayed. In the Server Information area on
the DHCP Configuration Management tab page, check the DHCP message.
eNodeB Automatic Discovery During Local Commissioning Using a USB Flash Drive
Figure 3-2 shows the eNodeB automatic discovery process in this scenario. The process is as
follows:
1. Insert the commissioning USB flash drive into the USB port on the eNodeB.
2. The eNodeB performs power on self-test (POST).
3. The eNodeB reads and activates the eNodeB software and configuration files in the USB
flash drive, and then automatically resets.
4. The eNodeB sets up an OM link with the M2000.
Figure 3-2 eNodeB automatic discovery during local commissioning using a USB flash drive
Figure 3-3 shows a typical commissioning scenario without the SeGW deployed in the network.
The eNodeB, mobility management entity (MME), serving gateway (SGW), and M2000 can
directly communicate with each other.
Figure 3-4 Procedure for PnP remote eNodeB commissioning when no SeGW is deployed
1 Local and Prepare for remote eNodeB commissioning using the PnP, Mandato
remote which involves obtaining eNodeB information and ry
cooperative commissioning tools, and obtaining the eNodeB software
operations and files required for automatic deployment. For details, see
3.2.2 Preparations.
9 Remote Set the maximum transmit power of RRUs or RFUs on the Optional
operations M2000. RRU and RFU are short for remote radio unit and
on the radio frequency unit, respectively. For details, see 3.2.10
M2000 Setting the Maximum Output Power for RRUs or
RFUs.
10 Local and Verify the basic services of the eNodeB. For details, see Optional
remote 3.2.11 Testing the Basic Services of the eNodeB.
cooperative
operations
St Operation Mandat
ep ory/
Option
al
NOTE
After an eNodeB is deployed, local engineers can determine whether the eNodeB is working properly by
observing the indicators on eNodeB boards. For details about the indicator descriptions and operations for
rectifying possible faults, see 5.3 Checking the Status of Indicators.
3.2.2 Preparations
To commission an eNodeB in PnP remote commissioning mode when the security gateway
(SeGW) is not deployed, you need to collect related eNodeB information, obtain commissioning
tools, and upload the required files.
Context
Figure 3-5 shows the procedure for preparing for PnP remote eNodeB commissioning when no
SeGW is deployed.
Figure 3-5 Procedure for preparing for PnP remote commissioning when the SeGW is not
deployed
Procedure
Step 1 Collect the information related to the eNodeB, as described in Table 3-2.
Step 2 Obtain the tools required for the remote commissioning on the M2000, as described in Table
3-3.
Table 3-3 Tools required for the remote commissioning on the M2000
Tool Description
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client if you need to export the eNodeB deployment list
from the M2000 client.
l You have obtained planned data for eNodeB deployment from network planning engineers.
Procedure
Step 1 Obtain the deployment list.
Option Description
Deployment lists If the CME has been deployed and you have initially configured the
are exported eNodeB on the CME, it is recommended that you use the CME to export
from the CME the eNodeB deployment list. For detailed operations, see Exporting Auto
Deployment Configuration Files in M2000 Help.
Obtain and open the exported deployment list. Check whether the software
version, cold patch, and hot patch are consistent with planned ones. If they
are inconsistent, you need to change them as planned. In addition, you need
to enter other relevant data.
NOTE
The deployment list must be exported from the CME V200R012C00 or later
releases.
Deployment lists If the CME has not been deployed, you can export the eNodeB deployment
are exported list from the eNodeB Auto Deployment window on the M2000 client.
from the M2000
client 1. Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto
Deployment from the main menu of the Configuration > Auto
Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB Auto
Deployment window is displayed.
Before the deployment, check whether the planned target version is consistent with the target
version in the deployment list.
l If they are consistent, use this deployment list to proceed with the deployment.
l If they are inconsistent, change the target version in the deployment list to the planned target
version. The following uses eNodeB commissioning as an example.
– If the planned target version is V100R003C00SPCXXX, edit the eNodeB Software
Version field.
– If the planned target version is V100R003C00SPHXXX, edit the eNodeB Hot Patch
Version field. In the eNodeB Software Version field, you must enter the corresponding
V100R003C00SPCXXX.
NOTE
----End
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the M2000 client.
Context
You need to upload data files in the following scenarios:
The data files required for eNodeB commissioning need to be saved in specified paths on the
M2000 server. For details, see Table 3-4.
Configurati /export/home/sysm/ftproot/adn/AutoDeploymentData/eNodeB/CfgData/
on data file
Deploymen /export/home/sysm/ftproot/adn/AutoDeploymentData/eNodeB/ADList/
t list
RET /export/home/sysm/ftproot/OutSourcing/RETFile/
antenna
software
version and
configurati
on data file
RET /export/home/sysm/ftproot/adn/AutoDeploymentData/eNodeB/
antenna RETTemplate/
template
Commissio /export/home/sysm/ftproot/adn/AutoDeploymentData/eNodeB/
ning license CommissionLicense/
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 Click Prepare File&Data. The window for preparing files and data is displayed. Upload data
files as required.
If you Then...
need to...
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
Operation, Status, Source File Path, Destination File Path, and
Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the software versions are uploaded.
l Upload in batches
One or multiple software versions corresponding to one or multiple NE types
are uploaded at a time.
1. On the Software & Cold Patch tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS
Client to OSS Server. The NE File Transfer dialog box is displayed.
2. Click in the lower left corner of the dialog box, select an NE type
from the NE Type drop-down list, and select Software from the File
Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Repeat the preceding two steps to select one or multiple files
corresponding to multiple NE types. The selected files are displayed in
the Source Path area.
5. In the Source Path area, select one or multiple files and click Add. The
files to be uploaded are displayed in the lower part of the dialog box.
6. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
If you Then...
need to...
If you Then...
need to...
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
Operation, Status, Source File Path, Destination File Path, and
Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the cold patches are uploaded.
l Upload in batches
One or multiple cold patches corresponding to one or multiple NE types are
uploaded at a time.
1. On the Software & Cold Patch tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS
Client to OSS Server. The NE File Transfer dialog box is displayed.
2. Click in the lower left corner of the dialog box, select an NE type
from the NE Type drop-down list, and select Software from the File
Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Repeat the preceding two steps to select one or multiple files
corresponding to multiple NE types. The selected files are displayed in
the Source Path area.
5. In the Source Path area, select one or multiple files and click Add. The
files to be uploaded are displayed in the lower part of the dialog box.
6. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
If you Then...
need to...
If you Then...
need to...
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
Operation, Status, Source File Path, Destination File Path, and
Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the hot patches are uploaded.
l Upload in batches
One or multiple hot patches corresponding to one or multiple NE types are
uploaded at a time.
1. On the Hot Patch tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS Client to OSS
Server. The NE File Transfer dialog box is displayed.
2. Click in the lower left corner of the dialog box, select an NE type
from the NE Type drop-down list, and select Software from the File
Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Repeat the preceding two steps to select one or multiple files
corresponding to multiple NE types. The selected files are displayed in
the Source Path area.
5. In the Source Path area, select one or multiple files and click Add. The
files to be uploaded are displayed in the lower part of the dialog box.
6. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
If you Then...
need to...
Upload 1. On the NE Configuration Data tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS
configurati Client to OSS Server. The Upload NE Configuration Data dialog box is
on data displayed.
files 2. Select an NE type from the NE Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting files is
displayed. Select the folder where the configuration data file that you want
to upload is stored, click Select. The Upload NE Configuration Data dialog
box is displayed.
CAUTION
The path for saving the eNodeB configuration data file to be uploaded must be ..
\eNodeBName\M2000.XML on the local PC. An eNodeBName folder contains only
one XML file. To upload eNodeB configuration data files, you must select the
eNodeBName folder where the files are stored. You can select multiple
eNodeBName folders at a time.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the Destination
Path area. You can only view the path.
Upload 1. On the Deployment List tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS Client to
deploymen OSS Server. The Upload Deployment List dialog box is displayed.
t lists 2. Select an NE type from the NE Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting files is
displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click Open to return to
the Upload Deployment List dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the Upload Deployment List dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed information
about the operations at the bottom of the window: Operation, Status, Source
File Path, Destination File Path, and Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the deployment lists are uploaded.
NOTE
If the CME is not deployed, you can click Export Template to export an empty
deployment template, fill out the template based on the planned data, and upload the
template. The default names of the exported empty deployment list templates are the
same. Therefore, you are advised to change the template names after filling out these
templates.
If you Then...
need to...
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
Operation, Status, Source File Path, Destination File Path, and
Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the RET antenna software versions and
configuration data files are uploaded.
l Upload in batches
One or multiple RET antenna software versions and configuration data files
corresponding to one or multiple NE types are uploaded at a time.
1. On the RET tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS Client to OSS
Server. The NE File Transfer dialog box is displayed.
2. Click in the lower left corner of the dialog box, select an NE type
from the NE Type drop-down list, and select Software from the File
Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Repeat the preceding two steps to select one or multiple files
corresponding to multiple NE types. The selected files are displayed in
the Source Path area.
5. In the Source Path area, select one or multiple files and click Add. The
files to be uploaded are displayed in the lower part of the dialog box.
6. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
If you Then...
need to...
on data The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
files information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
Operation, Status, Source File Path, Destination File Path, and
Progress.
7. When Progress is 100%, the RET antenna software versions and
configuration data files are uploaded.
Upload 1. On the RET Template tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS Client to
RET OSS Server. The Upload RET Template dialog box is displayed.
antenna 2. Select an NE type from the NE Type drop-down list.
templates
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting files is
displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click Open to return to
the Upload RET Template dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the Upload RET Template dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed information
about the operations at the bottom of the window: Operation, Status, Source
File Path, Destination File Path, and Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the RET antenna templates are uploaded.
NOTE
If the CME is not deployed, you can click Export Template to export an empty RET
antenna template, fill out the template based on the planned data, and upload the
template.
Upload 1. On the Commission License tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS Client
commissio to OSS Server. The Upload Commission License dialog box is displayed.
ning 2. Select an NE type from the NE Type drop-down list.
licenses
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting files is
displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click Open to return to
the Upload Commission License dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the Upload Commission License dialog box. The system
starts uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed information
about the operations at the bottom of the window: Operation, Status, Source
File Path, Destination File Path, and Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the commissioning licenses are uploaded.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l eNodeB commissioning preparations are complete.
l If the M2000 is deployed in SLS mode, radio network planning engineers need to plan the
area to which the eNodeB belongs.
l If the eNodeB and the M2000 server are located on different network segments, you need
to configure the router nearest to the eNodeB as the DHCP relay.
– In an insecure scenario, you need to set the DHCP relay IP address on the router to the
DHCP server IP address of the M2000. In a secure scenario, you need to set the DHCP
relay IP address on the router to the common DHCP server IP address and on the security
gateway, you need to set the IP address of the DHCP server to the DHCP server IP
address of the M2000.
– In situations where the M2000 is deployed in SLS mode, the preceding DHCP server
IP address of the M2000 refers to the host IP address.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Import a Select From Server and choose a deployment list from the drop-
deployment list down list box.
from the server
Import a
Select From Client and click to select a deployment list.
deployment list
from the client
3. (Optional) Select the area to which an eNodeB belongs in the Sub-area area. This step is
mandatory when theM2000 is deployed in SLS mode.
NEs belong to different areas when they are managed by different M2000 servers. If the
M2000 is deployed in SLS mode, NEs are managed by different servers. On the CME client,
these NEs belong to different areas. Select the active or slave M2000 server that the NE
belongs to based on the planned data. Configure the data as follows:
l If the NE was created on the active M2000 server, set the PEERIP parameter for the
OMCH to the IP address of the active M2000 server.
l If the NE was created on the slave M2000 server, set the PEERIP parameter for the
OMCH to the IP address of the slave M2000 server.
l Set the Destination IP parameter for the IP router from the NE to the M2000 server to
an IP address on the the network segment where the M2000 server is located.
NOTE
Onsite deployment engineers need to perform operations based on the areas that have been planned
for eNodeBs by radio network planning engineers.
l If eNodeBs belong to one area, import one deployment list to create eNodeBs in batches.
l If eNodeBs belong to different areas, import multiple deployment lists by area to create eNodeBs.
4. In NE Connection Mode, set a mode for connecting the M2000 and NEs.
After the import is complete, the M2000 checks for mandatory parameters with empty values
and invalid base station configuration data. In addition, the information indicating whether the
import succeeded or failed is displayed on the Operation Information tab page.
l If the import is successful, the M2000 automatically creates a commissioning task for each
eNodeB. The imported eNodeB deployment lists are displayed on the Deployment List tab
page.
l If the import fails, the causes of the failure are displayed on the Operation Information tab
page.
Step 4 (Optional) Modify data in the imported deployment lists as required. This step is mandatory
when you need to modify the data in the imported deployment lists.
NOTE
You can check whether the parameters in eNodeB deployment lists can be modified by referring to
Parameters for the eNodeB Deployment List.
1. Select a commissioning task from the commissioning task list, and double-click the cells
containing parameter values to change the values.
You can change ESNs by double-clicking the cells containing ESNs. Alternatively, you
can perform the following operations to change the ESNs:
a. Click in the ESN value cell. The Bind ESN dialog box is displayed.
b. Select an ESN that is not bound, and click OK to return to the Deployment
Parameter dialog box.
NOTE
You can change the ESNs before OM links are established between base stations and the
M2000.
2. The changed parameter values are displayed in the commissioning task window and
highlighted in red.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l eNodeB commissioning tasks have been started.
Context
A maximum of 500 commissioning tasks can be started at a time. In which, a maximum of 200
commissioning tasks can be being executed and the rest are waiting to be executed in the queue.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 On the Deployment List tab page, right-click one or multiple commissioning tasks and choose
Start from the shortcut menu. The Task Settings dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Select steps in the Select column based on the actual plan.
NOTE
l : Indicates the step that is performed by default. You can choose whether to perform it.
l : Indicates the step that is not performed by default. You can choose whether to perform it.
For details about commissioning procedures and steps, see Table 3-5.
Wait for manual After the OM channel is set up, the status of the
operation commissioning task changes to Waiting for
manual operation. Manually confirm the
completion and proceed with the commissioning
after the commissioning environment of the
network is ready.
Monitor cell Check whether any active cells exist under the
service status eNodeB.
You can monitor alarms of the eNodeB on the
M2000 during software commissioning to locate
and handle exceptions in time.
7 Perform Perform NHC You can perform health check to learn the
NHC eNodeB operating status.
NOTE
The system checks whether all configured RF modules are usable before starting project quality check.
l If all configured RF modules are usable, the system issues project quality check commands to proceed
with subsequent operations.
l If only some configured RF modules are usable, the system sets a timer (2.5 minutes in length and a
maximum of 5 times) to wait until all RF modules are usable. After all RF modules are usable, the
system issues project quality check commands to proceed with subsequent operations. If some RF
modules are still unusable after the timer expires, the system ends the project quality check task.
Step 4 Click OK. The M2000 automatically checks whether the data files required for procedures are
available.
If... Then...
Not all the 1. The Data Preparation Check dialog box is displayed, showing check
required data results about the required data files.
files are available l : Indicates that all the required data files are available.
l : Indicates that not all the required data files are available.
2. Click OK. The Data Preparation Check dialog box is closed.
3. Obtain relevant data files based on the check results.
For detailed operations, see Uploading Data Files.
4. After the required data files are uploaded, start the commissioning
tasks again.
All the required The M2000 starts commissioning. The selected commissioning tasks enter
data files are the Running state.
available NOTE
If all the required data files are available, the Data Preparation Check dialog box
is not displayed.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l eNodeB commissioning tasks have been started.
Context
l By default, the GUI displays only commissioning tasks created by a specific user. To view
commissioning tasks created by other users, click on the toolbar.
l When the system performs NE upgrades during the automatic configuration phase of a
commissioning task, if you restart or delete the commissioning task, the system does not
restart NE upgrades but proceeds until the related NE upgrade task is complete. When the
system displays The NE is performing the following task: ******. Please try later. in
Description for a commissioning task, the NE upgrade task is running. If you want to
perform automatic deployment again, wait until the NE upgrade task is complete. You can
choose Software > NE Upgrade Task Management > NE Upgrade Task to query the
NE upgrade task.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 View the status and progress of commissioning tasks in the commissioning task list.
TIP
You can quickly view the status of commissioning tasks by using either of the following methods:
l In the commissioning task list, the status of the tasks is displayed in Status, the current procedures are
displayed in Current Phase, and details about each procedure are displayed in Description.
l In the commissioning task list, select one or multiple commissioning tasks whose status you want to
view, and then click . The right pane displays execution status of
steps for commissioning procedures.
The displayed information includes the execution status, description, start time and end time of each
commissioning substep.
Step 3 (Optional) Click . The Statistics dialog box is displayed, showing the number of
commissioning tasks in each status. Click OK to close the dialog box.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l Software commissioning monitoring has already started, and the completion of the
commissioning has not yet been confirmed.
Context
The alarms are categorized into E1/T1 port alarms, transmission path alarms, antenna alarms,
software and configuration alarms, board alarms, cell alarms, external alarms, and other alarms
by object type. Other alarms refer to the alarms that cannot be categorized on the basis of specific
objects.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 In the commissioning task list, select one or multiple commissioning tasks for which you want
to handle alarms. Right-click the tasks, and then choose Open Monitor Window from the
shortcut menu. The alarm monitoring window is displayed.
In the displayed window, you can view alarms on eNodeBs by monitored object. For details
about the alarm monitoring window, see Interface Description: eNodeB Commissioning
Window.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l Commissioning tasks are at the monitoring stage, and the completion of the commissioning
tasks has not yet been confirmed.
Context
CAUTION
eNodeB services are interrupted upon antenna fault diagnosis. Therefore, you need to perform
the diagnosis when the eNodeB is not providing services or the services are isolated.
eNodeB fault diagnosis aims to check whether antennas are functioning normally. It involves
the VSWR test, offline intermodulation interference test, and crossed pair test.
After one fault diagnosis operation is performed, the M2000 creates a fault diagnosis task and
displays the diagnosis progress. After the fault diagnosis is complete, you can obtain the fault
diagnosis report.
If you delete a fault diagnosis task, the corresponding diagnosis report is deleted accordingly.
If you restart the M2000 server, all fault diagnosis tasks and reports are deleted.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 In the commissioning task list, select one or multiple commissioning tasks for which you want
to handle alarms. Right-click the tasks, and then choose Open Monitor Window from the
shortcut menu. The alarm monitoring window is displayed.
During the fault diagnosis, a diagnosis task is added to the diagnosis task list.
NOTE
Fault diagnosis may take a long time when there are a large number of detection services executed
by the detection script and there are a large number of NE configuration services.
4. After fault diagnosis is complete, you can right-click a diagnosis task in the diagnosis task
list, and choose Diagnose Report from the shortcut menu to view diagnosis results.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l eNodeB commissioning tasks have been created or started.
Context
For details about operations on commissioning tasks, see Table 3-6.
Opera Description
tion
Delete You can perform this operation on commissioning tasks in any state.
Restart You can perform this operation on commissioning tasks in the Running,
Abnormal, Paused, or Waiting for Confirmation state.
Pause You can perform this operation on commissioning tasks in the Running state.
Resum You can perform this operation on commissioning tasks in the Paused state.
e
Opera Description
tion
Cancel You can perform this operation on commissioning tasks in the Running,
Abnormal, or Paused state.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 On the Deployment List tab page, select one or multiple commissioning tasks and perform
operations as required.
If you Then...
need to...
Restart Right-click the tasks and choose Restart from the shortcut menu. The tasks
return to the Running state.
Pause Right-click the tasks and choose Pause from the shortcut menu. The tasks are
in the Paused state.
Resume Right-click the tasks and choose Resume from the shortcut menu. The tasks
proceed from where they are paused.
Cancel Right-click the tasks and choose Cancel from the shortcut menu. The tasks
return to the Wait for Start state.
Delete 1. Right-click the tasks and choose Delete from the shortcut menu. The
Confirm dialog box is displayed.
2. Click OK. The system starts deleting the tasks.
----End
Prerequisites
l The eNodeB is properly connected to the M2000.
l The status of the eNodeB commissioning task is Waiting for Confirmation.
Procedure
Step 1 On the M2000 client, choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto
Deployment. The eNodeB Auto Deployment tag page is displayed.
Step 2 Right-click one or more eNodeB commissioning tasks to be confirmed from the commissioning
task list, and choose Confirm Completion from the shortcut menu.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l Commissioning tasks are running.
Context
The exported commissioning report records the information about only the selected
commissioning tasks. After you manually delete a commissioning task, the generated
commissioning report does not contain the information about this task.
The deployment report can be stored for a maximum of 30 days. The start date is specified as
the date when the deployment report is generated for the first time.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 In the commissioning task list, select one or multiple commissioning tasks for which you want
to export the report, right-click the tasks, and then choose Export Deployment Report from
the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, asking you whether to export alarm data at the
same time.
If... Then...
You need to export alarm data Click Yes. The Save dialog box is displayed.
You do not need to export alarm data Click No. The Save dialog box is displayed.
You can customize a filename for the commissioning report. If you do not specify the filename,
the M2000 names and saves the file based on the naming convention
Step 4 (Optional) Decompress the generated report file. In the decompressed folder, double-click
index.html to view the commissioning report.
If you choose to export alarm data at the same time in Step 2, the file containing the alarm data
is saved in the alarm sub-folder.
----End
Rectifying Faults and Clearing Alarms Against the eNodeB Health Check Report
This section descries how to rectify faults and clear alarms against the eNodeB health check
report to ensure that the eNodeB runs properly.
Prerequisites
The eNodeB commissioning report is available.
Context
Table 3-7 shows the eNodeB health checklist.
eNodeB software eNodeB software status Check the operating status of the
version eNodeB software.
Configuration data Configuration data consistency Check whether the effective data
applied to modules is consistent
with the configured data in the
database.
Procedure
Step 1 Open the eNodeB commissioning report and view the health check report to determine the
eNodeB operating status.
Step 2 Check the health check report for faults and alarms, and rectify the faults and clear the alarms
by referring to eNodeB Alarm Reference. If all the alarms are cleared but the eNodeB does not
work properly, contact Huawei for technical support.
Step 3 Check for eNodeB alarms.
You can check for eNodeB alarms using one of the following methods:
l on the M2000 client, choose Monitor > Browse Current Alarm. Set the search criteria in
the displayed Filter dialog box to check for eNodeB alarms. For details, see Browse Current
Alarm in the M2000 Online Help.
l On the M2000 client, choose Topology > Main Topology. On the Main Topology tab page,
right-click the eNodeB and choose Query Alarm/Event > Alarm List from the shortcut
menu. Then, double-click an alarm to view details
Step 4 Clear the alarms by taking recommended actions or by referring to eNodeB Alarm Reference.
----End
Prerequisites
l The antenna line device (ALD) is installed correctly.
l The LMT communicates with the eNodeB properly.
l The RET software and data configuration file are available.
l The FTP server functions properly and is connected to the eNodeB correctly.
l Each FTP user has the permission to read a specified folder.
l There is no firewall between the FTP server and the eNodeB.
Context
l Commissioning the RET antenna includes downloading the RET software and data
configuration file, calibrating the RET antenna, setting the RET downtilt, and query RET
overcurrent or undercurrent alarms.
l The RET downtilt must be configured based on the planned network data. Otherwise, the
RET downtilt affects antenna coverage.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the ALD power switch and overcurrent or undercurrent alarm thresholds.
If... Run...
NOTE
The ALD power switch is OFF by default. Before using the RET, set the ALD power switch to ON and
set current alarm thresholds. If the current exceeds the overcurrent or undercurrent alarm threshold, the
ALD power switch automatically turns off. This affects the subsequent RET commissioning.
Step 4 Check whether the RET antenna is working. If the RET antenna is not working, contact Huawei
for technical support.
You can set Operation Mode to SITE(Site) to query all ALD information.
If... Then...
The current RET software Record the device number of the RET antenna, and perform
version is the same as the Step 7 to download the RET data configuration file.
target RET software
version
The current RET software Record the device number of the RET antenna, and perform
version is different from the Step 6 to download the RET software.
target RET software
version
If the RET downtilt fails to be calibrated, check for the cabinet, subrack, and slot configurations and the
mapping between the RET antenna and the sector. If the configurations and mapping are incorrect, run the
MOD RETSUBUNIT command to set them gain, and calibrate the RET downtilt again.
If you run this command without specifying any parameters, RET antennas can be calibrated in batches.
If multiple sectors are configured, repeat Step 9.1 and Step 9.2 to set the downtilts for other
RET antennas.
3. Query the current RET downtilt. If the queried downtilt is the same as the configured
downtilt, the RET downtilt is set successfully.
MML command: DSP RETSUBUNIT
Step 10 Check whether overcurrent or undercurrent alarms are generated on the RET antenna. If
overcurrent or undercurrent alarms are generated, clear them by referring to eNodeB Alarm
Reference.
MML command: DSP RETPORT
----End
Prerequisites
l The TMA is installed correctly.
l The TMA software has been uploaded to the M2000 server.
l The eNodeB is properly connected to the M2000.
l Each FTP user has the permission to read a specified folder.
l The File Transfer Protocol (FTP) port has been enabled on the firewall between the eNodeB
and the M2000 server.
Context
l The FTP server transmits data in plaintext mode by default.
l As a part of the antenna system, the TMA is used to amplify the received weak signals.
l The TMA software is supplied by the antenna line device (ALD) vendor.
l If incorrect TMA software is loaded, the TMA may not work property.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the ALD power switch and overcurrent or undercurrent alarm thresholds.
If... Run...
NOTE
The ALD power switch is OFF by default. Before using the TMA, set the ALD power switch to ON and
set current alarm thresholds. If the current exceeds the overcurrent or undercurrent alarm threshold, the
ALD power switch automatically turns off. This affects the subsequent TMA commissioning.
Step 4 Check whether the TMA starts working and whether the TMA gain is set correctly.
MML command: DSP TMASUBUNIT
l If the maximum gain is the same as the minimum gain, the TMA has a fixed gain. In this
situation, you are not allowed to set any gains.
l If the TMA is not working, contact Huawei for technical support.
You can set Operation Mode to SITE(Site) to query all ALD information.
If... Then...
The current TMA software Perform Step 8 to set the TMA gain as required, and perform
version is the same as the Step 9 to check whether the TMA generates overcurrent or
target TMA software undercurrent alarms.
version
Step 7 If the eNodeB is configured with multiple TMAs, repeat Step 5 to download the software of
other TMAs.
If the eNodeB is configured with multiple TMAs whose gains can be set, repeat this step to set
the gains for other TMAs.
If the TMA generates overcurrent or undercurrent alarms, clear the alarms by referring to eNodeB
Alarm Reference.
----End
Prerequisites
l The M2000 communicates properly with the eNodeB.
l Environment monitoring devices have been configured.
l The dual in-line package (DIP) switches on the environment monitoring device are properly
set. For details, see APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T(Ver.B) Product
Description, APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T(Ver.C) Product Description
and EMUA User Guide.
Context
The remote radio unit (RRU), universal power environment unit (UPEU) in the baseband unit
(BBU), environment monitoring unit type A (EMUA), and power monitoring unit (PMU) in the
APM30H are all equipped with extended alarm ports. Setting environment alarm parameters
includes adding user-defined alarms and binding the user-defined alarms to the eNodeB.
Environment alarms are used to monitor the equipment room where the eNodeB is located. When
setting environment alarm parameters, you need to bind a user-defined alarm to the specific
subrack, slot, and port on the eNodeB.
Procedure
Step 1 Add a user-defined alarm.
1. Choose Monitor > Alarm Setting > NE Alarm Settings.
2. On the User-Defined Alarm tab page, click the Alarm Definition tab, and click Add. The
Add User-Defined Alarm dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-8.
3. Select an NE type on the left, and set the user-defined alarm parameters, including Alarm
Name, Alarm ID, Alarm Severity Level, and Alarm Type.
NOTE
l Each type of user-defined alarm is allocated a unique alarm ID. The alarm ID ranges from 65033
to 65233.
l The same type of alarm must use the same alarm ID for all eNodeBs. For example, if the door
status alarm ID for an eNodeB is 65035, the door status alarm IDs for other eNodeBs must also
be 65035.
4. Click OK. The information about the added user-defined alarm is displayed in the NE
Alarm Setting window.
5. Click Apply to save the user-defined alarm.
A message is displayed, indicating that saving the user-defined alarm is successful or fails.
If saving the user-defined alarm is successful, click OK. The icon disappears. If
saving the user-defined alarm fails, click Details to view the failure cause and rectify the
fault accordingly. Then, add the user-defined alarm again.
Step 2 Bind the user-defined alarm to the eNodeB.
1. Choose Monitor > Alarm Setting > NE Alarm Settings.
2. On the User-Defined Alarm tab page, click the Alarm Binding tab. Then, add the user-
defined alarm binding relationship.
l Single binding
a. Choose Edit > Add. The Add Alarm Binding dialog box is displayed, as shown
in Figure 3-9.
b. Select an NE from the Select NE navigation tree or enter an NE name in the Search
by name text box on the left. Select an alarm from the Select Alarm/Event
navigation tree or enter an alarm name in the Search by name text box in the
middle. Select an alarm or event ID based on the NE type, and set binding
parameters, including port type, cabinet No., subrack No., and slot No. of the port,
alarm voltage, and upper and lower alarm thresholds.
NOTE
If a digital port is used for the monitoring board, you must set alarm voltage to specify a
condition for reporting alarms. If an analog port is used for the monitoring board, you must
set upper and lower alarm thresholds to specify a condition for reporting alarms.
c. Click OK. The information about the added user-defined alarm is displayed in the
NE Alarm Setting window.
l Batch binding
a. Choose Import/Export > Export Template. The Export Alarm Binding
Template dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-10.
Alternatively, choose Import/Export > Export to export the existing records on
the Alarm Binding tab page by NE type.
b. In the displayed Export Alarm Binding Template dialog box, select the NE type,
and specify the save path and name for the exported template.
c. Open the template and edit it based on actual requirements by referring to the
example in the template.
d. Choose Import/Export > Import to import the edited template to the M2000.
Then, click OK.
The user-defined alarm binding relationship in the template is displayed on the
Alarm Binding tab page. Each record is prefixed with the icon.
3. Select an alarm binding relationship record and click Apply to apply it to the NE.
A message is displayed, indicating that applying the alarm binding relationship is successful
or fails. If applying the alarm binding relationship is successful, click OK. The icon
disappears. If applying the alarm binding relationship fails, click Details to view the failure
cause and rectify the fault accordingly. Then, apply the alarm binding relationship again.
----End
Context
You can manually trigger several external environment alarms to verify the parameter settings.
If external environment alarms can be reported, the parameter settings are correct.
Procedure
Step 1 Manually trigger several external environment alarms. For details, see the appendix Triggering
Monitoring Device Alarms.
Step 2 Check for the external environment alarms on the M2000. For details, see Rectifying Faults
and Clearing Alarms Against the eNodeB Health Check Report. If external environment
alarms can be reported, the parameter settings are correct. If no external environment alarm is
reported, set the parameters again or contact Huawei for technical support.
----End
Example
Assuming that a water sensor is installed for the fan monitoring unit (FMU), to check whether
the parameter settings for water damage alarms are correct, perform the following operations:
1. Run the MOD FMU command with WS_DISABLE(Water-Immersed Sensor
Disabled) in Special Boolean Alarm Flag cleared.
2. Immerse the water sensor or its probe in water for more than 10s, and check whether water
damage alarms are reported. If water damage alarms are reported, the parameter settings
are correct.
Prerequisites
l The RRU or RFU is connected properly.
l The local maintenance terminal (LMT) or M2000 communicates properly with the eNodeB.
l You have logged in to the M2000 as administrator.
Context
The maximum output power of the RRU or RFU is specified by the local operator.
If an eNodeB is configured with multiple RRUs or RFUs, you must use MML commands to
manually reset RRUs or RFUs one by one. If RRUs or RFUs are cascaded, set the maximum
output power for the lowest-level RRU or RFU and then for other RRUs or RFUs to reduce the
impact on upper-level RRUs.
The maximum output power for the RRU or RFU needs to be set only if it is less than the
maximum output power that the RRU or RFU can physically achieve.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the DSP RRU command to query the cabinet No., subrack No., slot No., and transmit
channel No. of the RRU or RFU.
Step 2 Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to query the maximum output power supported by the
RRU or RFU based on the information queried in Step 1.
Step 3 Run the LOC RRUTC command to set the maximum output power for the RRU or RFU.
Step 4 Run the RST BRD command to reset the RRU or RFU.
Step 5 Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to check whether the setting of the maximum output
power for the RRU or RFU takes effect.
If... Then...
The maximum transmit Set the maximum output power within the power specifications
power fails to be set supported by the RRU or RFU. If the maximum output power
still fails to be set, contact Huawei for technical support.
NOTE
Before returning a used but not faulty RRU or RFU to the Spare Parts Center, run the LOC RRUTC
command to set the maximum output power (TXMAXPWR) to 0 and reset the RRU or RFU for the setting
to take effect.
----End
Prerequisites
l The eNodeB and the MME/S-GW are properly connected.
l The negotiation data of the eNodeB to be commissioned is added to the MME/S-GW.
l The testing UE is functional and is registered in the HSS.
l The FTP server for testing the basic services is available.
l The WWW server for testing the basic services is available.
Procedure
l Test the web page browsing service.
Testing Method Access the WWW server and browse the web pages through a UE.
Perform the test 20 times.
Testing Method Access the FTP server and upload files through a UE. Perform the
test 10 times.
Testing Method Access the FTP server and download files through a UE. Perform the
test 10 times.
Expectation Connection success rate > 95%. The calls are uninterrupted and none
of the calls get dropped till they are released. The voice is clear with
no loud noise.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 Query the eNodeB state.
1. On the M2000 tab page, choose Topology > Main Topology. The Main Topology tab
page is displayed.
2. On the Main Topology tab page, select the target network element (NE) and right-click
Query Maintenance Mode. Then, the Query Maintenance Mode dialog box is displayed.
3. Check whether Current NE Maintenance Mode is set to NORMAL. If it is, the
configuration is complete. If it is not, go to Step 2.
Step 2 Set the eNodeB state.
1. On the M2000 tab page, choose Maintenance > Maintenance Mode. The Maintenance
Mode tab page is displayed.
2. Click Set NE Mode at the upper left corner of the Maintenance Mode tab page. The
Set Maintenance Mode dialog box is displayed.
3. Select the target NE and specify the time.
4. Set NE Mode to NORMAL. The eNodeB is changed to the normal state.
5. Click OK. The setting of the maintenance mode is complete.
6. Ensure that the current the eNodeB state is NORMAL by executing Step 1 again.
NOTE
The alarms that are not cleared during commissioning will be reported on the eNodeB in the normal state.
----End
Main Window
Figure 3-11 shows the main window for eNodeB commissioning. Table 3-8 describes the
window.
2 Commissioni Displays all the commissioning tasks and their progress. You can
ng task list right-click a task, and then choose the corresponding menu item
from the shortcut menu to perform an operation.
NOTE
l By default, the GUI displays only commissioning tasks created by a
specific user. To view commissioning tasks created by other users,
3 Shortcut You can right-click a task, and then choose the corresponding
menu menu item from the shortcut menu to perform an operation.
1 Alarm object After selecting an object type, you can view all alarms of this
tree object type in the alarm list in the right pane.
2 Alarm list After an object type is selected, all alarms of this object type are
displayed in the alarm list.
3 Tab named after Displays tabs named after data file types that are required for
a data file type commissioning.
4 Operation result Displays the details about the operations on uploading the type
of data file.
NOTE
Figure 3-14 Procedure for local eNodeB commissioning using a USB flash drive when no SeGW
is deployed
NOTE
You can insert the USB flash drive before or after the eNodeB is powered on. The figure takes inserting
the USB flash drive after the eNodeB is powered on as an example.
1 Local and Prepare for local eNodeB commissioning using a USB Mandat
remote flash drive, which involves obtaining the eNodeB ory
cooperative information and commissioning tools, and obtaining files.
operations For details, see 3.3.2 Preparations.
2 Local Download and activate the eNodeB software and data Mandat
operations configuration files using a USB flash drive. For details, see ory
3.3.3 Downloading and Activating the Software, Data
Configuration File, and License File Using a USB Flash
Drive.
11 Remote Set the maximum transmit power of RRUs or RFUs. RRU Optiona
operations and RFU are short for remote radio unit and radio frequency l
on the unit, respectively. For details, see 3.3.12 Setting the
M2000 Maximum Output Power for RRUs or RFUs.
12 Local and Verify the basic services of the eNodeB. For details, see Optiona
remote 3.3.13 Testing the Basic Services of the eNodeB. l
cooperative
operations
NOTE
After an eNodeB is deployed, local engineers can determine whether the eNodeB is working properly by
observing the indicators on eNodeB boards. For details about the indicator descriptions and operations for
rectifying possible faults, see 5.3 Checking the Status of Indicators.
3.3.2 Preparations
To perform local eNodeB commissioning using a USB flash drive when no security gateway
(SeGW) is deployed in the network, you need to collect related eNodeB information, obtain
commissioning tools, and save the required files to the USB flash drive.
Prerequisites
l The eNodeB software package and data configuration file are available.
l The commissioning license is ready if you need to load and activate the license file using
the USB flash drive.
l The USB flash drive and commissioning files have been scanned by using the antivirus
software and no virus was detected. The commissioning files include the software package,
data configuration file, and license file.
Context
The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption.
Procedure
Step 1 Obtain the tools required for the local commissioning using the USB flash drive, as described
in Table 3-13.
Table 3-13 Tools required for the local commissioning using the USB flash drive
Tool Description
USB flash drive l The USB flash drive is equipped with an indicator that indicates
the data transmission status.
l Capacity ≥ 256 MB
l Model: The USB flash drive must be provided by Huawei.
l The USB flash drive must not provide any additional functions,
such as encryption, virus scanning, and bootstrapping. In
addition, it cannot be an MP3 player, MP4 player, or smart
phone.
l The USB flash drive used for commissioning cannot be used for
other purposes. In addition, irrelevant files, especially those with
Chinese file names, cannot be saved in the USB flash drive.
Step 2 Obtain the eNodeB software and files for automatic eNodeB deployment.
NOTE
l The eNodeB software package is ready, and can be downloaded from http://support.huawei.com.
The default configuration file (Precfg.ini) is provided in the software package.
l The name of the data configuration file must be CFGDATA.XML. The file name is case-sensitive.
Perform configurations according to eNodeB Initial Configuration Guide, change the name of the data
configuration file from M2000.XML to CFGDATA.XML, and save the file to a local computer.
Step 3 Save the required files to the following paths of the USB flash drive, depending on the specific
scenarios, shown in Table 3-14. (The save path is case-sensitive and cannot be changed.)
NOTE
l If only one data configuration file is saved to the USB flash drive, save it to usb:\eNodeB
\CFGDATA.XML. If several data configuration files are saved to the USB flash drive, create several new
ESN folders and save the data configuration files to the corresponding ESN folders. The save path is usb:
\eNodeB\ESN\CFGDATA.XML. The eNodeB preferentially reads the data configuration file in the ESN
folder.
l If you want to load BootROM version during the eNodeB deployment, save the BootROM package
(FIRMWARE.CSP) in the directory where the eNodeB software package (SOFTWARE.CSP) is saved.
l If you want to load a hot or cold patch during the eNodeB deployment, save the patch package
(SWCPATCH.CSP or SWHPATCH.CSP) in the directory where the eNodeB software package
(SOFTWARE.CSP) is saved.
l When you save the software package, save the software version file, that is, the .CSP file to usb:\eNodeB
\Software\.
l The default configuration file is used to download the files for the boards not configured yet. For details
about how to configure the default configuration file, see 5.4 Configuring the Default Configuration
File.
l If only one default configuration file is saved to the USB flash drive, save it to usb:\eNodeB\Precfg.ini. If
several default configuration files are saved to the USB flash drive, create several new ESN folders and save
the data configuration files to the corresponding ESN folders. The save path is usb:\eNodeB\ESN
\Precfg.ini. The eNodeB preferentially reads the default configuration file in the ESN folder.
l Only one license file is allowed in the folder that contains the license file, and the value of ESN must be
ANY.
Table 3-14 Mappings between the files and the specified file paths in the USB flash drive
File Specified File Path in the USB Flash Drive
Step 4 (Optional) Encrypt files in the USB flash drive. For details, see 5.5 Encrypting Files in the
USB Flash Drive.
Step 5 Perform integrity protection for files in the USB flash drive. For details, see 5.5 Encrypting
Files in the USB Flash Drive.
----End
Prerequisites
l A USB flash drive is ready. The required files are saved in the USB flash drive.
l The hardware such as remote radio units (RRUs) and LTE baseband processing units
(LBBPs) have been properly connected.
CAUTION
When you save the required files into the USB flash drive, ensure that the locking switch on the
USB flash drive is disabled. In other words, the USB flash drive must be writable.
Context
Before downloading files from a USB flash drive, the eNodeB verifies the names and formats
of the files.
Before downloading the software and data configuration file, the eNodeB automatically checks
the working mode of the RRU. Then, the eNodeB downloads and activates the corresponding
software and data configuration file based on the working mode of the RRU.
You must pay attention to the following points when you download and activate the software,
data configuration file, and license file using the USB flash drive:
l If the software and data configuration file in the USB flash drive are already activated, they
cannot be reactivated for the same eNodeB because of the cyclic redundancy check (CRC)
function. The CRC function can prevent the software and data configuration file from being
reactivated when the USB flash drive is always inserted into the eNodeB. The CRC function
can also prevent the eNodeB from being reset again after eNodeB deployment using the
USB flash drive.
l If the USB flash drive contains only the eNodeB software and data configuration file, the
eNodeB downloads and activates the eNodeB software, and then downloads and activates
the data configuration file.
l If the eNodeB software or data configuration file is missing in the USB flash drive, the
eNodeB performs the following steps:
– If the software is missing, the eNodeB downloads and activates the data configuration
file and license file except the software.
– If the data configuration file is missing, the eNodeB upgrades to the minimum
configuration of the target version and downloads and activates the license file except
the data configuration file.
– If the license file is missing, the eNodeB downloads and activates the software and data
configuration file except the license file.
l If the eNodeB software upgrade fails, the eNodeB will roll back to the source version.
l Before downloading and activating the data configuration file, the eNodeB does not check
the compatibility between the data configuration file and the eNodeB software version. The
eNodeB performs the following activities:
– If the target software version is not the same as the active software version, the eNodeB
checks the mapping between the data configuration file and the software after the
software is upgraded and the eNodeB is reset. If the software is incompatible with the
data configuration file or the download and activation of the data configuration file fail,
the eNodeB upgrades to the minimum configuration of the target version.
– If the target software version is the same as the active software version, the eNodeB
checks the mapping between the data configuration file and the software without
upgrading the software. If the software is incompatible with the data configuration file
or the download and activation of the data configuration file fail, the eNodeB uses the
data configuration file of the source version.
l The eNodeB does not download or activate the eNodeB software, data configuration file,
or license file from the USB flash drive in any of the following cases:
– The eNodeB software and data configuration file or their saving paths do not exist in
the USB flash drive.
– The target software version is the same as the active software version. In this case, the
eNodeB software cannot be downloaded or activated, but the data configuration file and
license file can be downloaded and activated.
– The data configuration file is the same as the active data configuration. In this case, the
data configuration file cannot be downloaded or activated, but the software and license
file can be downloaded and activated.
– The license file cannot be downloaded, but the software and data configuration file can
be downloaded and activated in any of the following cases:
– The license file to be downloaded is not the commissioning license.
– The license file to be downloaded is the commissioning license, but the value of
ESN is not ANY.
– The configurations or the names of the license file to be downloaded and the active
license file are the same.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the eNodeB is powered on. If it is not powered on, power on the eNodeB. If it
is already powered on, go to Step 2.
NOTE
Ensure that the RRU is powered on and the common public radio interface (CPRI) connections are correct
before you power on the eNodeB. Check for faults by monitoring the CPRI indicator status on the LBBP
after the eNodeB is powered on. For details, see 5.3 Checking the Status of Indicators.
Step 2 When the eNodeB operates properly, insert the USB flash drive into the USB port on the
BBU3900 main control board. If an LMPT is used, the USB port is shown in Figure 3-15; if an
UMPT is used, the USB port is shown in Figure 3-16.
Step 3 Wait for the eNodeB to automatically upgrade the software and data configuration file.
If the download or activation fails, commission the eNodeB by updating the software and data
configuration file in the USB flash drive or using a new USB flash drive.
If the download or activation still fails, perform the local eNodeB commissioning on the LMT.
When the software and data configuration file are being upgraded, the normal status of the
indicators on the USB flash drive and main control board is shown in Table 3-15. If the indicators
are abnormal, see 5.3 Checking the Status of Indicators.
Automatically detecting Steady on Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
the USB flash drive
Downloading the software Blinking Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for
and data configuration file 0.125s)
from the USB flash drive
Activating the eNodeB Steady on Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for
software and data 0.125s)
configuration file
Normal eNodeB operation Steady on Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
WARNING
Do not remove the USB flash drive or reset the eNodeB when downloading or activating the
eNodeB software and data configuration file using the USB flash drive. After the download is
complete, the eNodeB automatically activates the software and data configuration file. Then,
the eNodeB is reset.
Step 4 When the download and activation are successful, rectify faults by referring to Checking the
Status of Indicators.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
CAUTION
The eNodeB software package contains the LMT software. Before downloading the eNodeB
software package, pay attention to the following points:
l When the LMPT is used: the speed of writing to the flash memory is limited, the LMPT
does not support download of the LMT complete package through the USB flash drive. To
reduce the eNodeB deployment duration, some of the files of the LMT software are
automatically downloaded from the M2000 to the eNodeB four hours after the eNodeB
deployment. If you need to use the LMT complete package immediately after the eNodeB
deployment, run the SPL SOFTWARE command on the M2000 after the eNodeB is
connected to the M2000. Set Delay Download File Supply Flag to YES(Supply File that
Support Delay). The remaining files of LMT software are downloaded to the eNodeB. If
you want the LMPT to support download of the LMT complete package through the USB
flash drive, when preparing the files in the USB flash drive, configure the value of
WEBLMT from the default configuration files as YES (case-insensitive).
l When the UMPT is used: the speed of writing to the flash memory increases. The UMPT
supports download of the LMT complete package through the USB flash drive. Therefore,
an LMT package is not required after software activation.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the M2000 client.
Context
You need to upload data files in the following scenarios:
The data files required for eNodeB commissioning need to be saved in specified paths on the
M2000 server. For details, see Table 3-16.
Configurati /export/home/sysm/ftproot/adn/AutoDeploymentData/eNodeB/CfgData/
on data file
Deploymen /export/home/sysm/ftproot/adn/AutoDeploymentData/eNodeB/ADList/
t list
RET /export/home/sysm/ftproot/OutSourcing/RETFile/
antenna
software
version and
configurati
on data file
RET /export/home/sysm/ftproot/adn/AutoDeploymentData/eNodeB/
antenna RETTemplate/
template
Commissio /export/home/sysm/ftproot/adn/AutoDeploymentData/eNodeB/
ning license CommissionLicense/
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 Click Prepare File&Data. The window for preparing files and data is displayed. Upload data
files as required.
If you Then...
need to...
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
Operation, Status, Source File Path, Destination File Path, and
Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the software versions are uploaded.
l Upload in batches
One or multiple software versions corresponding to one or multiple NE types
are uploaded at a time.
1. On the Software & Cold Patch tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS
Client to OSS Server. The NE File Transfer dialog box is displayed.
2. Click in the lower left corner of the dialog box, select an NE type
from the NE Type drop-down list, and select Software from the File
Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Repeat the preceding two steps to select one or multiple files
corresponding to multiple NE types. The selected files are displayed in
the Source Path area.
5. In the Source Path area, select one or multiple files and click Add. The
files to be uploaded are displayed in the lower part of the dialog box.
6. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
If you Then...
need to...
If you Then...
need to...
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
Operation, Status, Source File Path, Destination File Path, and
Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the cold patches are uploaded.
l Upload in batches
One or multiple cold patches corresponding to one or multiple NE types are
uploaded at a time.
1. On the Software & Cold Patch tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS
Client to OSS Server. The NE File Transfer dialog box is displayed.
2. Click in the lower left corner of the dialog box, select an NE type
from the NE Type drop-down list, and select Software from the File
Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Repeat the preceding two steps to select one or multiple files
corresponding to multiple NE types. The selected files are displayed in
the Source Path area.
5. In the Source Path area, select one or multiple files and click Add. The
files to be uploaded are displayed in the lower part of the dialog box.
6. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
If you Then...
need to...
If you Then...
need to...
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
Operation, Status, Source File Path, Destination File Path, and
Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the hot patches are uploaded.
l Upload in batches
One or multiple hot patches corresponding to one or multiple NE types are
uploaded at a time.
1. On the Hot Patch tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS Client to OSS
Server. The NE File Transfer dialog box is displayed.
2. Click in the lower left corner of the dialog box, select an NE type
from the NE Type drop-down list, and select Software from the File
Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Repeat the preceding two steps to select one or multiple files
corresponding to multiple NE types. The selected files are displayed in
the Source Path area.
5. In the Source Path area, select one or multiple files and click Add. The
files to be uploaded are displayed in the lower part of the dialog box.
6. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
If you Then...
need to...
Upload 1. On the NE Configuration Data tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS
configurati Client to OSS Server. The Upload NE Configuration Data dialog box is
on data displayed.
files 2. Select an NE type from the NE Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting files is
displayed. Select the folder where the configuration data file that you want
to upload is stored, click Select. The Upload NE Configuration Data dialog
box is displayed.
CAUTION
The path for saving the eNodeB configuration data file to be uploaded must be ..
\eNodeBName\M2000.XML on the local PC. An eNodeBName folder contains only
one XML file. To upload eNodeB configuration data files, you must select the
eNodeBName folder where the files are stored. You can select multiple
eNodeBName folders at a time.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the Destination
Path area. You can only view the path.
Upload 1. On the Deployment List tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS Client to
deploymen OSS Server. The Upload Deployment List dialog box is displayed.
t lists 2. Select an NE type from the NE Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting files is
displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click Open to return to
the Upload Deployment List dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the Upload Deployment List dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed information
about the operations at the bottom of the window: Operation, Status, Source
File Path, Destination File Path, and Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the deployment lists are uploaded.
NOTE
If the CME is not deployed, you can click Export Template to export an empty
deployment template, fill out the template based on the planned data, and upload the
template. The default names of the exported empty deployment list templates are the
same. Therefore, you are advised to change the template names after filling out these
templates.
If you Then...
need to...
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
Operation, Status, Source File Path, Destination File Path, and
Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the RET antenna software versions and
configuration data files are uploaded.
l Upload in batches
One or multiple RET antenna software versions and configuration data files
corresponding to one or multiple NE types are uploaded at a time.
1. On the RET tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS Client to OSS
Server. The NE File Transfer dialog box is displayed.
2. Click in the lower left corner of the dialog box, select an NE type
from the NE Type drop-down list, and select Software from the File
Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Repeat the preceding two steps to select one or multiple files
corresponding to multiple NE types. The selected files are displayed in
the Source Path area.
5. In the Source Path area, select one or multiple files and click Add. The
files to be uploaded are displayed in the lower part of the dialog box.
6. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
If you Then...
need to...
on data The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
files information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
Operation, Status, Source File Path, Destination File Path, and
Progress.
7. When Progress is 100%, the RET antenna software versions and
configuration data files are uploaded.
Upload 1. On the RET Template tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS Client to
RET OSS Server. The Upload RET Template dialog box is displayed.
antenna 2. Select an NE type from the NE Type drop-down list.
templates
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting files is
displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click Open to return to
the Upload RET Template dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the Upload RET Template dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed information
about the operations at the bottom of the window: Operation, Status, Source
File Path, Destination File Path, and Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the RET antenna templates are uploaded.
NOTE
If the CME is not deployed, you can click Export Template to export an empty RET
antenna template, fill out the template based on the planned data, and upload the
template.
Upload 1. On the Commission License tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS Client
commissio to OSS Server. The Upload Commission License dialog box is displayed.
ning 2. Select an NE type from the NE Type drop-down list.
licenses
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting files is
displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click Open to return to
the Upload Commission License dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the Upload Commission License dialog box. The system
starts uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed information
about the operations at the bottom of the window: Operation, Status, Source
File Path, Destination File Path, and Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the commissioning licenses are uploaded.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l eNodeB commissioning preparations are complete.
l If the M2000 is deployed in SLS mode, radio network planning engineers need to plan the
area to which the eNodeB belongs.
l If the eNodeB and the M2000 server are located on different network segments, you need
to configure the router nearest to the eNodeB as the DHCP relay.
– In an insecure scenario, you need to set the DHCP relay IP address on the router to the
DHCP server IP address of the M2000. In a secure scenario, you need to set the DHCP
relay IP address on the router to the common DHCP server IP address and on the security
gateway, you need to set the IP address of the DHCP server to the DHCP server IP
address of the M2000.
– In situations where the M2000 is deployed in SLS mode, the preceding DHCP server
IP address of the M2000 refers to the host IP address.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Import a Select From Server and choose a deployment list from the drop-
deployment list down list box.
from the server
Import a
Select From Client and click to select a deployment list.
deployment list
from the client
3. (Optional) Select the area to which an eNodeB belongs in the Sub-area area. This step is
mandatory when theM2000 is deployed in SLS mode.
NEs belong to different areas when they are managed by different M2000 servers. If the
M2000 is deployed in SLS mode, NEs are managed by different servers. On the CME client,
these NEs belong to different areas. Select the active or slave M2000 server that the NE
belongs to based on the planned data. Configure the data as follows:
l If the NE was created on the active M2000 server, set the PEERIP parameter for the
OMCH to the IP address of the active M2000 server.
l If the NE was created on the slave M2000 server, set the PEERIP parameter for the
OMCH to the IP address of the slave M2000 server.
l Set the Destination IP parameter for the IP router from the NE to the M2000 server to
an IP address on the the network segment where the M2000 server is located.
NOTE
Onsite deployment engineers need to perform operations based on the areas that have been planned
for eNodeBs by radio network planning engineers.
l If eNodeBs belong to one area, import one deployment list to create eNodeBs in batches.
l If eNodeBs belong to different areas, import multiple deployment lists by area to create eNodeBs.
4. In NE Connection Mode, set a mode for connecting the M2000 and NEs.
After the import is complete, the M2000 checks for mandatory parameters with empty values
and invalid base station configuration data. In addition, the information indicating whether the
import succeeded or failed is displayed on the Operation Information tab page.
l If the import is successful, the M2000 automatically creates a commissioning task for each
eNodeB. The imported eNodeB deployment lists are displayed on the Deployment List tab
page.
l If the import fails, the causes of the failure are displayed on the Operation Information tab
page.
Step 4 (Optional) Modify data in the imported deployment lists as required. This step is mandatory
when you need to modify the data in the imported deployment lists.
NOTE
You can check whether the parameters in eNodeB deployment lists can be modified by referring to
Parameters for the eNodeB Deployment List.
1. Select a commissioning task from the commissioning task list, and double-click the cells
containing parameter values to change the values.
You can change ESNs by double-clicking the cells containing ESNs. Alternatively, you
can perform the following operations to change the ESNs:
a. Click in the ESN value cell. The Bind ESN dialog box is displayed.
b. Select an ESN that is not bound, and click OK to return to the Deployment
Parameter dialog box.
NOTE
You can change the ESNs before OM links are established between base stations and the
M2000.
2. The changed parameter values are displayed in the commissioning task window and
highlighted in red.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l eNodeB commissioning tasks have been started.
Context
A maximum of 500 commissioning tasks can be started at a time. In which, a maximum of 200
commissioning tasks can be being executed and the rest are waiting to be executed in the queue.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 On the Deployment List tab page, right-click one or multiple commissioning tasks and choose
Start from the shortcut menu. The Task Settings dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Select steps in the Select column based on the actual plan.
NOTE
l : Indicates the step that is performed by default. You can choose whether to perform it.
l : Indicates the step that is not performed by default. You can choose whether to perform it.
For details about commissioning procedures and steps, see Table 3-17.
Wait for manual After the OM channel is set up, the status of the
operation commissioning task changes to Waiting for
manual operation. Manually confirm the
completion and proceed with the commissioning
after the commissioning environment of the
network is ready.
Monitor cell Check whether any active cells exist under the
service status eNodeB.
You can monitor alarms of the eNodeB on the
M2000 during software commissioning to locate
and handle exceptions in time.
7 Perform Perform NHC You can perform health check to learn the
NHC eNodeB operating status.
NOTE
The system checks whether all configured RF modules are usable before starting project quality check.
l If all configured RF modules are usable, the system issues project quality check commands to proceed
with subsequent operations.
l If only some configured RF modules are usable, the system sets a timer (2.5 minutes in length and a
maximum of 5 times) to wait until all RF modules are usable. After all RF modules are usable, the
system issues project quality check commands to proceed with subsequent operations. If some RF
modules are still unusable after the timer expires, the system ends the project quality check task.
Step 4 Click OK. The M2000 automatically checks whether the data files required for procedures are
available.
If... Then...
Not all the 1. The Data Preparation Check dialog box is displayed, showing check
required data results about the required data files.
files are available l : Indicates that all the required data files are available.
l : Indicates that not all the required data files are available.
2. Click OK. The Data Preparation Check dialog box is closed.
3. Obtain relevant data files based on the check results.
For detailed operations, see Uploading Data Files.
4. After the required data files are uploaded, start the commissioning
tasks again.
All the required The M2000 starts commissioning. The selected commissioning tasks enter
data files are the Running state.
available NOTE
If all the required data files are available, the Data Preparation Check dialog box
is not displayed.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l eNodeB commissioning tasks have been started.
Context
l By default, the GUI displays only commissioning tasks created by a specific user. To view
commissioning tasks created by other users, click on the toolbar.
l When the system performs NE upgrades during the automatic configuration phase of a
commissioning task, if you restart or delete the commissioning task, the system does not
restart NE upgrades but proceeds until the related NE upgrade task is complete. When the
system displays The NE is performing the following task: ******. Please try later. in
Description for a commissioning task, the NE upgrade task is running. If you want to
perform automatic deployment again, wait until the NE upgrade task is complete. You can
choose Software > NE Upgrade Task Management > NE Upgrade Task to query the
NE upgrade task.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 View the status and progress of commissioning tasks in the commissioning task list.
TIP
You can quickly view the status of commissioning tasks by using either of the following methods:
l In the commissioning task list, the status of the tasks is displayed in Status, the current procedures are
displayed in Current Phase, and details about each procedure are displayed in Description.
l In the commissioning task list, select one or multiple commissioning tasks whose status you want to
view, and then click . The right pane displays execution status of
steps for commissioning procedures.
The displayed information includes the execution status, description, start time and end time of each
commissioning substep.
Step 3 (Optional) Click . The Statistics dialog box is displayed, showing the number of
commissioning tasks in each status. Click OK to close the dialog box.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l Software commissioning monitoring has already started, and the completion of the
commissioning has not yet been confirmed.
Context
The alarms are categorized into E1/T1 port alarms, transmission path alarms, antenna alarms,
software and configuration alarms, board alarms, cell alarms, external alarms, and other alarms
by object type. Other alarms refer to the alarms that cannot be categorized on the basis of specific
objects.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 In the commissioning task list, select one or multiple commissioning tasks for which you want
to handle alarms. Right-click the tasks, and then choose Open Monitor Window from the
shortcut menu. The alarm monitoring window is displayed.
In the displayed window, you can view alarms on eNodeBs by monitored object. For details
about the alarm monitoring window, see Interface Description: eNodeB Commissioning
Window.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l Commissioning tasks are at the monitoring stage, and the completion of the commissioning
tasks has not yet been confirmed.
Context
CAUTION
eNodeB services are interrupted upon antenna fault diagnosis. Therefore, you need to perform
the diagnosis when the eNodeB is not providing services or the services are isolated.
eNodeB fault diagnosis aims to check whether antennas are functioning normally. It involves
the VSWR test, offline intermodulation interference test, and crossed pair test.
After one fault diagnosis operation is performed, the M2000 creates a fault diagnosis task and
displays the diagnosis progress. After the fault diagnosis is complete, you can obtain the fault
diagnosis report.
If you delete a fault diagnosis task, the corresponding diagnosis report is deleted accordingly.
If you restart the M2000 server, all fault diagnosis tasks and reports are deleted.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 In the commissioning task list, select one or multiple commissioning tasks for which you want
to handle alarms. Right-click the tasks, and then choose Open Monitor Window from the
shortcut menu. The alarm monitoring window is displayed.
During the fault diagnosis, a diagnosis task is added to the diagnosis task list.
NOTE
Fault diagnosis may take a long time when there are a large number of detection services executed
by the detection script and there are a large number of NE configuration services.
4. After fault diagnosis is complete, you can right-click a diagnosis task in the diagnosis task
list, and choose Diagnose Report from the shortcut menu to view diagnosis results.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l eNodeB commissioning tasks have been created or started.
Context
For details about operations on commissioning tasks, see Table 3-18.
Opera Description
tion
Delete You can perform this operation on commissioning tasks in any state.
Restart You can perform this operation on commissioning tasks in the Running,
Abnormal, Paused, or Waiting for Confirmation state.
Pause You can perform this operation on commissioning tasks in the Running state.
Resum You can perform this operation on commissioning tasks in the Paused state.
e
Opera Description
tion
Cancel You can perform this operation on commissioning tasks in the Running,
Abnormal, or Paused state.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 On the Deployment List tab page, select one or multiple commissioning tasks and perform
operations as required.
If you Then...
need to...
Restart Right-click the tasks and choose Restart from the shortcut menu. The tasks
return to the Running state.
Pause Right-click the tasks and choose Pause from the shortcut menu. The tasks are
in the Paused state.
Resume Right-click the tasks and choose Resume from the shortcut menu. The tasks
proceed from where they are paused.
Cancel Right-click the tasks and choose Cancel from the shortcut menu. The tasks
return to the Wait for Start state.
Delete 1. Right-click the tasks and choose Delete from the shortcut menu. The
Confirm dialog box is displayed.
2. Click OK. The system starts deleting the tasks.
----End
Prerequisites
l The eNodeB is properly connected to the M2000.
l The status of the eNodeB commissioning task is Waiting for Confirmation.
Procedure
Step 1 On the M2000 client, choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto
Deployment. The eNodeB Auto Deployment tag page is displayed.
Step 2 Right-click one or more eNodeB commissioning tasks to be confirmed from the commissioning
task list, and choose Confirm Completion from the shortcut menu.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l Commissioning tasks are running.
Context
The exported commissioning report records the information about only the selected
commissioning tasks. After you manually delete a commissioning task, the generated
commissioning report does not contain the information about this task.
The deployment report can be stored for a maximum of 30 days. The start date is specified as
the date when the deployment report is generated for the first time.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 In the commissioning task list, select one or multiple commissioning tasks for which you want
to export the report, right-click the tasks, and then choose Export Deployment Report from
the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, asking you whether to export alarm data at the
same time.
If... Then...
You need to export alarm data Click Yes. The Save dialog box is displayed.
You do not need to export alarm data Click No. The Save dialog box is displayed.
You can customize a filename for the commissioning report. If you do not specify the filename,
the M2000 names and saves the file based on the naming convention
Step 4 (Optional) Decompress the generated report file. In the decompressed folder, double-click
index.html to view the commissioning report.
If you choose to export alarm data at the same time in Step 2, the file containing the alarm data
is saved in the alarm sub-folder.
----End
Rectifying Faults and Clearing Alarms Against the eNodeB Health Check Report
This section descries how to rectify faults and clear alarms against the eNodeB health check
report to ensure that the eNodeB runs properly.
Prerequisites
The eNodeB commissioning report is available.
Context
Table 3-19 shows the eNodeB health checklist.
eNodeB software eNodeB software status Check the operating status of the
version eNodeB software.
Configuration data Configuration data consistency Check whether the effective data
applied to modules is consistent
with the configured data in the
database.
Procedure
Step 1 Open the eNodeB commissioning report and view the health check report to determine the
eNodeB operating status.
Step 2 Check the health check report for faults and alarms, and rectify the faults and clear the alarms
by referring to eNodeB Alarm Reference. If all the alarms are cleared but the eNodeB does not
work properly, contact Huawei for technical support.
Step 3 Check for eNodeB alarms.
You can check for eNodeB alarms using one of the following methods:
l on the M2000 client, choose Monitor > Browse Current Alarm. Set the search criteria in
the displayed Filter dialog box to check for eNodeB alarms. For details, see Browse Current
Alarm in the M2000 Online Help.
l On the M2000 client, choose Topology > Main Topology. On the Main Topology tab page,
right-click the eNodeB and choose Query Alarm/Event > Alarm List from the shortcut
menu. Then, double-click an alarm to view details
Step 4 Clear the alarms by taking recommended actions or by referring to eNodeB Alarm Reference.
----End
Prerequisites
l The antenna line device (ALD) is installed correctly.
l The LMT communicates with the eNodeB properly.
l The RET software and data configuration file are available.
l The FTP server functions properly and is connected to the eNodeB correctly.
l Each FTP user has the permission to read a specified folder.
l There is no firewall between the FTP server and the eNodeB.
Context
l Commissioning the RET antenna includes downloading the RET software and data
configuration file, calibrating the RET antenna, setting the RET downtilt, and query RET
overcurrent or undercurrent alarms.
l The RET downtilt must be configured based on the planned network data. Otherwise, the
RET downtilt affects antenna coverage.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the ALD power switch and overcurrent or undercurrent alarm thresholds.
If... Run...
NOTE
The ALD power switch is OFF by default. Before using the RET, set the ALD power switch to ON and
set current alarm thresholds. If the current exceeds the overcurrent or undercurrent alarm threshold, the
ALD power switch automatically turns off. This affects the subsequent RET commissioning.
Step 4 Check whether the RET antenna is working. If the RET antenna is not working, contact Huawei
for technical support.
You can set Operation Mode to SITE(Site) to query all ALD information.
If... Then...
The current RET software Record the device number of the RET antenna, and perform
version is the same as the Step 7 to download the RET data configuration file.
target RET software
version
The current RET software Record the device number of the RET antenna, and perform
version is different from the Step 6 to download the RET software.
target RET software
version
If the RET downtilt fails to be calibrated, check for the cabinet, subrack, and slot configurations and the
mapping between the RET antenna and the sector. If the configurations and mapping are incorrect, run the
MOD RETSUBUNIT command to set them gain, and calibrate the RET downtilt again.
If you run this command without specifying any parameters, RET antennas can be calibrated in batches.
If multiple sectors are configured, repeat Step 9.1 and Step 9.2 to set the downtilts for other
RET antennas.
3. Query the current RET downtilt. If the queried downtilt is the same as the configured
downtilt, the RET downtilt is set successfully.
MML command: DSP RETSUBUNIT
Step 10 Check whether overcurrent or undercurrent alarms are generated on the RET antenna. If
overcurrent or undercurrent alarms are generated, clear them by referring to eNodeB Alarm
Reference.
MML command: DSP RETPORT
----End
Prerequisites
l The TMA is installed correctly.
l The TMA software has been uploaded to the M2000 server.
l The eNodeB is properly connected to the M2000.
l Each FTP user has the permission to read a specified folder.
l The File Transfer Protocol (FTP) port has been enabled on the firewall between the eNodeB
and the M2000 server.
Context
l The FTP server transmits data in plaintext mode by default.
l As a part of the antenna system, the TMA is used to amplify the received weak signals.
l The TMA software is supplied by the antenna line device (ALD) vendor.
l If incorrect TMA software is loaded, the TMA may not work property.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the ALD power switch and overcurrent or undercurrent alarm thresholds.
If... Run...
NOTE
The ALD power switch is OFF by default. Before using the TMA, set the ALD power switch to ON and
set current alarm thresholds. If the current exceeds the overcurrent or undercurrent alarm threshold, the
ALD power switch automatically turns off. This affects the subsequent TMA commissioning.
Step 4 Check whether the TMA starts working and whether the TMA gain is set correctly.
MML command: DSP TMASUBUNIT
l If the maximum gain is the same as the minimum gain, the TMA has a fixed gain. In this
situation, you are not allowed to set any gains.
l If the TMA is not working, contact Huawei for technical support.
You can set Operation Mode to SITE(Site) to query all ALD information.
If... Then...
The current TMA software Perform Step 8 to set the TMA gain as required, and perform
version is the same as the Step 9 to check whether the TMA generates overcurrent or
target TMA software undercurrent alarms.
version
Step 7 If the eNodeB is configured with multiple TMAs, repeat Step 5 to download the software of
other TMAs.
If the eNodeB is configured with multiple TMAs whose gains can be set, repeat this step to set
the gains for other TMAs.
If the TMA generates overcurrent or undercurrent alarms, clear the alarms by referring to eNodeB
Alarm Reference.
----End
Prerequisites
l The M2000 communicates properly with the eNodeB.
l Environment monitoring devices have been configured.
l The dual in-line package (DIP) switches on the environment monitoring device are properly
set. For details, see APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T(Ver.B) Product
Description, APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T(Ver.C) Product Description
and EMUA User Guide.
Context
The remote radio unit (RRU), universal power environment unit (UPEU) in the baseband unit
(BBU), environment monitoring unit type A (EMUA), and power monitoring unit (PMU) in the
APM30H are all equipped with extended alarm ports. Setting environment alarm parameters
includes adding user-defined alarms and binding the user-defined alarms to the eNodeB.
Environment alarms are used to monitor the equipment room where the eNodeB is located. When
setting environment alarm parameters, you need to bind a user-defined alarm to the specific
subrack, slot, and port on the eNodeB.
Procedure
Step 1 Add a user-defined alarm.
1. Choose Monitor > Alarm Setting > NE Alarm Settings.
2. On the User-Defined Alarm tab page, click the Alarm Definition tab, and click Add. The
Add User-Defined Alarm dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-17.
3. Select an NE type on the left, and set the user-defined alarm parameters, including Alarm
Name, Alarm ID, Alarm Severity Level, and Alarm Type.
NOTE
l Each type of user-defined alarm is allocated a unique alarm ID. The alarm ID ranges from 65033
to 65233.
l The same type of alarm must use the same alarm ID for all eNodeBs. For example, if the door
status alarm ID for an eNodeB is 65035, the door status alarm IDs for other eNodeBs must also
be 65035.
4. Click OK. The information about the added user-defined alarm is displayed in the NE
Alarm Setting window.
5. Click Apply to save the user-defined alarm.
A message is displayed, indicating that saving the user-defined alarm is successful or fails.
If saving the user-defined alarm is successful, click OK. The icon disappears. If
saving the user-defined alarm fails, click Details to view the failure cause and rectify the
fault accordingly. Then, add the user-defined alarm again.
Step 2 Bind the user-defined alarm to the eNodeB.
1. Choose Monitor > Alarm Setting > NE Alarm Settings.
2. On the User-Defined Alarm tab page, click the Alarm Binding tab. Then, add the user-
defined alarm binding relationship.
l Single binding
a. Choose Edit > Add. The Add Alarm Binding dialog box is displayed, as shown
in Figure 3-18.
b. Select an NE from the Select NE navigation tree or enter an NE name in the Search
by name text box on the left. Select an alarm from the Select Alarm/Event
navigation tree or enter an alarm name in the Search by name text box in the
middle. Select an alarm or event ID based on the NE type, and set binding
parameters, including port type, cabinet No., subrack No., and slot No. of the port,
alarm voltage, and upper and lower alarm thresholds.
NOTE
If a digital port is used for the monitoring board, you must set alarm voltage to specify a
condition for reporting alarms. If an analog port is used for the monitoring board, you must
set upper and lower alarm thresholds to specify a condition for reporting alarms.
c. Click OK. The information about the added user-defined alarm is displayed in the
NE Alarm Setting window.
l Batch binding
a. Choose Import/Export > Export Template. The Export Alarm Binding
Template dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-19.
Alternatively, choose Import/Export > Export to export the existing records on
the Alarm Binding tab page by NE type.
b. In the displayed Export Alarm Binding Template dialog box, select the NE type,
and specify the save path and name for the exported template.
c. Open the template and edit it based on actual requirements by referring to the
example in the template.
d. Choose Import/Export > Import to import the edited template to the M2000.
Then, click OK.
The user-defined alarm binding relationship in the template is displayed on the
Alarm Binding tab page. Each record is prefixed with the icon.
3. Select an alarm binding relationship record and click Apply to apply it to the NE.
A message is displayed, indicating that applying the alarm binding relationship is successful
or fails. If applying the alarm binding relationship is successful, click OK. The icon
disappears. If applying the alarm binding relationship fails, click Details to view the failure
cause and rectify the fault accordingly. Then, apply the alarm binding relationship again.
----End
Context
You can manually trigger several external environment alarms to verify the parameter settings.
If external environment alarms can be reported, the parameter settings are correct.
Procedure
Step 1 Manually trigger several external environment alarms. For details, see the appendix Triggering
Monitoring Device Alarms.
Step 2 Check for the external environment alarms on the M2000. For details, see Rectifying Faults
and Clearing Alarms Against the eNodeB Health Check Report. If external environment
alarms can be reported, the parameter settings are correct. If no external environment alarm is
reported, set the parameters again or contact Huawei for technical support.
----End
Example
Assuming that a water sensor is installed for the fan monitoring unit (FMU), to check whether
the parameter settings for water damage alarms are correct, perform the following operations:
1. Run the MOD FMU command with WS_DISABLE(Water-Immersed Sensor
Disabled) in Special Boolean Alarm Flag cleared.
2. Immerse the water sensor or its probe in water for more than 10s, and check whether water
damage alarms are reported. If water damage alarms are reported, the parameter settings
are correct.
Prerequisites
l The RRU or RFU is connected properly.
l The local maintenance terminal (LMT) or M2000 communicates properly with the eNodeB.
l You have logged in to the M2000 as administrator.
Context
The maximum output power of the RRU or RFU is specified by the local operator.
If an eNodeB is configured with multiple RRUs or RFUs, you must use MML commands to
manually reset RRUs or RFUs one by one. If RRUs or RFUs are cascaded, set the maximum
output power for the lowest-level RRU or RFU and then for other RRUs or RFUs to reduce the
impact on upper-level RRUs.
The maximum output power for the RRU or RFU needs to be set only if it is less than the
maximum output power that the RRU or RFU can physically achieve.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the DSP RRU command to query the cabinet No., subrack No., slot No., and transmit
channel No. of the RRU or RFU.
Step 2 Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to query the maximum output power supported by the
RRU or RFU based on the information queried in Step 1.
Step 3 Run the LOC RRUTC command to set the maximum output power for the RRU or RFU.
Step 4 Run the RST BRD command to reset the RRU or RFU.
Step 5 Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to check whether the setting of the maximum output
power for the RRU or RFU takes effect.
If... Then...
The maximum transmit Set the maximum output power within the power specifications
power fails to be set supported by the RRU or RFU. If the maximum output power
still fails to be set, contact Huawei for technical support.
NOTE
Before returning a used but not faulty RRU or RFU to the Spare Parts Center, run the LOC RRUTC
command to set the maximum output power (TXMAXPWR) to 0 and reset the RRU or RFU for the setting
to take effect.
----End
Prerequisites
l The eNodeB and the MME/S-GW are properly connected.
l The negotiation data of the eNodeB to be commissioned is added to the MME/S-GW.
l The testing UE is functional and is registered in the HSS.
l The FTP server for testing the basic services is available.
l The WWW server for testing the basic services is available.
Procedure
l Test the web page browsing service.
Testing Method Access the WWW server and browse the web pages through a UE.
Perform the test 20 times.
Testing Method Access the FTP server and upload files through a UE. Perform the
test 10 times.
Testing Method Access the FTP server and download files through a UE. Perform the
test 10 times.
Expectation Connection success rate > 95%. The calls are uninterrupted and none
of the calls get dropped till they are released. The voice is clear with
no loud noise.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 Query the eNodeB state.
1. On the M2000 tab page, choose Topology > Main Topology. The Main Topology tab
page is displayed.
2. On the Main Topology tab page, select the target network element (NE) and right-click
Query Maintenance Mode. Then, the Query Maintenance Mode dialog box is displayed.
3. Check whether Current NE Maintenance Mode is set to NORMAL. If it is, the
configuration is complete. If it is not, go to Step 2.
Step 2 Set the eNodeB state.
1. On the M2000 tab page, choose Maintenance > Maintenance Mode. The Maintenance
Mode tab page is displayed.
2. Click Set NE Mode at the upper left corner of the Maintenance Mode tab page. The
Set Maintenance Mode dialog box is displayed.
3. Select the target NE and specify the time.
4. Set NE Mode to NORMAL. The eNodeB is changed to the normal state.
5. Click OK. The setting of the maintenance mode is complete.
6. Ensure that the current the eNodeB state is NORMAL by executing Step 1 again.
NOTE
The alarms that are not cleared during commissioning will be reported on the eNodeB in the normal state.
----End
Main Window
Figure 3-20 shows the main window for eNodeB commissioning. Table 3-20 describes the
window.
2 Commissioni Displays all the commissioning tasks and their progress. You can
ng task list right-click a task, and then choose the corresponding menu item
from the shortcut menu to perform an operation.
NOTE
l By default, the GUI displays only commissioning tasks created by a
specific user. To view commissioning tasks created by other users,
3 Shortcut You can right-click a task, and then choose the corresponding
menu menu item from the shortcut menu to perform an operation.
1 Alarm object After selecting an object type, you can view all alarms of this
tree object type in the alarm list in the right pane.
2 Alarm list After an object type is selected, all alarms of this object type are
displayed in the alarm list.
3 Tab named after Displays tabs named after data file types that are required for
a data file type commissioning.
4 Operation result Displays the details about the operations on uploading the type
of data file.
NOTE
Figure 3-23 Procedure for eNodeB commissioning on the LMT when no SeGW is deployed
1 Local and Prepare for local eNodeB commissioning on the LMT, Mandat
remote which involves obtaining the eNodeB information and ory
cooperative commissioning tools, and obtaining files. For details, see
operations 3.4.2 Preparations.
7 Handle eNodeB alarms on the LMT. For details, see 3.4.8 Mandat
Handling the eNodeB Alarms on the LMT. ory
8 Check the running status of the eNodeB on the LMT. For Mandat
details, see 3.4.9 Checking the Operating Status of the ory
eNodeB on the LMT.
9 Verify the basic services of the eNodeB. For details, see Mandat
3.4.10 Testing the Basic Services of the eNodeB. ory
NOTE
After an eNodeB is deployed, local engineers can determine whether the eNodeB is working properly by
observing the indicators on eNodeB boards. For details about the indicator descriptions and operations for
rectifying possible faults, see 5.3 Checking the Status of Indicators.
3.4.2 Preparations
Before commissioning an eNodeB locally using an LMT when no SeGW is deployed, you need
to collect related eNodeB information, obtain commissioning tools, and configure the File
Transfer Protocol (FTP) server.
Procedure
Step 1 Collect the information related to the eNodeB, as described in Table 3-25.
Step 2 Obtain the tools required for local commissioning on the LMT, as described in Table 3-26.
Table 3-26 Tools required for local eNodeB commissioning on the LMT
Tool Description
Ethernet cable LMPT: The Ethernet cable directly connects the laptop to the
eNodeB. UMPT: The Ethernet cable connects the laptop to the USB-
to-Ethernet port transfer cable.
Local maintenance The LMA connects the USB port on the UMPT to the Ethernet cable.
adapter (LMA)
Testing UE The testing UE is functional and has been registered with the home
subscriber server (HSS).
----End
Prerequisites
l The firewall has been disabled between the FTP server and the eNodeB.
l All the FTP servers on the LMT PC have been disabled.
l The software and data configuration file are available and saved in the same directory on
the LMT PC.
CAUTION
The save path must contain folders of less than three levels. If the save path contains folders
of more than three levels, downloading files using the FTP server may fail.
Context
The FTP server IP address refers to the IP address of the LMT PC and must be on the same
network segment as the local maintenance IP address of the LTE main processing transmission
unit (LMPT).
Procedure
Step 1 Type the local maintenance IP address of the LMPT in the address box of the Internet Explorer.
The default IP address is 192.168.0.49.
Step 2 Click Go to. The LMT login page is displayed. The default user name and password are admin
and hwbs@com (case sensitive), respectively.
Step 3 Download the FTP server software if no FTP server is available.
1. On the LMT, click the Software Management tab. The Software Management tab page
is displayed.
2. In the navigation tree, double-click FTP Server Configuration. The FTP Server
Configuration window is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-24.
3. Click Download FTP Tool. The File Download-Security Warning dialog box is
displayed.
4. Click Save to save the FTP server software package (SFTPServer.exe) to the LMT PC.
2. Right-click and choose FTP server configure from the shortcut menu. The FTP server
configuration dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-25.
3. Set User name, Password, and Working directory for the FTP server. The default user
name and password are admin. Working directory must be set to the directory where the
software and data configuration file are saved. The default transmission security mode is
Both.
4. Click OK.
Step 5 Save the FTP server configuration on the LMT main window.
1. On the LMT, click Software Management. The Software Management tab page is
displayed.
2. On the FTP Server Configure tab page, set IP address for the FTP server.
3. Enter User name and Password based on the settings in Step 4.3. The default name and
password are admin.
4. Click Save to save the FTP server configuration.
----End
Prerequisites
l The LMT communicates properly with the eNodeB.
l The FTP server is connected to the eNodeB in the same network segment and is functioning
properly.
l Each FTP user has the permission to read a specified folder.
l There is no firewall between the FTP server and the eNodeB.
Context
l You can obtain the eNodeB software package from http://support.huawei.com/ and save
it onto the local computer. The eNodeB software package has been digitally signed. If the
eNodeB software package has been tampered with, a warning message is displayed when
the package is being downloaded. In this situation, you must obtain a correct eNodeB
software package.
l The name of the data configuration file for local commissioning on the LMT is LMT.xml.
The file name is case-sensitive. You can configure the data configuration file by referring
to the eNodeB Initial Configuration Guide and save it onto the local PC. Then, change the
file name to LMT.xml.
l If you configure eNodeB parameters by running MML commands, do not download or
activate the LMT.xml file.
Procedure
Step 1 In the MML window on the LMT, run the LST VER command to query the active eNodeB
software version.
If... Then...
The active software version is Download and activate only the data configuration file.
the target software version
The active software version is Download and activate both the eNodeB software and data
not the target software version configuration file.
Step 2 Download and activate the eNodeB software and data configuration file using the GUI or MML
commands.
l Using GUI
1. On the LMT, click Software Management. The Software Management dialog box is
displayed.
NOTE
If the software management function on the LMT is unavailable, the LMT provides a minimum
configuration. In this case, you must supplement the LMT software package to a complete one
to download the eNodeB software and data configuration file using the software management
function. For details, see How to Switch a Minimum LMT Package to a Complete LMT Package
in eNodeB LMT User Guide.
2. In the navigation tree, double-click Download and Activate Software. The Download
and Activate Software window is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-26.
3. Select tasks to be performed according to Step 1 and set the parameters related to the
tasks.
NOTE
l You are advised to select YES(Delay Download) before downloading the eNodeB software.
After the software activation is complete, you can use only the basic LMT functions. To use
all LMT functions, run the SPL SOFTWARE command with Delay Download File Supply
Flag set to YES(Supply File that Support Delay).
l If you have selectedYES(Delay Download), but did not supplement the software, you can
use only the basic LMT functions. However, this does not affect the establishment of an OML
between the M2000 and the eNodeB.
l If you have selectedNO(Not Delay Download), you can use all LMT functions after the
software is activated. However, the eNodeB deployment will be prolonged for 10 minutes.
l You can select XML or DBS, depending on the type of the data configuration file to be
downloaded and activated.
l You must enter the version number of the target software for activation.
l You must save the eNodeB software package, data configuration file, and license file in the
same directory on the FTP server.
4. Click Execute. The eNodeB performs the selected tasks in sequence. There is a progress
bar under the Execute button, indicating the current progress and task status. When the
progress bar of each task displays 100%, the download and activation are complete.
NOTE
l If a task is not selected, the eNodeB skips the task and goes to the next task.
l If a task fails, the eNodeB stops the task and subsequent tasks.
l After the data configuration file is activated, it will take effect by default when the eNodeB is
reset.
l After the eNodeB software is activated, the software will take effect when the eNodeB
automatically resets. If the data configuration file has been activated, it will also take effect when
the eNodeB resets.
l Using MML commands
1. Select tasks to be performed according to Step 1. Table 3-27 describes the mapping
between tasks and MML commands.
CAUTION
l After the eNodeB software is downloaded and activated and the eNodeB resets, log in to the
eNodeB using the LMT within 30 minutes. Otherwise, the eNodeB will roll back to the source
version.
l The eNodeB automatically resets after the eNodeB software is activated. Before the eNodeB
automatically resets, do not run a reset command to reset the eNodeB or boards, power off
the eNodeB, or remove any boards. Because such operations may lead to download and
activation failures, or may clear or damage the software and files on the eNodeB.
----End
Prerequisites
l The LMT communicates properly with the eNodeB.
l The commissioning license is available on the FTP server.
Context
Apply for the commissioning license of the eNodeB with the help of Huawei technical support.
NOTE
The commissioning license has a time limit. Replace the commissioning license with a commercial license in
time after the eNodeB commissioning is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the INS LICENSE command to download and activate the license file on the eNodeB.
----End
Prerequisites
l The LMT communicates properly with the eNodeB.
l The license for ALD management is available.
the RET antenna, setting the RET antenna downtilt, and querying RET overcurrent or
undercurrent alarms. The RET downtilt must be configured based on the planned network data.
Otherwise, the RET downtilt affects antenna coverage.
Prerequisites
l The antenna line device (ALD) is installed correctly.
l The LMT communicates with the eNodeB properly.
l The RET software and data configuration file are available.
l The FTP server functions properly and is connected to the eNodeB correctly.
l Each FTP user has the permission to read a specified folder.
l There is no firewall between the FTP server and the eNodeB.
Context
Figure 3-27 shows the procedure for commissioning the RET antenna.
Table 3-28 describes the preparations for commissioning the RET antenna.
Item Description
RET data configuration file The RET data configuration file is supplied
by the ALD vendor. The configuration data
varies according to the vendor and RET
antenna model.
Information about the RET downtilt The RET downtilt is defined in the network
plan.
l The RET antenna does not provide the file check function. If an incorrect RET data
configuration file is downloaded, the RET antenna may become unavailable.
l Calibrating the RET antenna is mandatory after the RET antenna is installed. If you skip
this step, the RET downtilt may be incorrect and the network coverage is affected.
l The RET antenna does not need to be calibrated again after you reset or power off the RET
antenna. After calibrating the RET antenna, you must set the RET downtilt again to ensure
that the downtilt is correct without affecting the network coverage.
l Setting an RET downtilt takes a maximum of 2 minutes.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the ALD power switch and overcurrent or undercurrent alarm thresholds.
If... Run...
NOTE
The ALD power switch is OFF by default. Before using the RET, set the ALD power switch to ON and
set current alarm thresholds. If the current exceeds the overcurrent or undercurrent alarm threshold, the
ALD power switch automatically turns off. This affects the subsequent RET commissioning.
Step 4 Check whether the RET antenna is working. If the RET antenna is not working, contact Huawei
for technical support.
MML command: DSP RETSUBUNIT
You can set Operation Mode to SITE(Site) to query all ALD information.
If... Then...
The current RET software Record the device number of the RET antenna, and perform
version is the same as the Step 7 to download the RET data configuration file.
target RET software
version
The current RET software Record the device number of the RET antenna, and perform
version is different from the Step 6 to download the RET software.
target RET software
version
If the eNodeB is configured with multiple RET antennas, repeat Step 6 to download the software
of other RET antennas.
Step 7 Download the RET data configuration file supplied by the ALD vendor.
1. Query the number of subunits for each RET antenna and record the query results.
MML command: DSP RET
The subunits of an RET antenna are numbered from 1 in ascending order. You must
download the data configuration file for each subunit.
2. Download the data configuration file for each subunit.
MML command: DLD RETCFGDATA
If the RET downtilt fails to be calibrated, check for the cabinet, subrack, and slot configurations and the
mapping between the RET antenna and the sector. If the configurations and mapping are incorrect, run the
MOD RETSUBUNIT command to set them gain, and calibrate the RET downtilt again.
If you run this command without specifying any parameters, RET antennas can be calibrated in batches.
----End
Prerequisites
l The TMA is installed correctly.
l The TMA software is available.
l The LMT communicates properly with the eNodeB.
l The FTP server functions properly and is properly connected to the eNodeB on the same
network segment.
l Each FTP user has the permission to read a specified folder.
CAUTION
Ensure that there is no firewall between the FTP server and the eNodeB. If a firewall is installed
on the PC, disable it.
Context
l As a part of the antenna system, the TMA is used to amplify the received weak signals.
l The TMA software is supplied by the antenna line device (ALD) vendor.
l If incorrect TMA software is loaded, the TMA may not work property.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the ALD power switch and overcurrent or undercurrent alarm thresholds.
If... Run...
NOTE
The ALD power switch is OFF by default. Before using the TMA, set the ALD power switch to ON and
set current alarm thresholds. If the current exceeds the overcurrent or undercurrent alarm threshold, the
ALD power switch automatically turns off. This affects the subsequent TMA commissioning.
Step 4 Check whether the TMA starts working and whether the TMA gain is set correctly.
MML command: DSP TMASUBUNIT
l If the maximum gain is the same as the minimum gain, the TMA has a fixed gain. In this
situation, you are not allowed to set any gains.
l If the TMA is not working, contact Huawei for technical support.
You can set Operation Mode to SITE(Site) to query all ALD information.
If... Then...
The current TMA software Perform Step 8 to set the TMA gain as required, and perform
version is the same as the Step 9 to check whether the TMA generates overcurrent or
target TMA software undercurrent alarms.
version
Step 7 If the eNodeB is configured with multiple TMAs, repeat Step 5 to download the software of
other TMAs.
If the eNodeB is configured with multiple TMAs whose gains can be set, repeat this step to set
the gains for other TMAs.
If the TMA generates overcurrent or undercurrent alarms, clear the alarms by referring to eNodeB
Alarm Reference.
----End
Prerequisites
l The antenna system has been properly installed on the eNodeB.
l The local maintenance terminal (LMT) communicates properly with the eNodeB.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST RRU command to query the VSWR alarm threshold.
If... Then...
The test value is less than The antenna system is properly installed. End the
the VSWR alarm threshold commissioning.
The test value is greater The antenna system is not properly installed. Rectify the faults
than or equal to the VSWR by referring to the handling procedures for the VSWR alarm in
alarm threshold the eNodeB Alarm Reference.
----End
Prerequisites
l The local maintenance terminal (LMT) communicates properly with the eNodeB.
l The environment monitoring equipment has been configured.
l The DIP switches on the environment monitoring device are properly set. For details, see
the APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T(Ver.B) Product Description,
APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T(Ver.C) Product Description and EMUA
User Guide.
Context
The remote radio unit (RRU), universal power environment unit (UPEU) in the baseband unit
(BBU), environment monitoring unit type A (EMUA), and power monitoring unit (PMU) in the
APM30H are all equipped with extended alarm ports.
The external environment alarm and the extended alarm port are already bound together. For
details, see Table 3-29.
AlmPort SET ALMPORT This command is used to set the input port of
environment signals.
If the alarm ID of an external environment alarm is predefined, the following steps can be
skipped. For details about the predefined alarm IDs, see eNodeB Alarm Reference.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST ALMPORT command to check whether external alarm ports are configured
correctly, whether ports are enabled, and whether port types and alarm severities are the same
as the configured values.
Step 2 Run the SET ENVALMPARA command to set the name, severity, and event type of an external
environment alarm.
NOTE
ALM ID is configured when the external environmental alarm and the extended alarm port are bound.
----End
Context
You can manually trigger external environment alarms to verify the parameter settings. If the
external environment alarms can be reported correctly, the parameter settings are correct.
Procedure
Step 1 Manually trigger external environment alarms. For details, see the appendix Triggering
Monitoring Device Alarms.
Step 2 Check for active alarms on the local maintenance terminal (LMT). For details, see 3.4.8
Handling the eNodeB Alarms on the LMT. If the external environment alarms can be reported
correctly, the parameter settings are correct. If no external environment alarm is reported, reset
the parameters or contact Huawei for technical support.
----End
Example
Assuming that a water sensor is installed for the fan monitoring unit (FMU), to check whether
the parameter settings for water damage alarms are correct, perform the following operations:
1. Run the MOD FMU command with WS_DISABLE(Water-Immersed Sensor
Disabled) in Special Boolean Alarm Flag cleared.
2. Immerse the water sensor or its probe in water for more than 10s, and check whether water
damage alarms are reported. If water damage alarms are reported, the parameter settings
are correct.
Prerequisites
l The RRU or RFU is connected properly.
l The local maintenance terminal (LMT) or M2000 communicates properly with the eNodeB.
l You have logged in to the M2000 as administrator.
Context
The maximum output power of the RRU or RFU is specified by the local operator.
If an eNodeB is configured with multiple RRUs or RFUs, you must use MML commands to
manually reset RRUs or RFUs one by one. If RRUs or RFUs are cascaded, set the maximum
output power for the lowest-level RRU or RFU and then for other RRUs or RFUs to reduce the
impact on upper-level RRUs.
The maximum output power for the RRU or RFU needs to be set only if it is less than the
maximum output power that the RRU or RFU can physically achieve.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the DSP RRU command to query the cabinet No., subrack No., slot No., and transmit
channel No. of the RRU or RFU.
Step 2 Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to query the maximum output power supported by the
RRU or RFU based on the information queried in Step 1.
Step 3 Run the LOC RRUTC command to set the maximum output power for the RRU or RFU.
Step 4 Run the RST BRD command to reset the RRU or RFU.
Step 5 Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to check whether the setting of the maximum output
power for the RRU or RFU takes effect.
If... Then...
The maximum transmit Set the maximum output power within the power specifications
power fails to be set supported by the RRU or RFU. If the maximum output power
still fails to be set, contact Huawei for technical support.
NOTE
Before returning a used but not faulty RRU or RFU to the Spare Parts Center, run the LOC RRUTC
command to set the maximum output power (TXMAXPWR) to 0 and reset the RRU or RFU for the setting
to take effect.
----End
Prerequisites
The LMT communicates properly with the eNodeB.
Procedure
Step 1 On the LMT, click the Alarm/Event button. The Alarm/Event tab page is displayed.
Step 2 Check for active alarms on the Engineering Alarm tab page under the Browse Alarm/Event
tab page.
Step 3 Double-click an active alarm. The Detailed Information dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Click Solution... to know the detailed information and alarm handling procedure. Clear the active
alarm by following the alarm handling procedure.
----End
Prerequisites
The LMT communicates properly with the eNodeB.
Context
Table 3-30 lists the eNodeB device checklist.
eNodeB Check the active eNodeB software, including the version and operating
software version status.
Hardware status Check the status of the radio frequency (RF) unit, receive channel,
transmit channel, and boards.
Interface status Check the configuration related to IP paths, common public radio
interface (CPRI) ports, remote maintenance channels, E1/T1 ports,
Ethernet ports, and Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP) links
of the eNodeB.
Procedure
Step 1 On the LMT, click Self-Test. On the displayed Self-Test tab page, a man-machine language
(MML) command script with the complete parameter settings is automatically imported to the
command area.
Step 2 Click Execute. The execution result is displayed in the area below Execute.
NOTE
If all items pass the check, the eNodeB operates properly. Otherwise, check for active alarms and clear them. If
all active alarms are cleared but the fault persists, contact Huawei for technical support.
----End
Prerequisites
l The eNodeB and the MME/S-GW are properly connected.
l The negotiation data of the eNodeB to be commissioned is added to the MME/S-GW.
l The testing UE is functional and is registered in the HSS.
Procedure
l Test the web page browsing service.
Testing Method Access the WWW server and browse the web pages through a UE.
Perform the test 20 times.
Testing Method Access the FTP server and upload files through a UE. Perform the
test 10 times.
Testing Method Access the FTP server and download files through a UE. Perform the
test 10 times.
Expectation Connection success rate > 95%. The calls are uninterrupted and none
of the calls get dropped till they are released. The voice is clear with
no loud noise.
----End
Prerequisites
l The transmission link between the eNodeB and M2000 is functioning properly.
l The M2000 server and client are running properly.
l You have obtained the eNodeB information such as the name, IP address, version, and
administrative region of the eNodeB.
Context
To reduce maintenance workload, the M2000 enables you to create eNodeBs in batches in the
topology. For details, see Creating Multiple Physical NEs in the M2000 Online Help. This
section describes the procedure for creating an eNodeB.
Procedure
Step 1 Create an eNodeB in the topology.
1. On the M2000 client, choose Topology > Main Topology. The Main Topology tab page
is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-28.
2. In the Physical Root navigation tree or the physical view, right-click the subnet for the
eNodeB to be created and choose New > NE from the shortcut menu. The Create NE dialog
box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-29.
3. In the Create NE dialog box, select the specific eNodeB from Access Network Series.
4. Configure the eNodeB information in the right window of the dialog box.
5. Click OK to create the eNodeB.
NOTE
The Create NE Progress dialog box is displayed, indicating the NE creation progress. After the eNodeB
is successfully created, the M2000 automatically obtains the eNodeB configuration information.
If the network connection between the M2000 and the created eNodeB is faulty, the eNodeB is still
displayed in the specified location in the topology. However, the eNodeB is disconnected and is shown
as .
6. Click Close to close the Progress dialog box.
Step 2 About 5 minutes later, observe the eNodeB icon on the Main Topology tab page.
If... Then...
----End
Procedure
Step 1 Query the eNodeB state.
1. On the M2000 tab page, choose Topology > Main Topology. The Main Topology tab
page is displayed.
2. On the Main Topology tab page, select the target network element (NE) and right-click
Query Maintenance Mode. Then, the Query Maintenance Mode dialog box is displayed.
3. Check whether Current NE Maintenance Mode is set to NORMAL. If it is, the
configuration is complete. If it is not, go to Step 2.
Step 2 Set the eNodeB state.
1. On the M2000 tab page, choose Maintenance > Maintenance Mode. The Maintenance
Mode tab page is displayed.
2. Click Set NE Mode at the upper left corner of the Maintenance Mode tab page. The
Set Maintenance Mode dialog box is displayed.
3. Select the target NE and specify the time.
4. Set NE Mode to NORMAL. The eNodeB is changed to the normal state.
5. Click OK. The setting of the maintenance mode is complete.
6. Ensure that the current the eNodeB state is NORMAL by executing Step 1 again.
NOTE
The alarms that are not cleared during commissioning will be reported on the eNodeB in the normal state.
----End
This chapter describes the following procedures when the SeGW is deployed in the network:
eNodeB automatic discovery, PnP remote commissioning in unified encryption mode, PnP
remote commissioning in differentiated encryption mode, local commissioning using a USB
flash drive in unified encryption mode, local commissioning using a USB flash drive in
differentiated encryption mode, and local commissioning on the LMT.
Background Information
eNodeB service data can be processed in either unified encryption mode or differentiated
encryption mode. Figure 4-1 shows the networking in unified encryption mode, and Figure
4-2 shows the networking in differentiated encryption mode.
Generally, either unified encryption or differentiated encryption can be used for S1/X2/OM
channels, depending on the operator's requirements. However, differentiated encryption is
recommended if the data communication network (DCN) where the M2000 is located is directly
connected to the non-security domain in the transport network as shown in Figure 4-3. In other
words, the encryption mode to use mainly depends on the structure of the operator's transport
network.
When the SeGW is deployed in the network, the unified and differentiated encryption modes
have the following differences during eNodeB deployment:
l In unified encryption mode, the eNodeB and the M2000 belong to different domains, and
data must pass through the SeGW before traveling to the eNodeB or M2000. Therefore, to
communicate with the M2000, the eNodeB needs to set up an IPSec tunnel to the SeGW
first during the channel self-setup procedure in deployment by PnP or during routine OM.
l In differentiated encryption mode, the eNodeB and the M2000 belong to the same domain,
and data does not need to pass through the SeGW before traveling to the eNodeB or M2000.
Therefore, the OM channel can be a plaintext or SSL connection. During the channel self-
setup procedure in deployment by PnP, the eNodeB can directly send DHCP messages to
the DHCP server built in the M2000. Therefore, eNodeB deployment by PnP in
differentiated encryption mode can be performed in the same way as in non-secure
networking mode. For data configuration, the difference between the two encryption modes
only lies in IPSec configuration.
4.1 Overview of eNodeB Automatic Discovery (with the SeGW)
During eNodeB commissioning, the eNodeB sets up an operation and maintenance (OM)
channel with the M2000 using automatic discovery. This process does not require manual
intervention.
4.2 PnP Remote Commissioning in Unified Encryption Mode (with the SeGW)
To commission an eNodeB when the SeGW is deployed, you need to enable the plug and play
(PnP) function of the eNodeB on the M2000 client. After the faults (if any) occurred during
automatic commissioning are rectified and the commissioning procedure is complete, the
eNodeB can work properly.
4.3 PnP Remote Commissioning in Differentiated Encryption Mode (with the SeGW)
To commission an eNodeB on the M2000 when the SeGW is deployed, you need to enable the
plug and play (PnP) function of the eNodeB on the M2000 client. If any faults occur during
automatic commissioning, rectify the faults. After the commissioning is complete, the eNodeB
starts working properly. In this scenario, eNodeB service data is processed in differentiated
encryption mode.
4.4 Local Commissioning Using a USB Flash Drive in Unified Encryption Mode (with the
SeGW)
To perform USB-based local eNodeB commissioning in unified encryption mode, you need to
upgrade the eNodeB software and data configuration files using a Universal Serial Bus (USB)
flash drive, and check the running status of indicators on the eNodeB. Then, create an eNodeB
commissioning task on the M2000.
4.5 Local Commissioning Using a USB Flash Drive in Differentiated Encryption Mode (with
the SeGW)
To commission an eNodeB locally using a Universal Serial Bus (USB) flash drive in
differentiated encryption mode, you need to upgrade the eNodeB software and data configuration
files using the USB flash drive, and check the running status of indicators on the eNodeB. Then,
create an eNodeB commissioning task on the M2000.
4.6 Local Commissioning on the LMT(with the SeGW)
To commission an eNodeB on local using a local maintenance terminal (LMT), you need to
upgrade the eNodeB software, download the configuration files, commission the antenna line
devices (ALDs), and check the running status of the eNodeB on the LMT. Then, establish the
operation and maintenance (O&M) channel between the eNodeB and the M2000 on the M2000
server.
l When the M2000 server is deployed by using SLS, if you want to create an eNodeB on the master
server, the IP address of the M2000 refers to the IP address of the master server; if if you want to create
an eNodeB on the slave server, the IP address of the M2000 refers to the IP address of the slave server.
l If you want to check the DHCP message, log in to the LMT and create a PNP tracing task on the LMT.
For details, see eNodeB LMT User Guide.
Figure 4-4 eNodeB automatic discovery during PnP remote commissioning in unified
encryption mode (using PKI)
eNodeB Automatic Discovery During Local Commissioning Using a USB Flash Drive in
Unified Encryption Mode (Using PKI)
Figure 4-5 shows the eNodeB automatic discovery process in this scenario. The process is as
follows:
1. Insert the commissioning USB flash drive into the USB port on the eNodeB.
2. The eNodeB performs POST.
3. The eNodeB reads and activates the eNodeB software and configuration files in the USB
flash drive, and then automatically resets.
4. After resetting, the eNodeB accesses the operator's network using physical connections. If
the eNodeB detects that the OMCH link is interrupted because there is no operator's device
certificate and root certificate, the eNodeB initiates IEEE802.1X-based access control
authentication (which is optional) and scans VLANs to obtain VLAN IDs (in VLAN
networking scenarios). Then, the eNodeB sends a DHCP request to the public DHCP server
to obtain the following information: temporary OM IP address, temporary OM IP mask,
IP address of the DNS (if DNS is configured on the public DHCP server), default gateway,
IP address of the CA server (if configured), IP address of the SeGW, CA port number, CA
name, and IP address of the M2000.
5. With the predefined Huawei device certificate, the eNodeB implements unidirectional
authentication together with the CA server (authenticates the validity of the eNodeB) based
on CMPv2 and automatically obtains the operator's device certificate and root certificate
from the CA server. If the operator's device certificate and root certificate have been
configured for the eNodeB, they do not need to be reobtained.
6. The eNodeB sets up an IPSec tunnel with the SeGW after bidirectional security
authentication is successfully performed using certificates.
7. The eNodeB sets up an SSL-encrypted OM channel to start network operation.
Figure 4-5 eNodeB automatic discovery during local commissioning using a USB flash drive
in unified encryption mode (using PKI)
eNodeB Automatic Discovery During Local Commissioning Using a USB Flash Drive in
Unified Encryption Mode (Using PSK)
Figure 4-6 shows the eNodeB automatic discovery process in this scenario. The process is as
follows:
1. Insert the commissioning USB flash drive into the USB port on the eNodeB.
Figure 4-6 eNodeB automatic discovery during local commissioning using a USB flash drive
in unified encryption mode (using PSK)
Figure 4-7 shows the eNodeB automatic discovery process in this scenario. The process is as
follows:
1. The eNodeB performs POST.
2. Bind the eNodeB ID to the eNodeB using a bar code scanner to scan the bar code within
3 minutes after the eNodeB is powered on. If the M2000 binds the eNodeB using the ESN
or GPS information, skip this step.
3. (Optional) The eNodeB initiates IEEE802.1X-based access control authentication.
4. The eNodeB scans VLANs to obtain VLAN IDs (in VLAN networking scenarios). Then,
the eNodeB sends a DHCP request to the DHCP server of the M2000 to obtain the following
information: OM IP address, OM IP mask, IP address of the M2000, and IP mask of the
M2000.
5. The eNodeB sets up an SSL-encrypted OM channel with the M2000.
6. The eNodeB downloads and activates the eNodeB software and configuration files from
the M2000 and automatically resets.
7. Manually download operator's device certificate and root certificate from the M2000 and
set the connection mode between the eNodeB and the M2000 based on actual situations.
8. The eNodeB sets up an IPSec tunnel with the SeGW after bidirectional security
authentication is successfully performed using certificates to start network operation.
Figure 4-7 eNodeB automatic discovery during PnP remote commissioning in differentiated
encryption mode (using PKI)
eNodeB Automatic Discovery During Local Commissioning Using a USB Flash Drive in
Differentiated Encryption Mode (Using PKI)
Figure 4-8 shows the eNodeB automatic discovery process in this scenario. The process is as
follows:
1. Insert the commissioning USB flash drive into the USB port on the eNodeB.
2. The eNodeB performs POST.
3. The eNodeB reads and activates the eNodeB software and configuration files in the USB
flash drive, and then automatically resets.
4. The eNodeB sets up an SSL-encrypted OM channel with the M2000.
5. Manually download operator's device certificate and root certificate from the M2000 and
set the connection mode between the eNodeB and the M2000 based on actual situations.
6. The eNodeB sets up an IPSec tunnel with the SeGW after bidirectional security
authentication is successfully performed using certificates to start network operation.
Figure 4-8 eNodeB automatic discovery during local commissioning using a USB flash drive
in differentiated encryption mode (using PKI)
Figure 4-9 eNodeB automatic discovery during PnP remote commissioning in differentiated
encryption mode (using PKI)
eNodeB Automatic Discovery During Local Commissioning Using a USB Flash Drive in
Differentiated Encryption Mode (Using PSK)
Figure 4-10 shows the eNodeB automatic discovery process in this scenario. The process is as
follows:
1. Insert the commissioning USB flash drive into the USB port on the eNodeB.
2. The eNodeB performs POST.
3. The eNodeB reads and activates the eNodeB software and configuration files in the USB
flash drive, and then automatically resets.
4. After resetting, the eNodeB sets up an SSL-encrypted OM channel with the M2000.
5. The eNodeB sets up an IPSec tunnel with the SeGW after bidirectional security
authentication is successfully performed using the PSK mode to start network operation.
Figure 4-10 eNodeB automatic discovery during local commissioning using a USB flash drive
in differentiated encryption mode (using PSK)
Figure 4-11 shows a typical commissioning network with the SeGW. The network where the
eNodeB is located is not in the same trusted domain as the network where the MME, SGW, and
M2000 are located. Therefore, the SeGW must be used for secure communication between the
eNodeB, MME, SGW, and M2000.
VLAN Acquisition
In VLAN networking, VLAN tags must be attached to packets sent by the eNodeB before the
eNodeB communicates with other equipment. After the eNodeB is powered on, it cannot send
a DHCP request or set up an OM channel with the M2000 because no VLAN ID is available.
Therefore, the eNodeB must scan VLANs to obtain VLAN IDs after power-on. The process of
obtaining VLAN IDs is called VLAN acquisition, including VLAN detection and VLAN
scanning.
l VLAN detection: after an eNodeB is created on the M2000, the M2000 periodically sends
VLAN detection packets to the eNodeB. The VLAN detection packets are routed to a router
closest to the eNodeB. Then, the router sends Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) broadcast
packets. After detecting the ARP packets, the eNodeB obtains VLAN IDs from the ARP
packets and then sends a DHCP request. VLAN IDs are obtained in this way in scenarios
without the SeGW.
l VLAN scanning: in scenarios with the SeGW, VLAN detection packets from the M2000
cannot be transmitted to the eNodeB because the SeGW does not initiate a connection to
the eNodeB. Therefore, the eNodeB cannot learn VLAN IDs. In this case, the eNodeB can
obtain VLAN IDs only by scanning VLANs. That is, before sending a DHCP request, the
eNodeB sends a DHCP Discovery message using a VLAN ID ranging from 0 to 4094. If
the public DHCP server receives the request message sent from the eNodeB, it sends a
response message to the eNodeB. If the eNodeB receives a response message from the
public DHCP server, it assumes that the VLAN ID is valid.
NOTE
In scenarios without the SeGW, the eNodeB may obtain the VLAN ID by VLAN detection and VLAN
scanning simultaneously. In this case, it preferentially uses the VLAN ID obtained by VLAN detection to
initiate a DHCP request.
Figure 4-12 Procedure for PnP remote eNodeB commissioning in unified encryption mode
1 Local and Prepare for PnP remote eNodeB commissioning, which Mandato
remote involves obtaining eNodeB information and commissioning ry
cooperative tools, configuring the security equipment, obtaining the
operations eNodeB software and files required for automatic
deployment, and obtaining digital certificates. For details,
see 4.2.2 Preparations.
9 Remote Set the maximum transmit power of RRUs or RFUs on the Optional
operations M2000. RRU and RFU are short for remote radio unit and
on the radio frequency unit, respectively. For details, see 4.2.10
M2000 Setting the Maximum Output Power for RRUs or
RFUs.
10 Local and Verify the basic services of the eNodeB. For details, see Optional
remote 4.2.11 Testing the Basic Services of the eNodeB.
cooperative
operations
NOTE
After an eNodeB is deployed, local engineers can determine whether the eNodeB is working properly by
observing the indicators on eNodeB boards. For details about the indicator descriptions and operations for
rectifying possible faults, see 5.3 Checking the Status of Indicators.
4.2.2 Preparations
Before performing plug and play (PnP) remote eNodeB commissioning in unified encryption
mode, you need to collect related eNodeB information, obtain commissioning tools, upload the
required data files, configure security equipment, obtain digital certificates, and configure the
public Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server.
Context
Figure 4-13 shows the procedure for preparing for PnP remote eNodeB commissioning in
unified encryption mode.
Figure 4-13 Procedure for preparing for PnP remote commissioning in unified encryption mode
Procedure
Step 1 Collect the information related to the eNodeB, as described in Table 4-2.
Step 2 Obtain the tools required for the remote commissioning on the M2000, as described in Table
4-3.
Table 4-3 Tools required for the remote commissioning on the M2000
Tool Description
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client if you need to export the eNodeB deployment list
from the M2000 client.
l You have obtained planned data for eNodeB deployment from network planning engineers.
Procedure
Step 1 Obtain the deployment list.
Option Description
Deployment lists If the CME has been deployed and you have initially configured the
are exported eNodeB on the CME, it is recommended that you use the CME to export
from the CME the eNodeB deployment list. For detailed operations, see Exporting Auto
Deployment Configuration Files in M2000 Help.
Obtain and open the exported deployment list. Check whether the software
version, cold patch, and hot patch are consistent with planned ones. If they
are inconsistent, you need to change them as planned. In addition, you need
to enter other relevant data.
NOTE
The deployment list must be exported from the CME V200R012C00 or later
releases.
Deployment lists If the CME has not been deployed, you can export the eNodeB deployment
are exported list from the eNodeB Auto Deployment window on the M2000 client.
from the M2000
client 1. Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto
Deployment from the main menu of the Configuration > Auto
Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB Auto
Deployment window is displayed.
Before the deployment, check whether the planned target version is consistent with the target
version in the deployment list.
l If they are consistent, use this deployment list to proceed with the deployment.
l If they are inconsistent, change the target version in the deployment list to the planned target
version. The following uses eNodeB commissioning as an example.
– If the planned target version is V100R003C00SPCXXX, edit the eNodeB Software
Version field.
– If the planned target version is V100R003C00SPHXXX, edit the eNodeB Hot Patch
Version field. In the eNodeB Software Version field, you must enter the corresponding
V100R003C00SPCXXX.
NOTE
----End
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the M2000 client.
Context
You need to upload data files in the following scenarios:
The data files required for eNodeB commissioning need to be saved in specified paths on the
M2000 server. For details, see Table 4-4.
Configurati /export/home/sysm/ftproot/adn/AutoDeploymentData/eNodeB/CfgData/
on data file
Deploymen /export/home/sysm/ftproot/adn/AutoDeploymentData/eNodeB/ADList/
t list
RET /export/home/sysm/ftproot/OutSourcing/RETFile/
antenna
software
version and
configurati
on data file
RET /export/home/sysm/ftproot/adn/AutoDeploymentData/eNodeB/
antenna RETTemplate/
template
Commissio /export/home/sysm/ftproot/adn/AutoDeploymentData/eNodeB/
ning license CommissionLicense/
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 Click Prepare File&Data. The window for preparing files and data is displayed. Upload data
files as required.
If you Then...
need to...
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
Operation, Status, Source File Path, Destination File Path, and
Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the software versions are uploaded.
l Upload in batches
One or multiple software versions corresponding to one or multiple NE types
are uploaded at a time.
1. On the Software & Cold Patch tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS
Client to OSS Server. The NE File Transfer dialog box is displayed.
2. Click in the lower left corner of the dialog box, select an NE type
from the NE Type drop-down list, and select Software from the File
Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Repeat the preceding two steps to select one or multiple files
corresponding to multiple NE types. The selected files are displayed in
the Source Path area.
5. In the Source Path area, select one or multiple files and click Add. The
files to be uploaded are displayed in the lower part of the dialog box.
6. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
If you Then...
need to...
If you Then...
need to...
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
Operation, Status, Source File Path, Destination File Path, and
Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the cold patches are uploaded.
l Upload in batches
One or multiple cold patches corresponding to one or multiple NE types are
uploaded at a time.
1. On the Software & Cold Patch tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS
Client to OSS Server. The NE File Transfer dialog box is displayed.
2. Click in the lower left corner of the dialog box, select an NE type
from the NE Type drop-down list, and select Software from the File
Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Repeat the preceding two steps to select one or multiple files
corresponding to multiple NE types. The selected files are displayed in
the Source Path area.
5. In the Source Path area, select one or multiple files and click Add. The
files to be uploaded are displayed in the lower part of the dialog box.
6. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
If you Then...
need to...
If you Then...
need to...
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
Operation, Status, Source File Path, Destination File Path, and
Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the hot patches are uploaded.
l Upload in batches
One or multiple hot patches corresponding to one or multiple NE types are
uploaded at a time.
1. On the Hot Patch tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS Client to OSS
Server. The NE File Transfer dialog box is displayed.
2. Click in the lower left corner of the dialog box, select an NE type
from the NE Type drop-down list, and select Software from the File
Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Repeat the preceding two steps to select one or multiple files
corresponding to multiple NE types. The selected files are displayed in
the Source Path area.
5. In the Source Path area, select one or multiple files and click Add. The
files to be uploaded are displayed in the lower part of the dialog box.
6. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
If you Then...
need to...
Upload 1. On the NE Configuration Data tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS
configurati Client to OSS Server. The Upload NE Configuration Data dialog box is
on data displayed.
files 2. Select an NE type from the NE Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting files is
displayed. Select the folder where the configuration data file that you want
to upload is stored, click Select. The Upload NE Configuration Data dialog
box is displayed.
CAUTION
The path for saving the eNodeB configuration data file to be uploaded must be ..
\eNodeBName\M2000.XML on the local PC. An eNodeBName folder contains only
one XML file. To upload eNodeB configuration data files, you must select the
eNodeBName folder where the files are stored. You can select multiple
eNodeBName folders at a time.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the Destination
Path area. You can only view the path.
Upload 1. On the Deployment List tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS Client to
deploymen OSS Server. The Upload Deployment List dialog box is displayed.
t lists 2. Select an NE type from the NE Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting files is
displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click Open to return to
the Upload Deployment List dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the Upload Deployment List dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed information
about the operations at the bottom of the window: Operation, Status, Source
File Path, Destination File Path, and Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the deployment lists are uploaded.
NOTE
If the CME is not deployed, you can click Export Template to export an empty
deployment template, fill out the template based on the planned data, and upload the
template. The default names of the exported empty deployment list templates are the
same. Therefore, you are advised to change the template names after filling out these
templates.
If you Then...
need to...
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
Operation, Status, Source File Path, Destination File Path, and
Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the RET antenna software versions and
configuration data files are uploaded.
l Upload in batches
One or multiple RET antenna software versions and configuration data files
corresponding to one or multiple NE types are uploaded at a time.
1. On the RET tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS Client to OSS
Server. The NE File Transfer dialog box is displayed.
2. Click in the lower left corner of the dialog box, select an NE type
from the NE Type drop-down list, and select Software from the File
Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Repeat the preceding two steps to select one or multiple files
corresponding to multiple NE types. The selected files are displayed in
the Source Path area.
5. In the Source Path area, select one or multiple files and click Add. The
files to be uploaded are displayed in the lower part of the dialog box.
6. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
If you Then...
need to...
on data The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
files information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
Operation, Status, Source File Path, Destination File Path, and
Progress.
7. When Progress is 100%, the RET antenna software versions and
configuration data files are uploaded.
Upload 1. On the RET Template tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS Client to
RET OSS Server. The Upload RET Template dialog box is displayed.
antenna 2. Select an NE type from the NE Type drop-down list.
templates
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting files is
displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click Open to return to
the Upload RET Template dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the Upload RET Template dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed information
about the operations at the bottom of the window: Operation, Status, Source
File Path, Destination File Path, and Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the RET antenna templates are uploaded.
NOTE
If the CME is not deployed, you can click Export Template to export an empty RET
antenna template, fill out the template based on the planned data, and upload the
template.
Upload 1. On the Commission License tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS Client
commissio to OSS Server. The Upload Commission License dialog box is displayed.
ning 2. Select an NE type from the NE Type drop-down list.
licenses
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting files is
displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click Open to return to
the Upload Commission License dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the Upload Commission License dialog box. The system
starts uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed information
about the operations at the bottom of the window: Operation, Status, Source
File Path, Destination File Path, and Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the commissioning licenses are uploaded.
----End
Context
Before eNodeB delivery, the Huawei root certificate and Huawei device certificate are
preconfigured in the main control board of the eNodeB by default. The two certificates are
permanently valid.
l As a default trusted CA certificate, the Huawei root certificate has been loaded to the
certificate storage area of an eNodeB before delivery. This certificate must be loaded to
the CA server before eNodeB commissioning. In this way, the CA server can authenticate
the eNodeB when the eNodeB applies for an operator's device certificate based on
Certificate Management Protocol version 2 (CMPv2).
l The Huawei device certificate is the initial device certificate of an eNodeB. This certificate
identifies the eNodeB when the eNodeB applies for an operator's device certificate based
on CMPv2.
Figure 4-16 shows the procedure for obtaining digital certificates.
Procedure
Step 1 Obtain the Huawei root certificate.
Step 2 Load the Huawei root certificate to the CA server.
----End
is configured according to the user guide of a corresponding equipment type. The following
configurations and operations are based on Huawei S6500 series Ethernet switches. If the
eNodeB performs IEEE 802.1X-based access control, operations on authentication devices are
based on Huawei Authentication, Authorization and Accounting (AAA) server.
Prerequisites
l Quidway S6500 Series Ethernet Switches Operation Manual is available. You can obtain
the document from http://support.huawei.com.
l HUAWEI AAA Commissioning Guide is available. You can obtain the document from
http://support.huawei.com.
l If IEEE 802.1X-based access control is adopted, the operator must use the authentication
access equipment that supports IEEE 802.1X-based access control authentication and the
corresponding AAA server that supports Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP).
Context
When the SeGW is deployed, you are required to configure data for the SeGW. If eNodeB data
is authenticated using digital certificates or Preshared Key (PSK), you must set the customized
parameters, such as the IP addresses of the SeGW and M2000 server, on the public Dynamic
Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server. In this way, the eNodeB can set up an Internet
protocol security (IPSec) tunnel with the SeGW and can be connected to the M2000. When IEEE
802.1X-based access control authentication is adopted, you must configure the authentication
access equipment and authentication server. Generally, the authentication server refers to the
AAA server.
l Table 4-5 describes the SeGW configuration.
IP address Both the public SeGW and the serving SeGW should be configured with
the IP address of the interface for the untrusted area on the eNodeB side
and IP address of the interface for the trusted area on the evolved packet
core (EPC) side.
Route l Public SeGW: The routes to the M2000, eNodeB, and temporary
operation and maintenance (O&M) IP address must be
configured.
l Serving SeGW: The routes to the M2000, S-GW, mobility
management entity (MME), eNodeB port IP address, S1 signaling
and service IP addresses, and O&M IP address must be
configured.
IKE local The public SeGW and serving SeGW must be configured.
name
Item Description
ike proposal l The authentication method parameter can be set to the digital
certificate mode or pre-shared key mode based on the actual
networking.
l The authentication algorithm parameter can be set to SHA_1 or
MD5. Generally, this parameter is set to SHA_1.
l The encryption algorithm parameter can be set to AES or DES.
Generally, this parameter is set to AES.
l The DH group parameter can be set to DH group2.
ike peer l Public SeGW: The key or certificate domain must be configured
based on the authentication mode specified by ike proposal. local
id type is set to name, remote name is set to p-segw, ike
proposal can be set to V1 or V2 based on the preceding setting, and
ip pool must be configured to allocate a temporary O&M IP
address for the eNodeB.
l Serving SeGW: The key or certificate domain must be configured
based on the authentication mode specified by the ike proposal
parameter. local id type is set to name, remote name is set to s-
segw, ike proposal can be set to V1 or V2 based on the preceding
setting.
ipsec policy- The public SeGW and serving security are set to template. ACL must
template be set based on the preceding settings. If the public SeGW and serving
SeGW are the same, ACL must be set to different values. psf group
must be set to DH group2. ike peer must be set to different values for
the public SeGW and serving SeGW. ipsecproposal must be set based
on the preceding setting.
ipsec binding policy can be bound to the planned port according to the configurations
to port of ipsec policy.
l The purposes for configuring the public DHCP server are as follows:
– When an eNodeB sends messages to the public DHCP server to obtain customized
information, the public DHCP server can identify that the eNodeB is Huawei eNodeB.
– Then, the public DHCP server returns the customized information to the eNodeB.
The public DHCP server needs to configure the information for identifying Huawei eNodeB
and the customized information related to Huawei equipment. The customized information
provides necessary configuration information for the setup of the DHCP server with the
SeGW deployed, as described in Table 4-6.
23 User name for 1~32 Used to log in to the CR or CRL Configure this
logging in to the server. port number
CR or CRL when using the
server CR or CRL
server.
25 Path of the cross 1~64 Used to save the cross certificate Configure this
certificate on the on the CR or CRL server. port number
CR or CRL when using the
server CR or CRL
server.
26 Path of the CRL 1~64 Used to save the operator's CRL Configure this
files on the CR file on the CR or CRL server. port number
or CRL server when using the
CR or CRL
server.
l When the authentication access equipment is used, the authentication mode and the
authentication method must be set to Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service
(RADIUS) and EAP respectively, because certificate authentication is adopted currently.
l When the AAA server is used, the CA certificates of terminal users must be uploaded, and
the file names of the user certificate and private key must be configured for the AAA server.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the configuration of the SeGW by referring to Table 4-5.
The authentication access equipment may vary according to different operators. Huawei
Quidway S6500 series Ethernet switches are taken as an example.
3. Run dot1x authentication-method { chap | pap | eap } to set the authentication method
to EAP.
4. Configure the VLAN and add the route relationship between the transmission network and
AAA server.
For example, run the vlan 4 command to add a VLAN whose ID is 4. Run the interface
vlan 4 command to enter the VLAN view, and run the ip add 10.147.209.38
255.255.255.0 command to add an IP address and subnet mask for the VLAN. Run the
ip route-static 10.166.27.48 24 10.147.209.1 command to add the switch-to-AAA server
route relationship.
5. Set the parameters of AAA server on the switch.
Run the radius scheme accounting command to create a RADIUS solution named
radius1, and enter the RADIUS view. Then, run the primary authentication 10.166.27.48
1812 command to set the port No. to 1812 and the IP address to 10.166.27.48 for the primary
authentication server. Then, run key authentication itellin to set the authentication key to
itellin.
For details, see Quidway S6500 Series Ethernet Switches Operation Manual.
The AAA server may vary according to different operators. The descriptions here take the
Huawei AAA server as an example. For details, see HUAWEI AAA Commissioning Guide.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l eNodeB commissioning preparations are complete.
l If the M2000 is deployed in SLS mode, radio network planning engineers need to plan the
area to which the eNodeB belongs.
l If the eNodeB and the M2000 server are located on different network segments, you need
to configure the router nearest to the eNodeB as the DHCP relay.
– In an insecure scenario, you need to set the DHCP relay IP address on the router to the
DHCP server IP address of the M2000. In a secure scenario, you need to set the DHCP
relay IP address on the router to the common DHCP server IP address and on the security
gateway, you need to set the IP address of the DHCP server to the DHCP server IP
address of the M2000.
– In situations where the M2000 is deployed in SLS mode, the preceding DHCP server
IP address of the M2000 refers to the host IP address.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 Select deployment lists.
Import a Select From Server and choose a deployment list from the drop-
deployment list down list box.
from the server
Import a
Select From Client and click to select a deployment list.
deployment list
from the client
3. (Optional) Select the area to which an eNodeB belongs in the Sub-area area. This step is
mandatory when theM2000 is deployed in SLS mode.
NEs belong to different areas when they are managed by different M2000 servers. If the
M2000 is deployed in SLS mode, NEs are managed by different servers. On the CME client,
these NEs belong to different areas. Select the active or slave M2000 server that the NE
belongs to based on the planned data. Configure the data as follows:
l If the NE was created on the active M2000 server, set the PEERIP parameter for the
OMCH to the IP address of the active M2000 server.
l If the NE was created on the slave M2000 server, set the PEERIP parameter for the
OMCH to the IP address of the slave M2000 server.
l Set the Destination IP parameter for the IP router from the NE to the M2000 server to
an IP address on the the network segment where the M2000 server is located.
NOTE
Onsite deployment engineers need to perform operations based on the areas that have been planned
for eNodeBs by radio network planning engineers.
l If eNodeBs belong to one area, import one deployment list to create eNodeBs in batches.
l If eNodeBs belong to different areas, import multiple deployment lists by area to create eNodeBs.
4. In NE Connection Mode, set a mode for connecting the M2000 and NEs.
Modes for connecting the M2000 and NEs are as follows:
l Common Connection: default connection mode.
l SSL Connection: If this mode is selected, you also need to set an authentication mode.
Authentication modes are Anonymous Authority and OSS Authentication NE, where
Anonymous Authority is the default authentication mode.
NOTE
To enable automatic SSL connection during NE deployment, you need to set the authentication mode
for NE in advance on the CME in addition to setting the connection mode between the M2000 and
NEs in this step.
After the import is complete, the M2000 checks for mandatory parameters with empty values
and invalid base station configuration data. In addition, the information indicating whether the
import succeeded or failed is displayed on the Operation Information tab page.
l If the import is successful, the M2000 automatically creates a commissioning task for each
eNodeB. The imported eNodeB deployment lists are displayed on the Deployment List tab
page.
l If the import fails, the causes of the failure are displayed on the Operation Information tab
page.
Step 4 (Optional) Modify data in the imported deployment lists as required. This step is mandatory
when you need to modify the data in the imported deployment lists.
NOTE
You can check whether the parameters in eNodeB deployment lists can be modified by referring to
Parameters for the eNodeB Deployment List.
1. Select a commissioning task from the commissioning task list, and double-click the cells
containing parameter values to change the values.
You can change ESNs by double-clicking the cells containing ESNs. Alternatively, you
can perform the following operations to change the ESNs:
a. Click in the ESN value cell. The Bind ESN dialog box is displayed.
b. Select an ESN that is not bound, and click OK to return to the Deployment
Parameter dialog box.
NOTE
You can change the ESNs before OM links are established between base stations and the
M2000.
2. The changed parameter values are displayed in the commissioning task window and
highlighted in red.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l eNodeB commissioning tasks have been started.
Context
A maximum of 500 commissioning tasks can be started at a time. In which, a maximum of 200
commissioning tasks can be being executed and the rest are waiting to be executed in the queue.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 On the Deployment List tab page, right-click one or multiple commissioning tasks and choose
Start from the shortcut menu. The Task Settings dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Select steps in the Select column based on the actual plan.
NOTE
l : Indicates the step that is performed by default. You can choose whether to perform it.
l : Indicates the step that is not performed by default. You can choose whether to perform it.
For details about commissioning procedures and steps, see Table 4-7.
Wait for manual After the OM channel is set up, the status of the
operation commissioning task changes to Waiting for
manual operation. Manually confirm the
completion and proceed with the commissioning
after the commissioning environment of the
network is ready.
Monitor cell Check whether any active cells exist under the
service status eNodeB.
You can monitor alarms of the eNodeB on the
M2000 during software commissioning to locate
and handle exceptions in time.
7 Perform Perform NHC You can perform health check to learn the
NHC eNodeB operating status.
NOTE
The system checks whether all configured RF modules are usable before starting project quality check.
l If all configured RF modules are usable, the system issues project quality check commands to proceed
with subsequent operations.
l If only some configured RF modules are usable, the system sets a timer (2.5 minutes in length and a
maximum of 5 times) to wait until all RF modules are usable. After all RF modules are usable, the
system issues project quality check commands to proceed with subsequent operations. If some RF
modules are still unusable after the timer expires, the system ends the project quality check task.
Step 4 Click OK. The M2000 automatically checks whether the data files required for procedures are
available.
If... Then...
Not all the 1. The Data Preparation Check dialog box is displayed, showing check
required data results about the required data files.
files are available l : Indicates that all the required data files are available.
l : Indicates that not all the required data files are available.
2. Click OK. The Data Preparation Check dialog box is closed.
3. Obtain relevant data files based on the check results.
For detailed operations, see Uploading Data Files.
4. After the required data files are uploaded, start the commissioning
tasks again.
All the required The M2000 starts commissioning. The selected commissioning tasks enter
data files are the Running state.
available NOTE
If all the required data files are available, the Data Preparation Check dialog box
is not displayed.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l eNodeB commissioning tasks have been started.
Context
l By default, the GUI displays only commissioning tasks created by a specific user. To view
commissioning tasks created by other users, click on the toolbar.
l When the system performs NE upgrades during the automatic configuration phase of a
commissioning task, if you restart or delete the commissioning task, the system does not
restart NE upgrades but proceeds until the related NE upgrade task is complete. When the
system displays The NE is performing the following task: ******. Please try later. in
Description for a commissioning task, the NE upgrade task is running. If you want to
perform automatic deployment again, wait until the NE upgrade task is complete. You can
choose Software > NE Upgrade Task Management > NE Upgrade Task to query the
NE upgrade task.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 View the status and progress of commissioning tasks in the commissioning task list.
TIP
You can quickly view the status of commissioning tasks by using either of the following methods:
l In the commissioning task list, the status of the tasks is displayed in Status, the current procedures are
displayed in Current Phase, and details about each procedure are displayed in Description.
l In the commissioning task list, select one or multiple commissioning tasks whose status you want to
view, and then click . The right pane displays execution status of
steps for commissioning procedures.
The displayed information includes the execution status, description, start time and end time of each
commissioning substep.
Step 3 (Optional) Click . The Statistics dialog box is displayed, showing the number of
commissioning tasks in each status. Click OK to close the dialog box.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l Software commissioning monitoring has already started, and the completion of the
commissioning has not yet been confirmed.
Context
The alarms are categorized into E1/T1 port alarms, transmission path alarms, antenna alarms,
software and configuration alarms, board alarms, cell alarms, external alarms, and other alarms
by object type. Other alarms refer to the alarms that cannot be categorized on the basis of specific
objects.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 In the commissioning task list, select one or multiple commissioning tasks for which you want
to handle alarms. Right-click the tasks, and then choose Open Monitor Window from the
shortcut menu. The alarm monitoring window is displayed.
In the displayed window, you can view alarms on eNodeBs by monitored object. For details
about the alarm monitoring window, see Interface Description: eNodeB Commissioning
Window.
Step 3 Handle alarms.
1. Double-click an alarm that you want to handle.
2. In the displayed dialog box that shows the alarm details, click the link in Reason And
Advice.
3. Handle alarms based on the alarm reference.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l Commissioning tasks are at the monitoring stage, and the completion of the commissioning
tasks has not yet been confirmed.
Context
CAUTION
eNodeB services are interrupted upon antenna fault diagnosis. Therefore, you need to perform
the diagnosis when the eNodeB is not providing services or the services are isolated.
eNodeB fault diagnosis aims to check whether antennas are functioning normally. It involves
the VSWR test, offline intermodulation interference test, and crossed pair test.
After one fault diagnosis operation is performed, the M2000 creates a fault diagnosis task and
displays the diagnosis progress. After the fault diagnosis is complete, you can obtain the fault
diagnosis report.
If you delete a fault diagnosis task, the corresponding diagnosis report is deleted accordingly.
If you restart the M2000 server, all fault diagnosis tasks and reports are deleted.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 In the commissioning task list, select one or multiple commissioning tasks for which you want
to handle alarms. Right-click the tasks, and then choose Open Monitor Window from the
shortcut menu. The alarm monitoring window is displayed.
During the fault diagnosis, a diagnosis task is added to the diagnosis task list.
NOTE
Fault diagnosis may take a long time when there are a large number of detection services executed
by the detection script and there are a large number of NE configuration services.
4. After fault diagnosis is complete, you can right-click a diagnosis task in the diagnosis task
list, and choose Diagnose Report from the shortcut menu to view diagnosis results.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l eNodeB commissioning tasks have been created or started.
Context
For details about operations on commissioning tasks, see Table 4-8.
Opera Description
tion
Delete You can perform this operation on commissioning tasks in any state.
Opera Description
tion
Restart You can perform this operation on commissioning tasks in the Running,
Abnormal, Paused, or Waiting for Confirmation state.
Pause You can perform this operation on commissioning tasks in the Running state.
Resum You can perform this operation on commissioning tasks in the Paused state.
e
Cancel You can perform this operation on commissioning tasks in the Running,
Abnormal, or Paused state.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 On the Deployment List tab page, select one or multiple commissioning tasks and perform
operations as required.
If you Then...
need to...
Restart Right-click the tasks and choose Restart from the shortcut menu. The tasks
return to the Running state.
Pause Right-click the tasks and choose Pause from the shortcut menu. The tasks are
in the Paused state.
Resume Right-click the tasks and choose Resume from the shortcut menu. The tasks
proceed from where they are paused.
Cancel Right-click the tasks and choose Cancel from the shortcut menu. The tasks
return to the Wait for Start state.
Delete 1. Right-click the tasks and choose Delete from the shortcut menu. The
Confirm dialog box is displayed.
2. Click OK. The system starts deleting the tasks.
----End
Prerequisites
l The eNodeB is properly connected to the M2000.
Procedure
Step 1 On the M2000 client, choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto
Deployment. The eNodeB Auto Deployment tag page is displayed.
Step 2 Right-click one or more eNodeB commissioning tasks to be confirmed from the commissioning
task list, and choose Confirm Completion from the shortcut menu.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l Commissioning tasks are running.
Context
The exported commissioning report records the information about only the selected
commissioning tasks. After you manually delete a commissioning task, the generated
commissioning report does not contain the information about this task.
The deployment report can be stored for a maximum of 30 days. The start date is specified as
the date when the deployment report is generated for the first time.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 In the commissioning task list, select one or multiple commissioning tasks for which you want
to export the report, right-click the tasks, and then choose Export Deployment Report from
the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, asking you whether to export alarm data at the
same time.
If... Then...
You need to export alarm data Click Yes. The Save dialog box is displayed.
You do not need to export alarm data Click No. The Save dialog box is displayed.
----End
Rectifying Faults and Clearing Alarms Against the eNodeB Health Check Report
This section descries how to rectify faults and clear alarms against the eNodeB health check
report to ensure that the eNodeB runs properly.
Prerequisites
The eNodeB commissioning report is available.
Context
Table 4-9 shows the eNodeB health checklist.
eNodeB software eNodeB software status Check the operating status of the
version eNodeB software.
Configuration data Configuration data consistency Check whether the effective data
applied to modules is consistent
with the configured data in the
database.
Procedure
Step 1 Open the eNodeB commissioning report and view the health check report to determine the
eNodeB operating status.
Step 2 Check the health check report for faults and alarms, and rectify the faults and clear the alarms
by referring to eNodeB Alarm Reference. If all the alarms are cleared but the eNodeB does not
work properly, contact Huawei for technical support.
You can check for eNodeB alarms using one of the following methods:
l on the M2000 client, choose Monitor > Browse Current Alarm. Set the search criteria in
the displayed Filter dialog box to check for eNodeB alarms. For details, see Browse Current
Alarm in the M2000 Online Help.
l On the M2000 client, choose Topology > Main Topology. On the Main Topology tab page,
right-click the eNodeB and choose Query Alarm/Event > Alarm List from the shortcut
menu. Then, double-click an alarm to view details
Step 4 Clear the alarms by taking recommended actions or by referring to eNodeB Alarm Reference.
----End
Prerequisites
l The antenna line device (ALD) is installed correctly.
l The LMT communicates with the eNodeB properly.
l The RET software and data configuration file are available.
l The FTP server functions properly and is connected to the eNodeB correctly.
l Each FTP user has the permission to read a specified folder.
l There is no firewall between the FTP server and the eNodeB.
Context
l Commissioning the RET antenna includes downloading the RET software and data
configuration file, calibrating the RET antenna, setting the RET downtilt, and query RET
overcurrent or undercurrent alarms.
l The RET downtilt must be configured based on the planned network data. Otherwise, the
RET downtilt affects antenna coverage.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the ALD power switch and overcurrent or undercurrent alarm thresholds.
If... Run...
NOTE
The ALD power switch is OFF by default. Before using the RET, set the ALD power switch to ON and
set current alarm thresholds. If the current exceeds the overcurrent or undercurrent alarm threshold, the
ALD power switch automatically turns off. This affects the subsequent RET commissioning.
You can set Operation Mode to SITE(Site) to query all ALD information.
If... Then...
The current RET software Record the device number of the RET antenna, and perform
version is the same as the Step 7 to download the RET data configuration file.
target RET software
version
The current RET software Record the device number of the RET antenna, and perform
version is different from the Step 6 to download the RET software.
target RET software
version
If the RET downtilt fails to be calibrated, check for the cabinet, subrack, and slot configurations and the
mapping between the RET antenna and the sector. If the configurations and mapping are incorrect, run the
MOD RETSUBUNIT command to set them gain, and calibrate the RET downtilt again.
If you run this command without specifying any parameters, RET antennas can be calibrated in batches.
----End
Prerequisites
l The TMA is installed correctly.
l The TMA software has been uploaded to the M2000 server.
l The eNodeB is properly connected to the M2000.
l Each FTP user has the permission to read a specified folder.
l The File Transfer Protocol (FTP) port has been enabled on the firewall between the eNodeB
and the M2000 server.
Context
l The FTP server transmits data in plaintext mode by default.
l As a part of the antenna system, the TMA is used to amplify the received weak signals.
l The TMA software is supplied by the antenna line device (ALD) vendor.
l If incorrect TMA software is loaded, the TMA may not work property.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the ALD power switch and overcurrent or undercurrent alarm thresholds.
If... Run...
NOTE
The ALD power switch is OFF by default. Before using the TMA, set the ALD power switch to ON and
set current alarm thresholds. If the current exceeds the overcurrent or undercurrent alarm threshold, the
ALD power switch automatically turns off. This affects the subsequent TMA commissioning.
Step 4 Check whether the TMA starts working and whether the TMA gain is set correctly.
MML command: DSP TMASUBUNIT
l If the maximum gain is the same as the minimum gain, the TMA has a fixed gain. In this
situation, you are not allowed to set any gains.
l If the TMA is not working, contact Huawei for technical support.
You can set Operation Mode to SITE(Site) to query all ALD information.
If... Then...
The current TMA software Perform Step 8 to set the TMA gain as required, and perform
version is the same as the Step 9 to check whether the TMA generates overcurrent or
target TMA software undercurrent alarms.
version
Step 7 If the eNodeB is configured with multiple TMAs, repeat Step 5 to download the software of
other TMAs.
If the eNodeB is configured with multiple TMAs whose gains can be set, repeat this step to set
the gains for other TMAs.
If the TMA generates overcurrent or undercurrent alarms, clear the alarms by referring to eNodeB
Alarm Reference.
----End
Prerequisites
l The M2000 communicates properly with the eNodeB.
l Environment monitoring devices have been configured.
l The dual in-line package (DIP) switches on the environment monitoring device are properly
set. For details, see APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T(Ver.B) Product
Description, APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T(Ver.C) Product Description
and EMUA User Guide.
Context
The remote radio unit (RRU), universal power environment unit (UPEU) in the baseband unit
(BBU), environment monitoring unit type A (EMUA), and power monitoring unit (PMU) in the
APM30H are all equipped with extended alarm ports. Setting environment alarm parameters
includes adding user-defined alarms and binding the user-defined alarms to the eNodeB.
Environment alarms are used to monitor the equipment room where the eNodeB is located. When
setting environment alarm parameters, you need to bind a user-defined alarm to the specific
subrack, slot, and port on the eNodeB.
Procedure
Step 1 Add a user-defined alarm.
1. Choose Monitor > Alarm Setting > NE Alarm Settings.
2. On the User-Defined Alarm tab page, click the Alarm Definition tab, and click Add. The
Add User-Defined Alarm dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-17.
3. Select an NE type on the left, and set the user-defined alarm parameters, including Alarm
Name, Alarm ID, Alarm Severity Level, and Alarm Type.
NOTE
l Each type of user-defined alarm is allocated a unique alarm ID. The alarm ID ranges from 65033
to 65233.
l The same type of alarm must use the same alarm ID for all eNodeBs. For example, if the door
status alarm ID for an eNodeB is 65035, the door status alarm IDs for other eNodeBs must also
be 65035.
4. Click OK. The information about the added user-defined alarm is displayed in the NE
Alarm Setting window.
5. Click Apply to save the user-defined alarm.
A message is displayed, indicating that saving the user-defined alarm is successful or fails.
If saving the user-defined alarm is successful, click OK. The icon disappears. If
saving the user-defined alarm fails, click Details to view the failure cause and rectify the
fault accordingly. Then, add the user-defined alarm again.
Step 2 Bind the user-defined alarm to the eNodeB.
1. Choose Monitor > Alarm Setting > NE Alarm Settings.
2. On the User-Defined Alarm tab page, click the Alarm Binding tab. Then, add the user-
defined alarm binding relationship.
l Single binding
a. Choose Edit > Add. The Add Alarm Binding dialog box is displayed, as shown
in Figure 4-18.
b. Select an NE from the Select NE navigation tree or enter an NE name in the Search
by name text box on the left. Select an alarm from the Select Alarm/Event
navigation tree or enter an alarm name in the Search by name text box in the
middle. Select an alarm or event ID based on the NE type, and set binding
parameters, including port type, cabinet No., subrack No., and slot No. of the port,
alarm voltage, and upper and lower alarm thresholds.
NOTE
If a digital port is used for the monitoring board, you must set alarm voltage to specify a
condition for reporting alarms. If an analog port is used for the monitoring board, you must
set upper and lower alarm thresholds to specify a condition for reporting alarms.
c. Click OK. The information about the added user-defined alarm is displayed in the
NE Alarm Setting window.
l Batch binding
a. Choose Import/Export > Export Template. The Export Alarm Binding
Template dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-19.
Alternatively, choose Import/Export > Export to export the existing records on
the Alarm Binding tab page by NE type.
b. In the displayed Export Alarm Binding Template dialog box, select the NE type,
and specify the save path and name for the exported template.
c. Open the template and edit it based on actual requirements by referring to the
example in the template.
d. Choose Import/Export > Import to import the edited template to the M2000.
Then, click OK.
The user-defined alarm binding relationship in the template is displayed on the
Alarm Binding tab page. Each record is prefixed with the icon.
3. Select an alarm binding relationship record and click Apply to apply it to the NE.
A message is displayed, indicating that applying the alarm binding relationship is successful
or fails. If applying the alarm binding relationship is successful, click OK. The icon
disappears. If applying the alarm binding relationship fails, click Details to view the failure
cause and rectify the fault accordingly. Then, apply the alarm binding relationship again.
----End
Context
You can manually trigger several external environment alarms to verify the parameter settings.
If external environment alarms can be reported, the parameter settings are correct.
Procedure
Step 1 Manually trigger several external environment alarms. For details, see the appendix Triggering
Monitoring Device Alarms.
Step 2 Check for the external environment alarms on the M2000. For details, see Rectifying Faults
and Clearing Alarms Against the eNodeB Health Check Report. If external environment
alarms can be reported, the parameter settings are correct. If no external environment alarm is
reported, set the parameters again or contact Huawei for technical support.
----End
Example
Assuming that a water sensor is installed for the fan monitoring unit (FMU), to check whether
the parameter settings for water damage alarms are correct, perform the following operations:
1. Run the MOD FMU command with WS_DISABLE(Water-Immersed Sensor
Disabled) in Special Boolean Alarm Flag cleared.
2. Immerse the water sensor or its probe in water for more than 10s, and check whether water
damage alarms are reported. If water damage alarms are reported, the parameter settings
are correct.
Prerequisites
l The RRU or RFU is connected properly.
l The local maintenance terminal (LMT) or M2000 communicates properly with the eNodeB.
l You have logged in to the M2000 as administrator.
Context
The maximum output power of the RRU or RFU is specified by the local operator.
If an eNodeB is configured with multiple RRUs or RFUs, you must use MML commands to
manually reset RRUs or RFUs one by one. If RRUs or RFUs are cascaded, set the maximum
output power for the lowest-level RRU or RFU and then for other RRUs or RFUs to reduce the
impact on upper-level RRUs.
The maximum output power for the RRU or RFU needs to be set only if it is less than the
maximum output power that the RRU or RFU can physically achieve.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the DSP RRU command to query the cabinet No., subrack No., slot No., and transmit
channel No. of the RRU or RFU.
Step 2 Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to query the maximum output power supported by the
RRU or RFU based on the information queried in Step 1.
Step 3 Run the LOC RRUTC command to set the maximum output power for the RRU or RFU.
Step 4 Run the RST BRD command to reset the RRU or RFU.
Step 5 Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to check whether the setting of the maximum output
power for the RRU or RFU takes effect.
If... Then...
The maximum transmit Set the maximum output power within the power specifications
power fails to be set supported by the RRU or RFU. If the maximum output power
still fails to be set, contact Huawei for technical support.
NOTE
Before returning a used but not faulty RRU or RFU to the Spare Parts Center, run the LOC RRUTC
command to set the maximum output power (TXMAXPWR) to 0 and reset the RRU or RFU for the setting
to take effect.
----End
Prerequisites
l The eNodeB and the MME/S-GW are properly connected.
l The negotiation data of the eNodeB to be commissioned is added to the MME/S-GW.
l The testing UE is functional and is registered in the HSS.
l The FTP server for testing the basic services is available.
l The WWW server for testing the basic services is available.
Procedure
l Test the web page browsing service.
Testing Method Access the WWW server and browse the web pages through a UE.
Perform the test 20 times.
Testing Method Access the FTP server and upload files through a UE. Perform the
test 10 times.
Testing Method Access the FTP server and download files through a UE. Perform the
test 10 times.
Expectation Connection success rate > 95%. The calls are uninterrupted and none
of the calls get dropped till they are released. The voice is clear with
no loud noise.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 Query the eNodeB state.
1. On the M2000 tab page, choose Topology > Main Topology. The Main Topology tab
page is displayed.
2. On the Main Topology tab page, select the target network element (NE) and right-click
Query Maintenance Mode. Then, the Query Maintenance Mode dialog box is displayed.
3. Check whether Current NE Maintenance Mode is set to NORMAL. If it is, the
configuration is complete. If it is not, go to Step 2.
Step 2 Set the eNodeB state.
1. On the M2000 tab page, choose Maintenance > Maintenance Mode. The Maintenance
Mode tab page is displayed.
2. Click Set NE Mode at the upper left corner of the Maintenance Mode tab page. The
Set Maintenance Mode dialog box is displayed.
3. Select the target NE and specify the time.
4. Set NE Mode to NORMAL. The eNodeB is changed to the normal state.
5. Click OK. The setting of the maintenance mode is complete.
6. Ensure that the current the eNodeB state is NORMAL by executing Step 1 again.
NOTE
The alarms that are not cleared during commissioning will be reported on the eNodeB in the normal state.
----End
Main Window
Figure 4-20 shows the main window for eNodeB commissioning. Table 4-10 describes the
window.
2 Commissioni Displays all the commissioning tasks and their progress. You can
ng task list right-click a task, and then choose the corresponding menu item
from the shortcut menu to perform an operation.
NOTE
l By default, the GUI displays only commissioning tasks created by a
specific user. To view commissioning tasks created by other users,
3 Shortcut You can right-click a task, and then choose the corresponding
menu menu item from the shortcut menu to perform an operation.
1 Alarm object After selecting an object type, you can view all alarms of this
tree object type in the alarm list in the right pane.
2 Alarm list After an object type is selected, all alarms of this object type are
displayed in the alarm list.
3 Tab named after Displays tabs named after data file types that are required for
a data file type commissioning.
4 Operation result Displays the details about the operations on uploading the type
of data file.
NOTE
Figure 4-23 Procedure for performing PnP remote commissioning in differentiated encryption
mode
10 Remote Set the maximum transmit power of RRUs or RFUs on the Optional
operations M2000. RRU and RFU are short for remote radio unit and
on the radio frequency unit, respectively. For details, see 4.3.11
M2000 Setting the Maximum Output Power for RRUs or
RFUs.
11 Local and Verify the basic services of the eNodeB. For details, see Optional
remote 4.3.12 Testing the Basic Services of the eNodeB.
cooperative
operations
St Operation Mandat
ep ory/
Option
al
NOTE
After an eNodeB is deployed, local engineers can determine whether the eNodeB is working properly by
observing the indicators on eNodeB boards. For details about the indicator descriptions and operations for
rectifying possible faults, see 5.3 Checking the Status of Indicators.
4.3.2 Preparations
Before performing plug and play (PnP) remote commissioning in differentiated encryption
mode, you need to collect related eNodeB information, obtain commissioning tools, upload data
files as required, configure security equipment, obtain digital certificates, and configure the
public Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server.
Context
Figure 4-24 shows the procedure for preparing for PnP remote commissioning in differentiated
encryption mode.
Figure 4-24 Procedure for preparing for PnP remote commissioning in differentiated encryption
mode
Procedure
Step 1 Collect the information related to the eNodeB, as described in Table 4-15.
Step 2 Obtain the tools required for the remote commissioning on the M2000, as described in Table
4-16.
Table 4-16 Tools required for the remote commissioning on the M2000
Tool Description
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client if you need to export the eNodeB deployment list
from the M2000 client.
l You have obtained planned data for eNodeB deployment from network planning engineers.
Procedure
Step 1 Obtain the deployment list.
Option Description
Deployment lists If the CME has been deployed and you have initially configured the
are exported eNodeB on the CME, it is recommended that you use the CME to export
from the CME the eNodeB deployment list. For detailed operations, see Exporting Auto
Deployment Configuration Files in M2000 Help.
Obtain and open the exported deployment list. Check whether the software
version, cold patch, and hot patch are consistent with planned ones. If they
are inconsistent, you need to change them as planned. In addition, you need
to enter other relevant data.
NOTE
The deployment list must be exported from the CME V200R012C00 or later
releases.
Deployment lists If the CME has not been deployed, you can export the eNodeB deployment
are exported list from the eNodeB Auto Deployment window on the M2000 client.
from the M2000
client 1. Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto
Deployment from the main menu of the Configuration > Auto
Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB Auto
Deployment window is displayed.
Before the deployment, check whether the planned target version is consistent with the target
version in the deployment list.
l If they are consistent, use this deployment list to proceed with the deployment.
l If they are inconsistent, change the target version in the deployment list to the planned target
version. The following uses eNodeB commissioning as an example.
– If the planned target version is V100R003C00SPCXXX, edit the eNodeB Software
Version field.
– If the planned target version is V100R003C00SPHXXX, edit the eNodeB Hot Patch
Version field. In the eNodeB Software Version field, you must enter the corresponding
V100R003C00SPCXXX.
NOTE
----End
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the M2000 client.
Context
You need to upload data files in the following scenarios:
The data files required for eNodeB commissioning need to be saved in specified paths on the
M2000 server. For details, see Table 4-17.
Configurati /export/home/sysm/ftproot/adn/AutoDeploymentData/eNodeB/CfgData/
on data file
Deploymen /export/home/sysm/ftproot/adn/AutoDeploymentData/eNodeB/ADList/
t list
RET /export/home/sysm/ftproot/OutSourcing/RETFile/
antenna
software
version and
configurati
on data file
RET /export/home/sysm/ftproot/adn/AutoDeploymentData/eNodeB/
antenna RETTemplate/
template
Commissio /export/home/sysm/ftproot/adn/AutoDeploymentData/eNodeB/
ning license CommissionLicense/
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 Click Prepare File&Data. The window for preparing files and data is displayed. Upload data
files as required.
If you Then...
need to...
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
Operation, Status, Source File Path, Destination File Path, and
Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the software versions are uploaded.
l Upload in batches
One or multiple software versions corresponding to one or multiple NE types
are uploaded at a time.
1. On the Software & Cold Patch tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS
Client to OSS Server. The NE File Transfer dialog box is displayed.
2. Click in the lower left corner of the dialog box, select an NE type
from the NE Type drop-down list, and select Software from the File
Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Repeat the preceding two steps to select one or multiple files
corresponding to multiple NE types. The selected files are displayed in
the Source Path area.
5. In the Source Path area, select one or multiple files and click Add. The
files to be uploaded are displayed in the lower part of the dialog box.
6. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
If you Then...
need to...
If you Then...
need to...
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
Operation, Status, Source File Path, Destination File Path, and
Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the cold patches are uploaded.
l Upload in batches
One or multiple cold patches corresponding to one or multiple NE types are
uploaded at a time.
1. On the Software & Cold Patch tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS
Client to OSS Server. The NE File Transfer dialog box is displayed.
2. Click in the lower left corner of the dialog box, select an NE type
from the NE Type drop-down list, and select Software from the File
Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Repeat the preceding two steps to select one or multiple files
corresponding to multiple NE types. The selected files are displayed in
the Source Path area.
5. In the Source Path area, select one or multiple files and click Add. The
files to be uploaded are displayed in the lower part of the dialog box.
6. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
If you Then...
need to...
If you Then...
need to...
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
Operation, Status, Source File Path, Destination File Path, and
Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the hot patches are uploaded.
l Upload in batches
One or multiple hot patches corresponding to one or multiple NE types are
uploaded at a time.
1. On the Hot Patch tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS Client to OSS
Server. The NE File Transfer dialog box is displayed.
2. Click in the lower left corner of the dialog box, select an NE type
from the NE Type drop-down list, and select Software from the File
Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Repeat the preceding two steps to select one or multiple files
corresponding to multiple NE types. The selected files are displayed in
the Source Path area.
5. In the Source Path area, select one or multiple files and click Add. The
files to be uploaded are displayed in the lower part of the dialog box.
6. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
If you Then...
need to...
Upload 1. On the NE Configuration Data tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS
configurati Client to OSS Server. The Upload NE Configuration Data dialog box is
on data displayed.
files 2. Select an NE type from the NE Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting files is
displayed. Select the folder where the configuration data file that you want
to upload is stored, click Select. The Upload NE Configuration Data dialog
box is displayed.
CAUTION
The path for saving the eNodeB configuration data file to be uploaded must be ..
\eNodeBName\M2000.XML on the local PC. An eNodeBName folder contains only
one XML file. To upload eNodeB configuration data files, you must select the
eNodeBName folder where the files are stored. You can select multiple
eNodeBName folders at a time.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the Destination
Path area. You can only view the path.
Upload 1. On the Deployment List tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS Client to
deploymen OSS Server. The Upload Deployment List dialog box is displayed.
t lists 2. Select an NE type from the NE Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting files is
displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click Open to return to
the Upload Deployment List dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the Upload Deployment List dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed information
about the operations at the bottom of the window: Operation, Status, Source
File Path, Destination File Path, and Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the deployment lists are uploaded.
NOTE
If the CME is not deployed, you can click Export Template to export an empty
deployment template, fill out the template based on the planned data, and upload the
template. The default names of the exported empty deployment list templates are the
same. Therefore, you are advised to change the template names after filling out these
templates.
If you Then...
need to...
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
Operation, Status, Source File Path, Destination File Path, and
Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the RET antenna software versions and
configuration data files are uploaded.
l Upload in batches
One or multiple RET antenna software versions and configuration data files
corresponding to one or multiple NE types are uploaded at a time.
1. On the RET tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS Client to OSS
Server. The NE File Transfer dialog box is displayed.
2. Click in the lower left corner of the dialog box, select an NE type
from the NE Type drop-down list, and select Software from the File
Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Repeat the preceding two steps to select one or multiple files
corresponding to multiple NE types. The selected files are displayed in
the Source Path area.
5. In the Source Path area, select one or multiple files and click Add. The
files to be uploaded are displayed in the lower part of the dialog box.
6. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
If you Then...
need to...
on data The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
files information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
Operation, Status, Source File Path, Destination File Path, and
Progress.
7. When Progress is 100%, the RET antenna software versions and
configuration data files are uploaded.
Upload 1. On the RET Template tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS Client to
RET OSS Server. The Upload RET Template dialog box is displayed.
antenna 2. Select an NE type from the NE Type drop-down list.
templates
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting files is
displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click Open to return to
the Upload RET Template dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the Upload RET Template dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed information
about the operations at the bottom of the window: Operation, Status, Source
File Path, Destination File Path, and Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the RET antenna templates are uploaded.
NOTE
If the CME is not deployed, you can click Export Template to export an empty RET
antenna template, fill out the template based on the planned data, and upload the
template.
Upload 1. On the Commission License tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS Client
commissio to OSS Server. The Upload Commission License dialog box is displayed.
ning 2. Select an NE type from the NE Type drop-down list.
licenses
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting files is
displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click Open to return to
the Upload Commission License dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the Upload Commission License dialog box. The system
starts uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed information
about the operations at the bottom of the window: Operation, Status, Source
File Path, Destination File Path, and Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the commissioning licenses are uploaded.
----End
Context
Before eNodeB delivery, the Huawei root certificate and Huawei device certificate are
preconfigured in the main control board of the eNodeB by default. The two certificates are
permanently valid.
l As a default trusted CA certificate, the Huawei root certificate has been loaded to the
certificate storage area of an eNodeB before delivery. This certificate must be loaded to
the CA server before eNodeB commissioning. In this way, the CA server can authenticate
the eNodeB when the eNodeB applies for an operator's device certificate based on
Certificate Management Protocol version 2 (CMPv2).
l The Huawei device certificate is the initial device certificate of an eNodeB. This certificate
identifies the eNodeB when the eNodeB applies for an operator's device certificate based
on CMPv2.
Figure 4-27 shows the procedure for obtaining digital certificates.
Procedure
Step 1 Obtain the operator's root certificate.
Step 2 Load the Huawei root certificate to the CA server.
----End
Prerequisites
l Quidway S6500 Series Ethernet Switches Operation Manual is available. You can obtain
the document from http://support.huawei.com.
l HUAWEI AAA Commissioning Guide is available. You can obtain the document from
http://support.huawei.com.
l If IEEE 802.1X-based access control is adopted, the operator must use the authentication
access equipment that supports IEEE 802.1X-based access control authentication and the
corresponding AAA server that supports Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP).
Context
When the SeGW is deployed, you are required to configure data for the SeGW. When IEEE
802.1X-based access control authentication is adopted, you must configure the authentication
access equipment and authentication server. Generally, the authentication server refers to the
AAA server.
Table 4-18 describes the SeGW configuration.
IP address Both the public SeGW and the serving SeGW should be configured with
the IP address of the interface for the untrusted area on the eNodeB side and
IP address of the interface for the trusted area on the evolved packet core
(EPC) side.
Route l Public SeGW: The routes to the M2000, eNodeB, and temporary
operation and maintenance (O&M) IP address must be configured.
l Serving SeGW: The routes to the M2000, S-GW, mobility management
entity (MME), eNodeB port IP address, S1 signaling and service IP
addresses, and O&M IP address must be configured.
IKE local The public SeGW and serving SeGW must be configured.
name
Item Description
ike proposal l The authentication method parameter can be set to the digital
certificate mode or pre-shared key mode based on the actual networking.
l The authentication algorithm parameter can be set to SHA_1 or
MD5. Generally, this parameter is set to SHA_1.
l The encryption algorithm parameter can be set to AES or DES.
Generally, this parameter is set to AES.
l The DH group parameter can be set to DH group2.
ike peer l Public SeGW: The key or certificate domain must be configured based
on the authentication mode specified by ike proposal. local id type is
set to name, remote name is set to p-segw, ike proposal can be set to
V1 or V2 based on the preceding setting, and ip pool must be configured
to allocate a temporary O&M IP address for the eNodeB.
l Serving SeGW: The key or certificate domain must be configured based
on the authentication mode specified by the ike proposal parameter.
local id type is set to name, remote name is set to s-segw, ike
proposal can be set to V1 or V2 based on the preceding setting.
ipsec proposal encapsulation mode can be set to tunnel or transport. Generally, tunnel
is set as the encapsulation mode. transform can be set to esp or AH.
Generally, esp is set as the transform mode. esp authentication is set to
SHA_1 and esp encryption is set to AES.
ipsec policy- The public SeGW and serving security are set to template. ACL must be
template set based on the preceding settings. If the public SeGW and serving SeGW
are the same, ACL must be set to different values. psf group must be set to
DH group2. ike peer must be set to different values for the public SeGW
and serving SeGW. ipsecproposal must be set based on the preceding
setting.
ipsec binding policy can be bound to the planned port according to the configurations of
to port ipsec policy.
If the PKI-based authentication is used, IEEE 802.1X-based access control authentication can
be performed:
l When the authentication access equipment is used, the authentication mode and the
authentication method must be set to Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service
(RADIUS) and EAP respectively, because certificate authentication is adopted currently.
l When the AAA server is used, the CA certificates of terminal users must be uploaded, and
the file names of the user certificate and private key must be configured for the AAA server.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the configuration of the SeGW by referring to Table 4-18.
The authentication access equipment may vary according to different operators. Huawei
Quidway S6500 series Ethernet switches are taken as an example.
For example, run the vlan 4 command to add a VLAN whose ID is 4. Run the interface
vlan 4 command to enter the VLAN view, and run the ip add 10.147.209.38
255.255.255.0 command to add an IP address and subnet mask for the VLAN. Run the
ip route-static 10.166.27.48 24 10.147.209.1 command to add the switch-to-AAA server
route relationship.
5. Set the parameters of AAA server on the switch.
Run the radius scheme accounting command to create a RADIUS solution named
radius1, and enter the RADIUS view. Then, run the primary authentication 10.166.27.48
1812 command to set the port No. to 1812 and the IP address to 10.166.27.48 for the primary
authentication server. Then, run key authentication itellin to set the authentication key to
itellin.
For details, see Quidway S6500 Series Ethernet Switches Operation Manual.
The AAA server may vary according to different operators. The descriptions here take the
Huawei AAA server as an example. For details, see HUAWEI AAA Commissioning Guide.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l eNodeB commissioning preparations are complete.
l If the M2000 is deployed in SLS mode, radio network planning engineers need to plan the
area to which the eNodeB belongs.
l If the eNodeB and the M2000 server are located on different network segments, you need
to configure the router nearest to the eNodeB as the DHCP relay.
– In an insecure scenario, you need to set the DHCP relay IP address on the router to the
DHCP server IP address of the M2000. In a secure scenario, you need to set the DHCP
relay IP address on the router to the common DHCP server IP address and on the security
gateway, you need to set the IP address of the DHCP server to the DHCP server IP
address of the M2000.
– In situations where the M2000 is deployed in SLS mode, the preceding DHCP server
IP address of the M2000 refers to the host IP address.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Import a Select From Server and choose a deployment list from the drop-
deployment list down list box.
from the server
Import a
Select From Client and click to select a deployment list.
deployment list
from the client
3. (Optional) Select the area to which an eNodeB belongs in the Sub-area area. This step is
mandatory when theM2000 is deployed in SLS mode.
NEs belong to different areas when they are managed by different M2000 servers. If the
M2000 is deployed in SLS mode, NEs are managed by different servers. On the CME client,
these NEs belong to different areas. Select the active or slave M2000 server that the NE
belongs to based on the planned data. Configure the data as follows:
l If the NE was created on the active M2000 server, set the PEERIP parameter for the
OMCH to the IP address of the active M2000 server.
l If the NE was created on the slave M2000 server, set the PEERIP parameter for the
OMCH to the IP address of the slave M2000 server.
l Set the Destination IP parameter for the IP router from the NE to the M2000 server to
an IP address on the the network segment where the M2000 server is located.
NOTE
Onsite deployment engineers need to perform operations based on the areas that have been planned
for eNodeBs by radio network planning engineers.
l If eNodeBs belong to one area, import one deployment list to create eNodeBs in batches.
l If eNodeBs belong to different areas, import multiple deployment lists by area to create eNodeBs.
4. In NE Connection Mode, set a mode for connecting the M2000 and NEs.
After the import is complete, the M2000 checks for mandatory parameters with empty values
and invalid base station configuration data. In addition, the information indicating whether the
import succeeded or failed is displayed on the Operation Information tab page.
l If the import is successful, the M2000 automatically creates a commissioning task for each
eNodeB. The imported eNodeB deployment lists are displayed on the Deployment List tab
page.
l If the import fails, the causes of the failure are displayed on the Operation Information tab
page.
Step 4 (Optional) Modify data in the imported deployment lists as required. This step is mandatory
when you need to modify the data in the imported deployment lists.
NOTE
You can check whether the parameters in eNodeB deployment lists can be modified by referring to
Parameters for the eNodeB Deployment List.
1. Select a commissioning task from the commissioning task list, and double-click the cells
containing parameter values to change the values.
You can change ESNs by double-clicking the cells containing ESNs. Alternatively, you
can perform the following operations to change the ESNs:
a. Click in the ESN value cell. The Bind ESN dialog box is displayed.
b. Select an ESN that is not bound, and click OK to return to the Deployment
Parameter dialog box.
NOTE
You can change the ESNs before OM links are established between base stations and the
M2000.
2. The changed parameter values are displayed in the commissioning task window and
highlighted in red.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l eNodeB commissioning tasks have been started.
Context
A maximum of 500 commissioning tasks can be started at a time. In which, a maximum of 200
commissioning tasks can be being executed and the rest are waiting to be executed in the queue.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 On the Deployment List tab page, right-click one or multiple commissioning tasks and choose
Start from the shortcut menu. The Task Settings dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Select steps in the Select column based on the actual plan.
NOTE
l : Indicates the step that is performed by default. You can choose whether to perform it.
l : Indicates the step that is not performed by default. You can choose whether to perform it.
For details about commissioning procedures and steps, see Table 4-19.
Wait for manual After the OM channel is set up, the status of the
operation commissioning task changes to Waiting for
manual operation. Manually confirm the
completion and proceed with the commissioning
after the commissioning environment of the
network is ready.
Monitor cell Check whether any active cells exist under the
service status eNodeB.
You can monitor alarms of the eNodeB on the
M2000 during software commissioning to locate
and handle exceptions in time.
7 Perform Perform NHC You can perform health check to learn the
NHC eNodeB operating status.
NOTE
The system checks whether all configured RF modules are usable before starting project quality check.
l If all configured RF modules are usable, the system issues project quality check commands to proceed
with subsequent operations.
l If only some configured RF modules are usable, the system sets a timer (2.5 minutes in length and a
maximum of 5 times) to wait until all RF modules are usable. After all RF modules are usable, the
system issues project quality check commands to proceed with subsequent operations. If some RF
modules are still unusable after the timer expires, the system ends the project quality check task.
Step 4 Click OK. The M2000 automatically checks whether the data files required for procedures are
available.
If... Then...
Not all the 1. The Data Preparation Check dialog box is displayed, showing check
required data results about the required data files.
files are available l : Indicates that all the required data files are available.
l : Indicates that not all the required data files are available.
2. Click OK. The Data Preparation Check dialog box is closed.
3. Obtain relevant data files based on the check results.
For detailed operations, see Uploading Data Files.
4. After the required data files are uploaded, start the commissioning
tasks again.
If... Then...
All the required The M2000 starts commissioning. The selected commissioning tasks enter
data files are the Running state.
available NOTE
If all the required data files are available, the Data Preparation Check dialog box
is not displayed.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l eNodeB commissioning tasks have been started.
Context
l By default, the GUI displays only commissioning tasks created by a specific user. To view
commissioning tasks created by other users, click on the toolbar.
l When the system performs NE upgrades during the automatic configuration phase of a
commissioning task, if you restart or delete the commissioning task, the system does not
restart NE upgrades but proceeds until the related NE upgrade task is complete. When the
system displays The NE is performing the following task: ******. Please try later. in
Description for a commissioning task, the NE upgrade task is running. If you want to
perform automatic deployment again, wait until the NE upgrade task is complete. You can
choose Software > NE Upgrade Task Management > NE Upgrade Task to query the
NE upgrade task.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 View the status and progress of commissioning tasks in the commissioning task list.
TIP
You can quickly view the status of commissioning tasks by using either of the following methods:
l In the commissioning task list, the status of the tasks is displayed in Status, the current procedures are
displayed in Current Phase, and details about each procedure are displayed in Description.
l In the commissioning task list, select one or multiple commissioning tasks whose status you want to
view, and then click . The right pane displays execution status of
steps for commissioning procedures.
The displayed information includes the execution status, description, start time and end time of each
commissioning substep.
Step 3 (Optional) Click . The Statistics dialog box is displayed, showing the number of
commissioning tasks in each status. Click OK to close the dialog box.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l Software commissioning monitoring has already started, and the completion of the
commissioning has not yet been confirmed.
Context
The alarms are categorized into E1/T1 port alarms, transmission path alarms, antenna alarms,
software and configuration alarms, board alarms, cell alarms, external alarms, and other alarms
by object type. Other alarms refer to the alarms that cannot be categorized on the basis of specific
objects.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 In the commissioning task list, select one or multiple commissioning tasks for which you want
to handle alarms. Right-click the tasks, and then choose Open Monitor Window from the
shortcut menu. The alarm monitoring window is displayed.
In the displayed window, you can view alarms on eNodeBs by monitored object. For details
about the alarm monitoring window, see Interface Description: eNodeB Commissioning
Window.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l Commissioning tasks are at the monitoring stage, and the completion of the commissioning
tasks has not yet been confirmed.
Context
CAUTION
eNodeB services are interrupted upon antenna fault diagnosis. Therefore, you need to perform
the diagnosis when the eNodeB is not providing services or the services are isolated.
eNodeB fault diagnosis aims to check whether antennas are functioning normally. It involves
the VSWR test, offline intermodulation interference test, and crossed pair test.
After one fault diagnosis operation is performed, the M2000 creates a fault diagnosis task and
displays the diagnosis progress. After the fault diagnosis is complete, you can obtain the fault
diagnosis report.
If you delete a fault diagnosis task, the corresponding diagnosis report is deleted accordingly.
If you restart the M2000 server, all fault diagnosis tasks and reports are deleted.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 In the commissioning task list, select one or multiple commissioning tasks for which you want
to handle alarms. Right-click the tasks, and then choose Open Monitor Window from the
shortcut menu. The alarm monitoring window is displayed.
2. Select an eNodeB in the Select NE area, select a diagnosis type in the Select diagnose
type area, type diagnosis parameters in the Type diagnosis parameters area, and then
click OK. The dialog box for confirming the diagnosis is displayed.
3. Click Yes. The system starts the fault diagnosis.
During the fault diagnosis, a diagnosis task is added to the diagnosis task list.
NOTE
Fault diagnosis may take a long time when there are a large number of detection services executed
by the detection script and there are a large number of NE configuration services.
4. After fault diagnosis is complete, you can right-click a diagnosis task in the diagnosis task
list, and choose Diagnose Report from the shortcut menu to view diagnosis results.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l eNodeB commissioning tasks have been created or started.
Context
For details about operations on commissioning tasks, see Table 4-20.
Opera Description
tion
Delete You can perform this operation on commissioning tasks in any state.
Restart You can perform this operation on commissioning tasks in the Running,
Abnormal, Paused, or Waiting for Confirmation state.
Pause You can perform this operation on commissioning tasks in the Running state.
Resum You can perform this operation on commissioning tasks in the Paused state.
e
Cancel You can perform this operation on commissioning tasks in the Running,
Abnormal, or Paused state.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 On the Deployment List tab page, select one or multiple commissioning tasks and perform
operations as required.
If you Then...
need to...
Restart Right-click the tasks and choose Restart from the shortcut menu. The tasks
return to the Running state.
Pause Right-click the tasks and choose Pause from the shortcut menu. The tasks are
in the Paused state.
Resume Right-click the tasks and choose Resume from the shortcut menu. The tasks
proceed from where they are paused.
Cancel Right-click the tasks and choose Cancel from the shortcut menu. The tasks
return to the Wait for Start state.
Delete 1. Right-click the tasks and choose Delete from the shortcut menu. The
Confirm dialog box is displayed.
2. Click OK. The system starts deleting the tasks.
----End
Prerequisites
l If the direct or M2000-assisted certificate management mode based on Certificate
Management Protocol (CMP) is used for applying for certificates, the CA server must be
deployed with the Huawei root certificate loaded.
l If the direct certificate management mode based on CMP is used for applying for
certificates, the eNodeB data configuration file must contain correct information about the
CA and certificate request file.
l APPCERT in the eNodeB data configuration file is set to appcert.pem, which indicates
the preconfigured device certificate. If the operator's device certificate is applied for in
offline mode, this setting is not required.
Procedure
l If the eNodeB communicates with the CA server through the non-security domain and CMP
is used as the method for updating certificates, the direct certificate management mode
based on CMP is recommended. The procedure is as follows:
1. Log in to the M2000. Remove the original operator's trust certificate by running the
RMV TRUSTCERT command with CERTNAME specified according to the
operator's naming rules. Assume that the operator's trust certificate is named
OperationCA.cer.
2. Download an operator's trust certificate file by running the DLD CERTFILE
command with DSTF specified according to the operator's naming rules, and IP,
USR, PWD, and SRCF specified based on site requirements.
3. Add an operator's trust certificate by running the ADD TRUSTCERT command with
CERTNAME set to OperationCA.cer.
4. Modify the registration information used to create a certificate request by running the
MOD CERTREQ command with COMMNAME set to ESN(ESN) and
USERADDINFO set to ESN.huawei.com.
5. Apply for an operator's device certificate by running the REQ DEVCERT command
with CANAME set to basestationCert.pem and other parameters specified based on
site requirements.
6. Modify information about the eNodeB device certificate by running the MOD
APPCERT command with APPTYPE set to IKE(IKE) and APPCERT set to
basestationCert.pem, which is the name of the operator's device certificate obtained
in the preceding step.
7. (Optional) If the common connection mode is configured in the eNodeB
commissioning task, but the SSL connection mode is used, change the NE connection
mode by performing the following operations: Select the corresponding NE on the
Main Topology tab page of the M2000 client. Right-click the NE and select
Properties. In the displayed NE Property dialog box, change NE Connection
Mode to SSL Connection and OSS Authentication Mode to OSS Authentication
NE.
8. (Optional) If the operator's certificates are also required in SSL connection mode,
modify information about the eNodeB device certificate by running the MOD
APPCERT command with APPTYPE set to SSL(SSL) and APPCERT set to
basestationCert.pem, which is the name of the operator's device certificate obtained
in the preceding step.
9. Remove the original operator's device certificate by running the RMV CERTMK
command with APPCERT set to OPKIDevCert.cer.
10. (Optional) Modify the configuration of the CA server based on the deployment of the
operator's CA server.
a. Query the the CA name and uniform resource locator (URL) for eNodeB
deployment by running the LST CA command and check the values of
Certificate Authority Name and Certificate Authority URL in the command
output.
– If the CA name after a certificate update in the future is the same as the queried
value of Certificate Authority Name, go to b.
– If the CA name after a certificate update in the future is different from the
queried value of Certificate Authority Name, go to c.
b. Change the CA URL by running the MOD CA command with URL set to the
CA URL after the certificate update.
c. Remove the CA URL that is different from the operator's CA URL by running
the RMV CA command.
8. (Optional) If the operator's certificates are also required in SSL connection mode,
repeat step 6 but select SSL in the Select Application Type dialog box.
9. Remove the original operator's device certificate by running the RMV CERTMK
command with APPCERT set to OPKIDevCert.cer.
10. (Optional) Modify the configuration of the CA server based on the deployment of the
operator's CA server.
a. Query the the CA name and uniform resource locator (URL) for eNodeB
deployment by running the LST CA command and check the values of
Certificate Authority Name and Certificate Authority URL in the command
output.
– If the CA name after a certificate update in the future is the same as the queried
value of Certificate Authority Name, go to b.
– If the CA name after a certificate update in the future is different from the
queried value of Certificate Authority Name, go to c.
b. Change the CA URL by running the MOD CA command with URL set to the
CA URL after the certificate update.
c. Remove the CA URL that is different from the operator's CA URL by running
the RMV CA command.
d. Modify the CA configuration by running the ADD CA command with
CANAME and URL set to the CA name and URL after the certificate update,
respectively.
l If neither of the eNodeB and the M2000 can directly directly communicate with the CA
server through the non-security domain, the operator's device certificate must be applied
for in offline mode. The procedure is as follows:
1. Log in to the M2000. Remove the original operator's trust certificate by running the
RMV TRUSTCERT command with CERTNAME specified according to the
operator's naming rules. Assume that the operator's trust certificate is named
OperationCA.cer.
2. Download an operator's trust certificate file by running the DLD CERTFILE
command with DSTF specified according to the operator's naming rules, and IP,
USR, PWD, and SRCF specified based on site requirements.
3. Add an operator's trust certificate by running the ADD TRUSTCERT command with
CERTNAME set to OperationCA.cer.
4. Modify the registration information used to create a certificate request by running the
MOD CERTREQ command with COMMNAME set to ESN(ESN) and
USERADDINFO set to ESN.huawei.com.
5. Create a certificate request file.
a. On the M2000 client, choose Security > Certificate Authentication
Management > Certificate Management to open the Certificate
Management window.
b. Select the corresponding NE in the navigation tree, and select the certificate to
be applied for on the Device Certificate Registration tab page on the right of
the window. Then, click Create Request File to open the Create Request
File dialog box.
c. Select the corresponding NE in the Create Request File dialog box and specify
the path in which the certificate request file is to be saved. Then, click OK to
start the file creation task. When Status in the lower part is Success, the task is
complete.
6. Submit the certificate request file to the operator to obtain the operator's device
certificate.
7. Download the operator's device certificate to the eNodeB by running the DLD
CERTFILE command.
8. Load the operator's device certificate to the eNodeB by running the ADD
CERTMK command.
9. Modify information about the eNodeB device certificate by running the MOD
APPCERT command with APPTYPE set to IKE(IKE) and APPCERT set to the
name of the operator's device certificate obtained in the preceding step.
10. (Optional) If the common connection mode is configured in the eNodeB
commissioning task, but the SSL connection mode is used, change the NE connection
mode by performing the following operations: Select the corresponding NE on the
Main Topology tab page of the M2000 client. Right-click the NE and select
Properties. In the displayed NE Property dialog box, change NE Connection
Mode to SSL Connection and OSS Authentication Mode to OSS Authentication
NE.
11. (Optional) If the operator's certificates are also required in SSL connection mode,
modify information about the eNodeB device certificate by running the MOD
APPCERT command with APPTYPE set to SSL(SSL) and APPCERT set to
basestationCert.pem, which is the name of the operator's device certificate obtained
in the preceding step.
12. Remove the original operator's device certificate by running the RMV CERTMK
command with APPCERT set to OPKIDevCert.cer.
13. (Optional) Modify the configuration of the CA server based on the deployment of the
operator's CA server.
a. Query the the CA name and uniform resource locator (URL) for eNodeB
deployment by running the LST CA command and check the values of
Certificate Authority Name and Certificate Authority URL in the command
output.
– If the CA name after a certificate update in the future is the same as the queried
value of Certificate Authority Name, go to b.
– If the CA name after a certificate update in the future is different from the
queried value of Certificate Authority Name, go to c.
b. Change the CA URL by running the MOD CA command with URL set to the
CA URL after the certificate update.
c. Remove the CA URL that is different from the operator's CA URL by running
the RMV CA command.
d. Modify the CA configuration by running the ADD CA command with
CANAME and URL set to the CA name and URL after the certificate update,
respectively.
----End
Prerequisites
l The eNodeB is properly connected to the M2000.
l The status of the eNodeB commissioning task is Waiting for Confirmation.
Procedure
Step 1 On the M2000 client, choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto
Deployment. The eNodeB Auto Deployment tag page is displayed.
Step 2 Right-click one or more eNodeB commissioning tasks to be confirmed from the commissioning
task list, and choose Confirm Completion from the shortcut menu.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l Commissioning tasks are running.
Context
The exported commissioning report records the information about only the selected
commissioning tasks. After you manually delete a commissioning task, the generated
commissioning report does not contain the information about this task.
The deployment report can be stored for a maximum of 30 days. The start date is specified as
the date when the deployment report is generated for the first time.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 In the commissioning task list, select one or multiple commissioning tasks for which you want
to export the report, right-click the tasks, and then choose Export Deployment Report from
the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, asking you whether to export alarm data at the
same time.
If... Then...
You need to export alarm data Click Yes. The Save dialog box is displayed.
You do not need to export alarm data Click No. The Save dialog box is displayed.
----End
Rectifying Faults and Clearing Alarms Against the eNodeB Health Check Report
This section descries how to rectify faults and clear alarms against the eNodeB health check
report to ensure that the eNodeB runs properly.
Prerequisites
The eNodeB commissioning report is available.
Context
Table 4-21 shows the eNodeB health checklist.
eNodeB software eNodeB software status Check the operating status of the
version eNodeB software.
Configuration data Configuration data consistency Check whether the effective data
applied to modules is consistent
with the configured data in the
database.
Procedure
Step 1 Open the eNodeB commissioning report and view the health check report to determine the
eNodeB operating status.
Step 2 Check the health check report for faults and alarms, and rectify the faults and clear the alarms
by referring to eNodeB Alarm Reference. If all the alarms are cleared but the eNodeB does not
work properly, contact Huawei for technical support.
You can check for eNodeB alarms using one of the following methods:
l on the M2000 client, choose Monitor > Browse Current Alarm. Set the search criteria in
the displayed Filter dialog box to check for eNodeB alarms. For details, see Browse Current
Alarm in the M2000 Online Help.
l On the M2000 client, choose Topology > Main Topology. On the Main Topology tab page,
right-click the eNodeB and choose Query Alarm/Event > Alarm List from the shortcut
menu. Then, double-click an alarm to view details
Step 4 Clear the alarms by taking recommended actions or by referring to eNodeB Alarm Reference.
----End
Prerequisites
l The antenna line device (ALD) is installed correctly.
l The LMT communicates with the eNodeB properly.
l The RET software and data configuration file are available.
l The FTP server functions properly and is connected to the eNodeB correctly.
l Each FTP user has the permission to read a specified folder.
l There is no firewall between the FTP server and the eNodeB.
Context
l Commissioning the RET antenna includes downloading the RET software and data
configuration file, calibrating the RET antenna, setting the RET downtilt, and query RET
overcurrent or undercurrent alarms.
l The RET downtilt must be configured based on the planned network data. Otherwise, the
RET downtilt affects antenna coverage.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the ALD power switch and overcurrent or undercurrent alarm thresholds.
If... Run...
NOTE
The ALD power switch is OFF by default. Before using the RET, set the ALD power switch to ON and
set current alarm thresholds. If the current exceeds the overcurrent or undercurrent alarm threshold, the
ALD power switch automatically turns off. This affects the subsequent RET commissioning.
You can set Operation Mode to SITE(Site) to query all ALD information.
If... Then...
The current RET software Record the device number of the RET antenna, and perform
version is the same as the Step 7 to download the RET data configuration file.
target RET software
version
The current RET software Record the device number of the RET antenna, and perform
version is different from the Step 6 to download the RET software.
target RET software
version
If the RET downtilt fails to be calibrated, check for the cabinet, subrack, and slot configurations and the
mapping between the RET antenna and the sector. If the configurations and mapping are incorrect, run the
MOD RETSUBUNIT command to set them gain, and calibrate the RET downtilt again.
If you run this command without specifying any parameters, RET antennas can be calibrated in batches.
----End
Prerequisites
l The TMA is installed correctly.
l The TMA software has been uploaded to the M2000 server.
l The eNodeB is properly connected to the M2000.
l Each FTP user has the permission to read a specified folder.
l The File Transfer Protocol (FTP) port has been enabled on the firewall between the eNodeB
and the M2000 server.
Context
l The FTP server transmits data in plaintext mode by default.
l As a part of the antenna system, the TMA is used to amplify the received weak signals.
l The TMA software is supplied by the antenna line device (ALD) vendor.
l If incorrect TMA software is loaded, the TMA may not work property.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the ALD power switch and overcurrent or undercurrent alarm thresholds.
If... Run...
NOTE
The ALD power switch is OFF by default. Before using the TMA, set the ALD power switch to ON and
set current alarm thresholds. If the current exceeds the overcurrent or undercurrent alarm threshold, the
ALD power switch automatically turns off. This affects the subsequent TMA commissioning.
Step 4 Check whether the TMA starts working and whether the TMA gain is set correctly.
MML command: DSP TMASUBUNIT
l If the maximum gain is the same as the minimum gain, the TMA has a fixed gain. In this
situation, you are not allowed to set any gains.
l If the TMA is not working, contact Huawei for technical support.
You can set Operation Mode to SITE(Site) to query all ALD information.
If... Then...
The current TMA software Perform Step 8 to set the TMA gain as required, and perform
version is the same as the Step 9 to check whether the TMA generates overcurrent or
target TMA software undercurrent alarms.
version
Step 7 If the eNodeB is configured with multiple TMAs, repeat Step 5 to download the software of
other TMAs.
If the eNodeB is configured with multiple TMAs whose gains can be set, repeat this step to set
the gains for other TMAs.
If the TMA generates overcurrent or undercurrent alarms, clear the alarms by referring to eNodeB
Alarm Reference.
----End
Prerequisites
l The M2000 communicates properly with the eNodeB.
l Environment monitoring devices have been configured.
l The dual in-line package (DIP) switches on the environment monitoring device are properly
set. For details, see APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T(Ver.B) Product
Description, APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T(Ver.C) Product Description
and EMUA User Guide.
Context
The remote radio unit (RRU), universal power environment unit (UPEU) in the baseband unit
(BBU), environment monitoring unit type A (EMUA), and power monitoring unit (PMU) in the
APM30H are all equipped with extended alarm ports. Setting environment alarm parameters
includes adding user-defined alarms and binding the user-defined alarms to the eNodeB.
Environment alarms are used to monitor the equipment room where the eNodeB is located. When
setting environment alarm parameters, you need to bind a user-defined alarm to the specific
subrack, slot, and port on the eNodeB.
Procedure
Step 1 Add a user-defined alarm.
1. Choose Monitor > Alarm Setting > NE Alarm Settings.
2. On the User-Defined Alarm tab page, click the Alarm Definition tab, and click Add. The
Add User-Defined Alarm dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-28.
3. Select an NE type on the left, and set the user-defined alarm parameters, including Alarm
Name, Alarm ID, Alarm Severity Level, and Alarm Type.
NOTE
l Each type of user-defined alarm is allocated a unique alarm ID. The alarm ID ranges from 65033
to 65233.
l The same type of alarm must use the same alarm ID for all eNodeBs. For example, if the door
status alarm ID for an eNodeB is 65035, the door status alarm IDs for other eNodeBs must also
be 65035.
4. Click OK. The information about the added user-defined alarm is displayed in the NE
Alarm Setting window.
5. Click Apply to save the user-defined alarm.
A message is displayed, indicating that saving the user-defined alarm is successful or fails.
If saving the user-defined alarm is successful, click OK. The icon disappears. If
saving the user-defined alarm fails, click Details to view the failure cause and rectify the
fault accordingly. Then, add the user-defined alarm again.
Step 2 Bind the user-defined alarm to the eNodeB.
1. Choose Monitor > Alarm Setting > NE Alarm Settings.
2. On the User-Defined Alarm tab page, click the Alarm Binding tab. Then, add the user-
defined alarm binding relationship.
l Single binding
a. Choose Edit > Add. The Add Alarm Binding dialog box is displayed, as shown
in Figure 4-29.
b. Select an NE from the Select NE navigation tree or enter an NE name in the Search
by name text box on the left. Select an alarm from the Select Alarm/Event
navigation tree or enter an alarm name in the Search by name text box in the
middle. Select an alarm or event ID based on the NE type, and set binding
parameters, including port type, cabinet No., subrack No., and slot No. of the port,
alarm voltage, and upper and lower alarm thresholds.
NOTE
If a digital port is used for the monitoring board, you must set alarm voltage to specify a
condition for reporting alarms. If an analog port is used for the monitoring board, you must
set upper and lower alarm thresholds to specify a condition for reporting alarms.
c. Click OK. The information about the added user-defined alarm is displayed in the
NE Alarm Setting window.
l Batch binding
a. Choose Import/Export > Export Template. The Export Alarm Binding
Template dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-30.
Alternatively, choose Import/Export > Export to export the existing records on
the Alarm Binding tab page by NE type.
b. In the displayed Export Alarm Binding Template dialog box, select the NE type,
and specify the save path and name for the exported template.
c. Open the template and edit it based on actual requirements by referring to the
example in the template.
d. Choose Import/Export > Import to import the edited template to the M2000.
Then, click OK.
The user-defined alarm binding relationship in the template is displayed on the
Alarm Binding tab page. Each record is prefixed with the icon.
3. Select an alarm binding relationship record and click Apply to apply it to the NE.
A message is displayed, indicating that applying the alarm binding relationship is successful
or fails. If applying the alarm binding relationship is successful, click OK. The icon
disappears. If applying the alarm binding relationship fails, click Details to view the failure
cause and rectify the fault accordingly. Then, apply the alarm binding relationship again.
----End
Context
You can manually trigger several external environment alarms to verify the parameter settings.
If external environment alarms can be reported, the parameter settings are correct.
Procedure
Step 1 Manually trigger several external environment alarms. For details, see the appendix Triggering
Monitoring Device Alarms.
Step 2 Check for the external environment alarms on the M2000. For details, see Rectifying Faults
and Clearing Alarms Against the eNodeB Health Check Report. If external environment
alarms can be reported, the parameter settings are correct. If no external environment alarm is
reported, set the parameters again or contact Huawei for technical support.
----End
Example
Assuming that a water sensor is installed for the fan monitoring unit (FMU), to check whether
the parameter settings for water damage alarms are correct, perform the following operations:
1. Run the MOD FMU command with WS_DISABLE(Water-Immersed Sensor
Disabled) in Special Boolean Alarm Flag cleared.
2. Immerse the water sensor or its probe in water for more than 10s, and check whether water
damage alarms are reported. If water damage alarms are reported, the parameter settings
are correct.
Prerequisites
l The RRU or RFU is connected properly.
l The local maintenance terminal (LMT) or M2000 communicates properly with the eNodeB.
l You have logged in to the M2000 as administrator.
Context
The maximum output power of the RRU or RFU is specified by the local operator.
If an eNodeB is configured with multiple RRUs or RFUs, you must use MML commands to
manually reset RRUs or RFUs one by one. If RRUs or RFUs are cascaded, set the maximum
output power for the lowest-level RRU or RFU and then for other RRUs or RFUs to reduce the
impact on upper-level RRUs.
The maximum output power for the RRU or RFU needs to be set only if it is less than the
maximum output power that the RRU or RFU can physically achieve.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the DSP RRU command to query the cabinet No., subrack No., slot No., and transmit
channel No. of the RRU or RFU.
Step 2 Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to query the maximum output power supported by the
RRU or RFU based on the information queried in Step 1.
Step 3 Run the LOC RRUTC command to set the maximum output power for the RRU or RFU.
Step 4 Run the RST BRD command to reset the RRU or RFU.
Step 5 Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to check whether the setting of the maximum output
power for the RRU or RFU takes effect.
If... Then...
The maximum transmit Set the maximum output power within the power specifications
power fails to be set supported by the RRU or RFU. If the maximum output power
still fails to be set, contact Huawei for technical support.
NOTE
Before returning a used but not faulty RRU or RFU to the Spare Parts Center, run the LOC RRUTC
command to set the maximum output power (TXMAXPWR) to 0 and reset the RRU or RFU for the setting
to take effect.
----End
Prerequisites
l The eNodeB and the MME/S-GW are properly connected.
l The negotiation data of the eNodeB to be commissioned is added to the MME/S-GW.
l The testing UE is functional and is registered in the HSS.
l The FTP server for testing the basic services is available.
l The WWW server for testing the basic services is available.
Procedure
l Test the web page browsing service.
Testing Method Access the WWW server and browse the web pages through a UE.
Perform the test 20 times.
Testing Method Access the FTP server and upload files through a UE. Perform the
test 10 times.
Testing Method Access the FTP server and download files through a UE. Perform the
test 10 times.
Expectation Connection success rate > 95%. The calls are uninterrupted and none
of the calls get dropped till they are released. The voice is clear with
no loud noise.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 Query the eNodeB state.
1. On the M2000 tab page, choose Topology > Main Topology. The Main Topology tab
page is displayed.
2. On the Main Topology tab page, select the target network element (NE) and right-click
Query Maintenance Mode. Then, the Query Maintenance Mode dialog box is displayed.
3. Check whether Current NE Maintenance Mode is set to NORMAL. If it is, the
configuration is complete. If it is not, go to Step 2.
Step 2 Set the eNodeB state.
1. On the M2000 tab page, choose Maintenance > Maintenance Mode. The Maintenance
Mode tab page is displayed.
2. Click Set NE Mode at the upper left corner of the Maintenance Mode tab page. The
Set Maintenance Mode dialog box is displayed.
3. Select the target NE and specify the time.
4. Set NE Mode to NORMAL. The eNodeB is changed to the normal state.
5. Click OK. The setting of the maintenance mode is complete.
6. Ensure that the current the eNodeB state is NORMAL by executing Step 1 again.
NOTE
The alarms that are not cleared during commissioning will be reported on the eNodeB in the normal state.
----End
Main Window
Figure 4-31 shows the main window for eNodeB commissioning. Table 4-22 describes the
window.
2 Commissioni Displays all the commissioning tasks and their progress. You can
ng task list right-click a task, and then choose the corresponding menu item
from the shortcut menu to perform an operation.
NOTE
l By default, the GUI displays only commissioning tasks created by a
specific user. To view commissioning tasks created by other users,
3 Shortcut You can right-click a task, and then choose the corresponding
menu menu item from the shortcut menu to perform an operation.
1 Alarm object After selecting an object type, you can view all alarms of this
tree object type in the alarm list in the right pane.
2 Alarm list After an object type is selected, all alarms of this object type are
displayed in the alarm list.
3 Tab named after Displays tabs named after data file types that are required for
a data file type commissioning.
4 Operation result Displays the details about the operations on uploading the type
of data file.
NOTE
Figure 4-34 Procedure for local eNodeB commissioning using a USB flash drive in unified
encryption mode
NOTE
You can insert the USB flash drive before or after the eNodeB is powered on. The figure takes inserting
the USB flash drive after the eNodeB is powered on as an example.
2 Local Download and activate the eNodeB software and data Mandat
operations configuration files using a USB flash drive. For details, see ory
4.4.3 Downloading and Activating the Software, Data
Configuration File, and License File Using a USB Flash
Drive.
5 Start the eNodeB commissioning task. For details, see 4.4.6 Mandat
Starting an eNodeB Commissioning Task. ory
11 Remote Set the maximum transmit power of RRUs or RFUs. RRU Optiona
operations and RFU are short for remote radio unit and radio frequency l
on the unit, respectively. For details, see 4.4.12 Setting the
M2000 Maximum Output Power for RRUs or RFUs.
12 Local and Verify the basic services of the eNodeB. For details, see Optiona
remote 4.4.13 Testing the Basic Services of the eNodeB. l
cooperative
operations
NOTE
After an eNodeB is deployed, local engineers can determine whether the eNodeB is working properly by
observing the indicators on eNodeB boards. For details about the indicator descriptions and operations for
rectifying possible faults, see 5.3 Checking the Status of Indicators.
4.4.2 Preparations
Before local commissioning using a USB flash drive in unified encryption mode, you need to
collect related eNodeB information, obtain commissioning tools and digital certificates, and save
the required files to the USB flash drive.
Prerequisites
l In PKI-based authentication mode, the CA server is deployed so that the eNodeB can
download the operator's certificate from the CA server based on Certificate Management
Protocol version 2 (CMPv2).
l The eNodeB software package and data configuration files are available.
NOTE
In PKI-based authentication mode, APPCERT must be set to OPKIDevCert.cer, and
TRUSTCERT must be set to the name of the operator's trust certificate in data configuration files.
l The commissioning license is ready if you need to load and activate the license file using
the USB flash drive.
l The USB flash drive and commissioning files have been scanned by using the antivirus
software and no virus was detected. The commissioning files include the software package,
data configuration file, and license file.
Context
The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption.
Procedure
Step 1 Obtain the tools required for the local commissioning using the USB flash drive, as described
in Table 4-27.
Table 4-27 Tools required for the local commissioning using the USB flash drive
Tool Description
USB flash drive l The USB flash drive is equipped with an indicator that indicates
the data transmission status.
l Capacity ≥ 256 MB
l Model: The USB flash drive must be provided by Huawei.
l The USB flash drive must not provide any additional functions,
such as encryption, virus scanning, and bootstrapping. In
addition, it cannot be an MP3 player, MP4 player, or smart
phone.
l The USB flash drive used for commissioning cannot be used for
other purposes. In addition, irrelevant files, especially those with
Chinese file names, cannot be saved in the USB flash drive.
Step 2 Obtain the eNodeB software and files for automatic eNodeB deployment.
NOTE
l The eNodeB software package is ready, and can be downloaded from http://support.huawei.com.
The default configuration file (Precfg.ini) is provided in the software package.
l The name of the data configuration file must be CFGDATA.XML (case-sensitive). Perform
configurations according to eNodeB Initial Configuration Guide, change the name of the data
configuration file from M2000.XML to CFGDATA.XML, and save the file to a local computer.
Step 3 Save the files required for local commissioning using a USB flash drive in the paths (case-
sensitive) on the USB flash drive, as listed in Table 4-28. The saving paths cannot be changed
because they are defined by the system.
NOTE
l If only one data configuration file is saved to the USB flash drive, save it to usb:\eNodeB
\CFGDATA.XML. If several data configuration files are saved to the USB flash drive, create several
new ESN folders and save the data configuration files to the corresponding ESN folders. The save path
is usb:\eNodeB\ESN\CFGDATA.XML. The eNodeB preferentially reads the data configuration file
in the ESN folder.
l If you want to load BootROM version during the eNodeB deployment, save the BootROM package
(FIRMWARE.CSP) in the directory where the eNodeB software package (SOFTWARE.CSP) is saved.
l If you want to load a hot or cold patch during the eNodeB deployment, save the patch package
(SWCPATCH.CSP or SWHPATCH.CSP) in the directory where the eNodeB software package
(SOFTWARE.CSP) is saved.
l When you save the software package, save the software version file, that is, the .CSP file to usb:\eNodeB
\Software\.
l The default configuration file is used to download the files for the boards not configured yet. For details
about how to configure the default configuration file, see 5.4 Configuring the Default Configuration
File.
l If only one default configuration file is saved to the USB flash drive, save it to usb:\eNodeB
\Precfg.ini. If several default configuration files are saved to the USB flash drive, create several new
ESN folders and save the data configuration files to the corresponding ESN folders. The save path is
usb:\eNodeB\ESN\Precfg.ini. The eNodeB preferentially reads the default configuration file in the
ESN folder.
l Only one license file is allowed in the folder that contains the license file, and the value of ESN must
be ANY.
Step 4 (Optional) Encrypt files in the USB flash drive. For details, see 5.5 Encrypting Files in the
USB Flash Drive.
Step 5 Perform integrity protection for files in the USB flash drive. For details, see 5.5 Encrypting
Files in the USB Flash Drive.
----End
certificates to the eNodeB. This digital certificate is required only if the PKI-based authentication
is used. If the PSK-based authentication is used, skip this step. PKI is short for public key
infrastructure, and PSK is short for Preshared Key.
Context
Before eNodeB delivery, the Huawei root certificate and Huawei device certificate are
preconfigured in the main control board of the eNodeB by default. The two certificates are
permanently valid.
l As a default trusted CA certificate, the Huawei root certificate has been loaded to the
certificate storage area of an eNodeB before delivery. This certificate must be loaded to
the CA server before eNodeB commissioning. In this way, the CA server can authenticate
the eNodeB when the eNodeB applies for an operator's device certificate based on
Certificate Management Protocol version 2 (CMPv2).
l The Huawei device certificate is the initial device certificate of an eNodeB. This certificate
identifies the eNodeB when the eNodeB applies for an operator's device certificate based
on CMPv2.
Figure 4-35 shows the procedure for obtaining the digital certificate.
Procedure
Step 1 Obtain the Huawei root certificate.
----End
is configured according to the user guide of a corresponding equipment type. The following
configurations and operations are based on Huawei S6500 series Ethernet switches. If the
eNodeB performs IEEE 802.1X-based access control, operations on authentication devices are
based on Huawei Authentication, Authorization and Accounting (AAA) server.
Prerequisites
l Quidway S6500 Series Ethernet Switches Operation Manual is available. You can obtain
the document from http://support.huawei.com.
l HUAWEI AAA Commissioning Guide is available. You can obtain the document from
http://support.huawei.com.
l If IEEE 802.1X-based access control is adopted, the operator must use the authentication
access equipment that supports IEEE 802.1X-based access control authentication and the
corresponding AAA server that supports Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP).
Context
When the SeGW is deployed, you are required to configure data for the SeGW. If digital
certificates are required for the PKI-based authentication, the customized parameters, such as
the IP addresses of the SeGW and M2000 server, must be set on the public Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server. In this way, an Internet protocol security (IPSec) tunnel
between the eNodeB and the SeGW can be set up, and the eNodeB can be connected to the
M2000. When IEEE 802.1X-based access control authentication is adopted, you must configure
the authentication access equipment and authentication server. Generally, the authentication
server refers to the AAA server.
l Table 4-29 describes the SeGW configuration.
IP address Both the public SeGW and the serving SeGW should be configured with
the IP address of the interface for the untrusted area on the eNodeB side
and IP address of the interface for the trusted area on the evolved packet
core (EPC) side.
Route l Public SeGW: The routes to the M2000, eNodeB, and temporary
operation and maintenance (O&M) IP address must be
configured.
l Serving SeGW: The routes to the M2000, S-GW, mobility
management entity (MME), eNodeB port IP address, S1 signaling
and service IP addresses, and O&M IP address must be
configured.
IKE local The public SeGW and serving SeGW must be configured.
name
Item Description
ike proposal l The authentication method parameter can be set to the digital
certificate mode or pre-shared key mode based on the actual
networking.
l The authentication algorithm parameter can be set to SHA_1 or
MD5. Generally, this parameter is set to SHA_1.
l The encryption algorithm parameter can be set to AES or DES.
Generally, this parameter is set to AES.
l The DH group parameter can be set to DH group2.
ike peer l Public SeGW: The key or certificate domain must be configured
based on the authentication mode specified by ike proposal. local
id type is set to name, remote name is set to p-segw, ike
proposal can be set to V1 or V2 based on the preceding setting, and
ip pool must be configured to allocate a temporary O&M IP
address for the eNodeB.
l Serving SeGW: The key or certificate domain must be configured
based on the authentication mode specified by the ike proposal
parameter. local id type is set to name, remote name is set to s-
segw, ike proposal can be set to V1 or V2 based on the preceding
setting.
ipsec policy- The public SeGW and serving security are set to template. ACL must
template be set based on the preceding settings. If the public SeGW and serving
SeGW are the same, ACL must be set to different values. psf group
must be set to DH group2. ike peer must be set to different values for
the public SeGW and serving SeGW. ipsecproposal must be set based
on the preceding setting.
ipsec binding policy can be bound to the planned port according to the configurations
to port of ipsec policy.
l The purposes for configuring the public DHCP server are as follows:
– When an eNodeB sends messages to the public DHCP server to obtain customized
information, the public DHCP server can identify that the eNodeB is Huawei eNodeB.
– Then, the public DHCP server returns the customized information to the eNodeB.
The public DHCP server needs to configure the information for identifying Huawei eNodeB
and the customized information related to Huawei equipment. The customized information
provides necessary configuration information for the setup of the DHCP server with the
SeGW deployed, as described in Table 4-30.
23 User name for 1~32 Used to log in to the CR or CRL Configure this
logging in to the server. port number
CR or CRL when using the
server CR or CRL
server.
25 Path of the cross 1~64 Used to save the cross certificate Configure this
certificate on the on the CR or CRL server. port number
CR or CRL when using the
server CR or CRL
server.
26 Path of the CRL 1~64 Used to save the operator's CRL Configure this
files on the CR file on the CR or CRL server. port number
or CRL server when using the
CR or CRL
server.
l When the authentication access equipment is used, the authentication mode and the
authentication method must be set to Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service
(RADIUS) and EAP respectively, because certificate authentication is adopted currently.
l When the AAA server is used, the CA certificates of terminal users must be uploaded, and
the file names of the user certificate and private key must be configured for the AAA server.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the configuration of the SeGW by referring to Table 4-29.
Step 2 Configure the public DHCP server by referring to Table 4-30.
Configuration methods vary according to different DHCP servers. The following part describes
the DHCP server configuration using the interface IP address pool based on Huawei Quidway
S6500.
1. Run system-view to enter the system view.
2. Run dhcp enable to enable DHCP services.
3. Run interface vlanif vlan-id to enter the VLANIF view.
4. Run ip address ip-address { mask | mask-length } to configure the IP address of the
VLANIF interface. The range of addresses in the interface address pool equals to the
network segment of IP addresses of this interface.
5. Run dhcp select interface to configure the DHCP server to be in address pool mode.
6. Run dhcp server lease { day day [ hour hour [ minute minute ] ] | unlimited } to configure
the IP address lease. The IP address lease is one day.
7. (Optional) Run dhcp server excluded-ip-address start-ip-address [ end-ip-address ] to
configure the IP addresses that are not allocated in the DHCP address pool. Multiple IP
address segments that are not allocated in the DHCP address pool can be configured by
repeating this step.
8. Configure the customized DHCP information of the address pool of a VLANIF by referring
to Table 4-30.
9. Apply the VLANIF on the physical port. Huawei Quidway S6500 will respond the DHCP
request messages (DHCP Discover messages) that are sent to this physical port.
The following shows the customized information on the DHCP server of Huawei Quidway
S6500.
interface vlanif 3600
ip address 20.20.20.20 255.255.255.0
dhcp select interface
dhcp server option 43 sub-option 18 ip-address 20.20.21.21 //SeGW IP address
dhcp server option 43 sub-option 35 ip-address 20.20.23.21 //CA IP address
dhcp server option 43 sub-option 28 ip-address 10.141.131.55 //M2000 IP address
dhcp server option 43 sub-option 36 hex 1F 90 //CA port No.
dhcp server option 43 sub-option 39 hex 00 //CA communication
protocol
dhcp server option 43 sub-option 38 ascii C=cn,S=sh,L=qc,O=wl,OU=lte,CN=enbca //
CA name
dhcp server option 43 sub-option 37 ascii /pkix/ // CA path
Prerequisites
l A USB flash drive is ready. The required files are saved in the USB flash drive.
l The hardware such as remote radio units (RRUs) and LTE baseband processing units
(LBBPs) have been properly connected.
CAUTION
When you save the required files into the USB flash drive, ensure that the locking switch on the
USB flash drive is disabled. In other words, the USB flash drive must be writable.
Context
Before downloading files from a USB flash drive, the eNodeB verifies the names and formats
of the files.
Before downloading the software and data configuration file, the eNodeB automatically checks
the working mode of the RRU. Then, the eNodeB downloads and activates the corresponding
software and data configuration file based on the working mode of the RRU.
You must pay attention to the following points when you download and activate the software,
data configuration file, and license file using the USB flash drive:
l If the software and data configuration file in the USB flash drive are already activated, they
cannot be reactivated for the same eNodeB because of the cyclic redundancy check (CRC)
function. The CRC function can prevent the software and data configuration file from being
reactivated when the USB flash drive is always inserted into the eNodeB. The CRC function
can also prevent the eNodeB from being reset again after eNodeB deployment using the
USB flash drive.
l If the USB flash drive contains only the eNodeB software and data configuration file, the
eNodeB downloads and activates the eNodeB software, and then downloads and activates
the data configuration file.
l If the eNodeB software or data configuration file is missing in the USB flash drive, the
eNodeB performs the following steps:
– If the software is missing, the eNodeB downloads and activates the data configuration
file and license file except the software.
– If the data configuration file is missing, the eNodeB upgrades to the minimum
configuration of the target version and downloads and activates the license file except
the data configuration file.
– If the license file is missing, the eNodeB downloads and activates the software and data
configuration file except the license file.
l If the eNodeB software upgrade fails, the eNodeB will roll back to the source version.
l Before downloading and activating the data configuration file, the eNodeB does not check
the compatibility between the data configuration file and the eNodeB software version. The
eNodeB performs the following activities:
– If the target software version is not the same as the active software version, the eNodeB
checks the mapping between the data configuration file and the software after the
software is upgraded and the eNodeB is reset. If the software is incompatible with the
data configuration file or the download and activation of the data configuration file fail,
the eNodeB upgrades to the minimum configuration of the target version.
– If the target software version is the same as the active software version, the eNodeB
checks the mapping between the data configuration file and the software without
upgrading the software. If the software is incompatible with the data configuration file
or the download and activation of the data configuration file fail, the eNodeB uses the
data configuration file of the source version.
l The eNodeB does not download or activate the eNodeB software, data configuration file,
or license file from the USB flash drive in any of the following cases:
– The eNodeB software and data configuration file or their saving paths do not exist in
the USB flash drive.
– The target software version is the same as the active software version. In this case, the
eNodeB software cannot be downloaded or activated, but the data configuration file and
license file can be downloaded and activated.
– The data configuration file is the same as the active data configuration. In this case, the
data configuration file cannot be downloaded or activated, but the software and license
file can be downloaded and activated.
– The license file cannot be downloaded, but the software and data configuration file can
be downloaded and activated in any of the following cases:
– The license file to be downloaded is not the commissioning license.
– The license file to be downloaded is the commissioning license, but the value of
ESN is not ANY.
– The configurations or the names of the license file to be downloaded and the active
license file are the same.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the eNodeB is powered on. If it is not powered on, power on the eNodeB. If it
is already powered on, go to Step 2.
NOTE
Ensure that the RRU is powered on and the common public radio interface (CPRI) connections are correct
before you power on the eNodeB. Check for faults by monitoring the CPRI indicator status on the LBBP
after the eNodeB is powered on. For details, see 5.3 Checking the Status of Indicators.
Step 2 When the eNodeB operates properly, insert the USB flash drive into the USB port on the
BBU3900 main control board. If an LMPT is used, the USB port is shown in Figure 4-36; if an
UMPT is used, the USB port is shown in Figure 4-37.
Step 3 Wait for the eNodeB to automatically upgrade the software and data configuration file.
If the download or activation fails, commission the eNodeB by updating the software and data
configuration file in the USB flash drive or using a new USB flash drive.
If the download or activation still fails, perform the local eNodeB commissioning on the LMT.
When the software and data configuration file are being upgraded, the normal status of the
indicators on the USB flash drive and main control board is shown in Table 4-31. If the indicators
are abnormal, see 5.3 Checking the Status of Indicators.
Automatically detecting Steady on Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
the USB flash drive
Downloading the software Blinking Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for
and data configuration file 0.125s)
from the USB flash drive
Activating the eNodeB Steady on Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for
software and data 0.125s)
configuration file
Normal eNodeB operation Steady on Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
WARNING
Do not remove the USB flash drive or reset the eNodeB when downloading or activating the
eNodeB software and data configuration file using the USB flash drive. After the download is
complete, the eNodeB automatically activates the software and data configuration file. Then,
the eNodeB is reset.
Step 4 When the download and activation are successful, rectify faults by referring to Checking the
Status of Indicators.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
CAUTION
The eNodeB software package contains the LMT software. Before downloading the eNodeB
software package, pay attention to the following points:
l When the LMPT is used: the speed of writing to the flash memory is limited, the LMPT
does not support download of the LMT complete package through the USB flash drive. To
reduce the eNodeB deployment duration, some of the files of the LMT software are
automatically downloaded from the M2000 to the eNodeB four hours after the eNodeB
deployment. If you need to use the LMT complete package immediately after the eNodeB
deployment, run the SPL SOFTWARE command on the M2000 after the eNodeB is
connected to the M2000. Set Delay Download File Supply Flag to YES(Supply File that
Support Delay). The remaining files of LMT software are downloaded to the eNodeB. If
you want the LMPT to support download of the LMT complete package through the USB
flash drive, when preparing the files in the USB flash drive, configure the value of
WEBLMT from the default configuration files as YES (case-insensitive).
l When the UMPT is used: the speed of writing to the flash memory increases. The UMPT
supports download of the LMT complete package through the USB flash drive. Therefore,
an LMT package is not required after software activation.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the M2000 client.
Context
You need to upload data files in the following scenarios:
The data files required for eNodeB commissioning need to be saved in specified paths on the
M2000 server. For details, see Table 4-32.
Configurati /export/home/sysm/ftproot/adn/AutoDeploymentData/eNodeB/CfgData/
on data file
Deploymen /export/home/sysm/ftproot/adn/AutoDeploymentData/eNodeB/ADList/
t list
RET /export/home/sysm/ftproot/OutSourcing/RETFile/
antenna
software
version and
configurati
on data file
RET /export/home/sysm/ftproot/adn/AutoDeploymentData/eNodeB/
antenna RETTemplate/
template
Commissio /export/home/sysm/ftproot/adn/AutoDeploymentData/eNodeB/
ning license CommissionLicense/
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 Click Prepare File&Data. The window for preparing files and data is displayed. Upload data
files as required.
If you Then...
need to...
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
Operation, Status, Source File Path, Destination File Path, and
Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the software versions are uploaded.
l Upload in batches
One or multiple software versions corresponding to one or multiple NE types
are uploaded at a time.
1. On the Software & Cold Patch tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS
Client to OSS Server. The NE File Transfer dialog box is displayed.
2. Click in the lower left corner of the dialog box, select an NE type
from the NE Type drop-down list, and select Software from the File
Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Repeat the preceding two steps to select one or multiple files
corresponding to multiple NE types. The selected files are displayed in
the Source Path area.
5. In the Source Path area, select one or multiple files and click Add. The
files to be uploaded are displayed in the lower part of the dialog box.
6. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
If you Then...
need to...
If you Then...
need to...
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
Operation, Status, Source File Path, Destination File Path, and
Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the cold patches are uploaded.
l Upload in batches
One or multiple cold patches corresponding to one or multiple NE types are
uploaded at a time.
1. On the Software & Cold Patch tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS
Client to OSS Server. The NE File Transfer dialog box is displayed.
2. Click in the lower left corner of the dialog box, select an NE type
from the NE Type drop-down list, and select Software from the File
Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Repeat the preceding two steps to select one or multiple files
corresponding to multiple NE types. The selected files are displayed in
the Source Path area.
5. In the Source Path area, select one or multiple files and click Add. The
files to be uploaded are displayed in the lower part of the dialog box.
6. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
If you Then...
need to...
If you Then...
need to...
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
Operation, Status, Source File Path, Destination File Path, and
Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the hot patches are uploaded.
l Upload in batches
One or multiple hot patches corresponding to one or multiple NE types are
uploaded at a time.
1. On the Hot Patch tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS Client to OSS
Server. The NE File Transfer dialog box is displayed.
2. Click in the lower left corner of the dialog box, select an NE type
from the NE Type drop-down list, and select Software from the File
Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Repeat the preceding two steps to select one or multiple files
corresponding to multiple NE types. The selected files are displayed in
the Source Path area.
5. In the Source Path area, select one or multiple files and click Add. The
files to be uploaded are displayed in the lower part of the dialog box.
6. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
If you Then...
need to...
Upload 1. On the NE Configuration Data tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS
configurati Client to OSS Server. The Upload NE Configuration Data dialog box is
on data displayed.
files 2. Select an NE type from the NE Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting files is
displayed. Select the folder where the configuration data file that you want
to upload is stored, click Select. The Upload NE Configuration Data dialog
box is displayed.
CAUTION
The path for saving the eNodeB configuration data file to be uploaded must be ..
\eNodeBName\M2000.XML on the local PC. An eNodeBName folder contains only
one XML file. To upload eNodeB configuration data files, you must select the
eNodeBName folder where the files are stored. You can select multiple
eNodeBName folders at a time.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the Destination
Path area. You can only view the path.
Upload 1. On the Deployment List tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS Client to
deploymen OSS Server. The Upload Deployment List dialog box is displayed.
t lists 2. Select an NE type from the NE Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting files is
displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click Open to return to
the Upload Deployment List dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the Upload Deployment List dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed information
about the operations at the bottom of the window: Operation, Status, Source
File Path, Destination File Path, and Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the deployment lists are uploaded.
NOTE
If the CME is not deployed, you can click Export Template to export an empty
deployment template, fill out the template based on the planned data, and upload the
template. The default names of the exported empty deployment list templates are the
same. Therefore, you are advised to change the template names after filling out these
templates.
If you Then...
need to...
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
Operation, Status, Source File Path, Destination File Path, and
Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the RET antenna software versions and
configuration data files are uploaded.
l Upload in batches
One or multiple RET antenna software versions and configuration data files
corresponding to one or multiple NE types are uploaded at a time.
1. On the RET tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS Client to OSS
Server. The NE File Transfer dialog box is displayed.
2. Click in the lower left corner of the dialog box, select an NE type
from the NE Type drop-down list, and select Software from the File
Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Repeat the preceding two steps to select one or multiple files
corresponding to multiple NE types. The selected files are displayed in
the Source Path area.
5. In the Source Path area, select one or multiple files and click Add. The
files to be uploaded are displayed in the lower part of the dialog box.
6. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
If you Then...
need to...
on data The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
files information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
Operation, Status, Source File Path, Destination File Path, and
Progress.
7. When Progress is 100%, the RET antenna software versions and
configuration data files are uploaded.
Upload 1. On the RET Template tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS Client to
RET OSS Server. The Upload RET Template dialog box is displayed.
antenna 2. Select an NE type from the NE Type drop-down list.
templates
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting files is
displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click Open to return to
the Upload RET Template dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the Upload RET Template dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed information
about the operations at the bottom of the window: Operation, Status, Source
File Path, Destination File Path, and Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the RET antenna templates are uploaded.
NOTE
If the CME is not deployed, you can click Export Template to export an empty RET
antenna template, fill out the template based on the planned data, and upload the
template.
Upload 1. On the Commission License tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS Client
commissio to OSS Server. The Upload Commission License dialog box is displayed.
ning 2. Select an NE type from the NE Type drop-down list.
licenses
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting files is
displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click Open to return to
the Upload Commission License dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the Upload Commission License dialog box. The system
starts uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed information
about the operations at the bottom of the window: Operation, Status, Source
File Path, Destination File Path, and Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the commissioning licenses are uploaded.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l eNodeB commissioning preparations are complete.
l If the M2000 is deployed in SLS mode, radio network planning engineers need to plan the
area to which the eNodeB belongs.
l If the eNodeB and the M2000 server are located on different network segments, you need
to configure the router nearest to the eNodeB as the DHCP relay.
– In an insecure scenario, you need to set the DHCP relay IP address on the router to the
DHCP server IP address of the M2000. In a secure scenario, you need to set the DHCP
relay IP address on the router to the common DHCP server IP address and on the security
gateway, you need to set the IP address of the DHCP server to the DHCP server IP
address of the M2000.
– In situations where the M2000 is deployed in SLS mode, the preceding DHCP server
IP address of the M2000 refers to the host IP address.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Import a Select From Server and choose a deployment list from the drop-
deployment list down list box.
from the server
Import a
Select From Client and click to select a deployment list.
deployment list
from the client
3. (Optional) Select the area to which an eNodeB belongs in the Sub-area area. This step is
mandatory when theM2000 is deployed in SLS mode.
NEs belong to different areas when they are managed by different M2000 servers. If the
M2000 is deployed in SLS mode, NEs are managed by different servers. On the CME client,
these NEs belong to different areas. Select the active or slave M2000 server that the NE
belongs to based on the planned data. Configure the data as follows:
l If the NE was created on the active M2000 server, set the PEERIP parameter for the
OMCH to the IP address of the active M2000 server.
l If the NE was created on the slave M2000 server, set the PEERIP parameter for the
OMCH to the IP address of the slave M2000 server.
l Set the Destination IP parameter for the IP router from the NE to the M2000 server to
an IP address on the the network segment where the M2000 server is located.
NOTE
Onsite deployment engineers need to perform operations based on the areas that have been planned
for eNodeBs by radio network planning engineers.
l If eNodeBs belong to one area, import one deployment list to create eNodeBs in batches.
l If eNodeBs belong to different areas, import multiple deployment lists by area to create eNodeBs.
4. In NE Connection Mode, set a mode for connecting the M2000 and NEs.
After the import is complete, the M2000 checks for mandatory parameters with empty values
and invalid base station configuration data. In addition, the information indicating whether the
import succeeded or failed is displayed on the Operation Information tab page.
l If the import is successful, the M2000 automatically creates a commissioning task for each
eNodeB. The imported eNodeB deployment lists are displayed on the Deployment List tab
page.
l If the import fails, the causes of the failure are displayed on the Operation Information tab
page.
Step 4 (Optional) Modify data in the imported deployment lists as required. This step is mandatory
when you need to modify the data in the imported deployment lists.
NOTE
You can check whether the parameters in eNodeB deployment lists can be modified by referring to
Parameters for the eNodeB Deployment List.
1. Select a commissioning task from the commissioning task list, and double-click the cells
containing parameter values to change the values.
You can change ESNs by double-clicking the cells containing ESNs. Alternatively, you
can perform the following operations to change the ESNs:
a. Click in the ESN value cell. The Bind ESN dialog box is displayed.
b. Select an ESN that is not bound, and click OK to return to the Deployment
Parameter dialog box.
NOTE
You can change the ESNs before OM links are established between base stations and the
M2000.
2. The changed parameter values are displayed in the commissioning task window and
highlighted in red.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l eNodeB commissioning tasks have been started.
Context
A maximum of 500 commissioning tasks can be started at a time. In which, a maximum of 200
commissioning tasks can be being executed and the rest are waiting to be executed in the queue.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 On the Deployment List tab page, right-click one or multiple commissioning tasks and choose
Start from the shortcut menu. The Task Settings dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Select steps in the Select column based on the actual plan.
NOTE
l : Indicates the step that is performed by default. You can choose whether to perform it.
l : Indicates the step that is not performed by default. You can choose whether to perform it.
For details about commissioning procedures and steps, see Table 4-33.
Wait for manual After the OM channel is set up, the status of the
operation commissioning task changes to Waiting for
manual operation. Manually confirm the
completion and proceed with the commissioning
after the commissioning environment of the
network is ready.
Monitor cell Check whether any active cells exist under the
service status eNodeB.
You can monitor alarms of the eNodeB on the
M2000 during software commissioning to locate
and handle exceptions in time.
7 Perform Perform NHC You can perform health check to learn the
NHC eNodeB operating status.
NOTE
The system checks whether all configured RF modules are usable before starting project quality check.
l If all configured RF modules are usable, the system issues project quality check commands to proceed
with subsequent operations.
l If only some configured RF modules are usable, the system sets a timer (2.5 minutes in length and a
maximum of 5 times) to wait until all RF modules are usable. After all RF modules are usable, the
system issues project quality check commands to proceed with subsequent operations. If some RF
modules are still unusable after the timer expires, the system ends the project quality check task.
Step 4 Click OK. The M2000 automatically checks whether the data files required for procedures are
available.
If... Then...
Not all the 1. The Data Preparation Check dialog box is displayed, showing check
required data results about the required data files.
files are available l : Indicates that all the required data files are available.
l : Indicates that not all the required data files are available.
2. Click OK. The Data Preparation Check dialog box is closed.
3. Obtain relevant data files based on the check results.
For detailed operations, see Uploading Data Files.
4. After the required data files are uploaded, start the commissioning
tasks again.
All the required The M2000 starts commissioning. The selected commissioning tasks enter
data files are the Running state.
available NOTE
If all the required data files are available, the Data Preparation Check dialog box
is not displayed.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l eNodeB commissioning tasks have been started.
Context
l By default, the GUI displays only commissioning tasks created by a specific user. To view
commissioning tasks created by other users, click on the toolbar.
l When the system performs NE upgrades during the automatic configuration phase of a
commissioning task, if you restart or delete the commissioning task, the system does not
restart NE upgrades but proceeds until the related NE upgrade task is complete. When the
system displays The NE is performing the following task: ******. Please try later. in
Description for a commissioning task, the NE upgrade task is running. If you want to
perform automatic deployment again, wait until the NE upgrade task is complete. You can
choose Software > NE Upgrade Task Management > NE Upgrade Task to query the
NE upgrade task.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 View the status and progress of commissioning tasks in the commissioning task list.
TIP
You can quickly view the status of commissioning tasks by using either of the following methods:
l In the commissioning task list, the status of the tasks is displayed in Status, the current procedures are
displayed in Current Phase, and details about each procedure are displayed in Description.
l In the commissioning task list, select one or multiple commissioning tasks whose status you want to
view, and then click . The right pane displays execution status of
steps for commissioning procedures.
The displayed information includes the execution status, description, start time and end time of each
commissioning substep.
Step 3 (Optional) Click . The Statistics dialog box is displayed, showing the number of
commissioning tasks in each status. Click OK to close the dialog box.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l Software commissioning monitoring has already started, and the completion of the
commissioning has not yet been confirmed.
Context
The alarms are categorized into E1/T1 port alarms, transmission path alarms, antenna alarms,
software and configuration alarms, board alarms, cell alarms, external alarms, and other alarms
by object type. Other alarms refer to the alarms that cannot be categorized on the basis of specific
objects.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 In the commissioning task list, select one or multiple commissioning tasks for which you want
to handle alarms. Right-click the tasks, and then choose Open Monitor Window from the
shortcut menu. The alarm monitoring window is displayed.
In the displayed window, you can view alarms on eNodeBs by monitored object. For details
about the alarm monitoring window, see Interface Description: eNodeB Commissioning
Window.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l Commissioning tasks are at the monitoring stage, and the completion of the commissioning
tasks has not yet been confirmed.
Context
CAUTION
eNodeB services are interrupted upon antenna fault diagnosis. Therefore, you need to perform
the diagnosis when the eNodeB is not providing services or the services are isolated.
eNodeB fault diagnosis aims to check whether antennas are functioning normally. It involves
the VSWR test, offline intermodulation interference test, and crossed pair test.
After one fault diagnosis operation is performed, the M2000 creates a fault diagnosis task and
displays the diagnosis progress. After the fault diagnosis is complete, you can obtain the fault
diagnosis report.
If you delete a fault diagnosis task, the corresponding diagnosis report is deleted accordingly.
If you restart the M2000 server, all fault diagnosis tasks and reports are deleted.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 In the commissioning task list, select one or multiple commissioning tasks for which you want
to handle alarms. Right-click the tasks, and then choose Open Monitor Window from the
shortcut menu. The alarm monitoring window is displayed.
During the fault diagnosis, a diagnosis task is added to the diagnosis task list.
NOTE
Fault diagnosis may take a long time when there are a large number of detection services executed
by the detection script and there are a large number of NE configuration services.
4. After fault diagnosis is complete, you can right-click a diagnosis task in the diagnosis task
list, and choose Diagnose Report from the shortcut menu to view diagnosis results.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l eNodeB commissioning tasks have been created or started.
Context
For details about operations on commissioning tasks, see Table 4-34.
Opera Description
tion
Delete You can perform this operation on commissioning tasks in any state.
Restart You can perform this operation on commissioning tasks in the Running,
Abnormal, Paused, or Waiting for Confirmation state.
Pause You can perform this operation on commissioning tasks in the Running state.
Resum You can perform this operation on commissioning tasks in the Paused state.
e
Opera Description
tion
Cancel You can perform this operation on commissioning tasks in the Running,
Abnormal, or Paused state.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 On the Deployment List tab page, select one or multiple commissioning tasks and perform
operations as required.
If you Then...
need to...
Restart Right-click the tasks and choose Restart from the shortcut menu. The tasks
return to the Running state.
Pause Right-click the tasks and choose Pause from the shortcut menu. The tasks are
in the Paused state.
Resume Right-click the tasks and choose Resume from the shortcut menu. The tasks
proceed from where they are paused.
Cancel Right-click the tasks and choose Cancel from the shortcut menu. The tasks
return to the Wait for Start state.
Delete 1. Right-click the tasks and choose Delete from the shortcut menu. The
Confirm dialog box is displayed.
2. Click OK. The system starts deleting the tasks.
----End
Prerequisites
l The eNodeB is properly connected to the M2000.
l The status of the eNodeB commissioning task is Waiting for Confirmation.
Procedure
Step 1 On the M2000 client, choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto
Deployment. The eNodeB Auto Deployment tag page is displayed.
Step 2 Right-click one or more eNodeB commissioning tasks to be confirmed from the commissioning
task list, and choose Confirm Completion from the shortcut menu.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l Commissioning tasks are running.
Context
The exported commissioning report records the information about only the selected
commissioning tasks. After you manually delete a commissioning task, the generated
commissioning report does not contain the information about this task.
The deployment report can be stored for a maximum of 30 days. The start date is specified as
the date when the deployment report is generated for the first time.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 In the commissioning task list, select one or multiple commissioning tasks for which you want
to export the report, right-click the tasks, and then choose Export Deployment Report from
the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, asking you whether to export alarm data at the
same time.
If... Then...
You need to export alarm data Click Yes. The Save dialog box is displayed.
You do not need to export alarm data Click No. The Save dialog box is displayed.
You can customize a filename for the commissioning report. If you do not specify the filename,
the M2000 names and saves the file based on the naming convention
Step 4 (Optional) Decompress the generated report file. In the decompressed folder, double-click
index.html to view the commissioning report.
If you choose to export alarm data at the same time in Step 2, the file containing the alarm data
is saved in the alarm sub-folder.
----End
Rectifying Faults and Clearing Alarms Against the eNodeB Health Check Report
This section descries how to rectify faults and clear alarms against the eNodeB health check
report to ensure that the eNodeB runs properly.
Prerequisites
The eNodeB commissioning report is available.
Context
Table 4-35 shows the eNodeB health checklist.
eNodeB software eNodeB software status Check the operating status of the
version eNodeB software.
Configuration data Configuration data consistency Check whether the effective data
applied to modules is consistent
with the configured data in the
database.
Procedure
Step 1 Open the eNodeB commissioning report and view the health check report to determine the
eNodeB operating status.
Step 2 Check the health check report for faults and alarms, and rectify the faults and clear the alarms
by referring to eNodeB Alarm Reference. If all the alarms are cleared but the eNodeB does not
work properly, contact Huawei for technical support.
Step 3 Check for eNodeB alarms.
You can check for eNodeB alarms using one of the following methods:
l on the M2000 client, choose Monitor > Browse Current Alarm. Set the search criteria in
the displayed Filter dialog box to check for eNodeB alarms. For details, see Browse Current
Alarm in the M2000 Online Help.
l On the M2000 client, choose Topology > Main Topology. On the Main Topology tab page,
right-click the eNodeB and choose Query Alarm/Event > Alarm List from the shortcut
menu. Then, double-click an alarm to view details
Step 4 Clear the alarms by taking recommended actions or by referring to eNodeB Alarm Reference.
----End
Prerequisites
l The antenna line device (ALD) is installed correctly.
l The LMT communicates with the eNodeB properly.
l The RET software and data configuration file are available.
l The FTP server functions properly and is connected to the eNodeB correctly.
l Each FTP user has the permission to read a specified folder.
l There is no firewall between the FTP server and the eNodeB.
Context
l Commissioning the RET antenna includes downloading the RET software and data
configuration file, calibrating the RET antenna, setting the RET downtilt, and query RET
overcurrent or undercurrent alarms.
l The RET downtilt must be configured based on the planned network data. Otherwise, the
RET downtilt affects antenna coverage.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the ALD power switch and overcurrent or undercurrent alarm thresholds.
If... Run...
NOTE
The ALD power switch is OFF by default. Before using the RET, set the ALD power switch to ON and
set current alarm thresholds. If the current exceeds the overcurrent or undercurrent alarm threshold, the
ALD power switch automatically turns off. This affects the subsequent RET commissioning.
Step 4 Check whether the RET antenna is working. If the RET antenna is not working, contact Huawei
for technical support.
You can set Operation Mode to SITE(Site) to query all ALD information.
If... Then...
The current RET software Record the device number of the RET antenna, and perform
version is the same as the Step 7 to download the RET data configuration file.
target RET software
version
The current RET software Record the device number of the RET antenna, and perform
version is different from the Step 6 to download the RET software.
target RET software
version
If the RET downtilt fails to be calibrated, check for the cabinet, subrack, and slot configurations and the
mapping between the RET antenna and the sector. If the configurations and mapping are incorrect, run the
MOD RETSUBUNIT command to set them gain, and calibrate the RET downtilt again.
If you run this command without specifying any parameters, RET antennas can be calibrated in batches.
If multiple sectors are configured, repeat Step 9.1 and Step 9.2 to set the downtilts for other
RET antennas.
3. Query the current RET downtilt. If the queried downtilt is the same as the configured
downtilt, the RET downtilt is set successfully.
MML command: DSP RETSUBUNIT
Step 10 Check whether overcurrent or undercurrent alarms are generated on the RET antenna. If
overcurrent or undercurrent alarms are generated, clear them by referring to eNodeB Alarm
Reference.
MML command: DSP RETPORT
----End
Prerequisites
l The TMA is installed correctly.
l The TMA software has been uploaded to the M2000 server.
l The eNodeB is properly connected to the M2000.
l Each FTP user has the permission to read a specified folder.
l The File Transfer Protocol (FTP) port has been enabled on the firewall between the eNodeB
and the M2000 server.
Context
l The FTP server transmits data in plaintext mode by default.
l As a part of the antenna system, the TMA is used to amplify the received weak signals.
l The TMA software is supplied by the antenna line device (ALD) vendor.
l If incorrect TMA software is loaded, the TMA may not work property.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the ALD power switch and overcurrent or undercurrent alarm thresholds.
If... Run...
NOTE
The ALD power switch is OFF by default. Before using the TMA, set the ALD power switch to ON and
set current alarm thresholds. If the current exceeds the overcurrent or undercurrent alarm threshold, the
ALD power switch automatically turns off. This affects the subsequent TMA commissioning.
Step 4 Check whether the TMA starts working and whether the TMA gain is set correctly.
MML command: DSP TMASUBUNIT
l If the maximum gain is the same as the minimum gain, the TMA has a fixed gain. In this
situation, you are not allowed to set any gains.
l If the TMA is not working, contact Huawei for technical support.
You can set Operation Mode to SITE(Site) to query all ALD information.
If... Then...
The current TMA software Perform Step 8 to set the TMA gain as required, and perform
version is the same as the Step 9 to check whether the TMA generates overcurrent or
target TMA software undercurrent alarms.
version
Step 7 If the eNodeB is configured with multiple TMAs, repeat Step 5 to download the software of
other TMAs.
If the eNodeB is configured with multiple TMAs whose gains can be set, repeat this step to set
the gains for other TMAs.
If the TMA generates overcurrent or undercurrent alarms, clear the alarms by referring to eNodeB
Alarm Reference.
----End
Prerequisites
l The M2000 communicates properly with the eNodeB.
l Environment monitoring devices have been configured.
l The dual in-line package (DIP) switches on the environment monitoring device are properly
set. For details, see APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T(Ver.B) Product
Description, APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T(Ver.C) Product Description
and EMUA User Guide.
Context
The remote radio unit (RRU), universal power environment unit (UPEU) in the baseband unit
(BBU), environment monitoring unit type A (EMUA), and power monitoring unit (PMU) in the
APM30H are all equipped with extended alarm ports. Setting environment alarm parameters
includes adding user-defined alarms and binding the user-defined alarms to the eNodeB.
Environment alarms are used to monitor the equipment room where the eNodeB is located. When
setting environment alarm parameters, you need to bind a user-defined alarm to the specific
subrack, slot, and port on the eNodeB.
Procedure
Step 1 Add a user-defined alarm.
1. Choose Monitor > Alarm Setting > NE Alarm Settings.
2. On the User-Defined Alarm tab page, click the Alarm Definition tab, and click Add. The
Add User-Defined Alarm dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-38.
3. Select an NE type on the left, and set the user-defined alarm parameters, including Alarm
Name, Alarm ID, Alarm Severity Level, and Alarm Type.
NOTE
l Each type of user-defined alarm is allocated a unique alarm ID. The alarm ID ranges from 65033
to 65233.
l The same type of alarm must use the same alarm ID for all eNodeBs. For example, if the door
status alarm ID for an eNodeB is 65035, the door status alarm IDs for other eNodeBs must also
be 65035.
4. Click OK. The information about the added user-defined alarm is displayed in the NE
Alarm Setting window.
5. Click Apply to save the user-defined alarm.
A message is displayed, indicating that saving the user-defined alarm is successful or fails.
If saving the user-defined alarm is successful, click OK. The icon disappears. If
saving the user-defined alarm fails, click Details to view the failure cause and rectify the
fault accordingly. Then, add the user-defined alarm again.
Step 2 Bind the user-defined alarm to the eNodeB.
1. Choose Monitor > Alarm Setting > NE Alarm Settings.
2. On the User-Defined Alarm tab page, click the Alarm Binding tab. Then, add the user-
defined alarm binding relationship.
l Single binding
a. Choose Edit > Add. The Add Alarm Binding dialog box is displayed, as shown
in Figure 4-39.
b. Select an NE from the Select NE navigation tree or enter an NE name in the Search
by name text box on the left. Select an alarm from the Select Alarm/Event
navigation tree or enter an alarm name in the Search by name text box in the
middle. Select an alarm or event ID based on the NE type, and set binding
parameters, including port type, cabinet No., subrack No., and slot No. of the port,
alarm voltage, and upper and lower alarm thresholds.
NOTE
If a digital port is used for the monitoring board, you must set alarm voltage to specify a
condition for reporting alarms. If an analog port is used for the monitoring board, you must
set upper and lower alarm thresholds to specify a condition for reporting alarms.
c. Click OK. The information about the added user-defined alarm is displayed in the
NE Alarm Setting window.
l Batch binding
a. Choose Import/Export > Export Template. The Export Alarm Binding
Template dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-40.
Alternatively, choose Import/Export > Export to export the existing records on
the Alarm Binding tab page by NE type.
b. In the displayed Export Alarm Binding Template dialog box, select the NE type,
and specify the save path and name for the exported template.
c. Open the template and edit it based on actual requirements by referring to the
example in the template.
d. Choose Import/Export > Import to import the edited template to the M2000.
Then, click OK.
The user-defined alarm binding relationship in the template is displayed on the
Alarm Binding tab page. Each record is prefixed with the icon.
3. Select an alarm binding relationship record and click Apply to apply it to the NE.
A message is displayed, indicating that applying the alarm binding relationship is successful
or fails. If applying the alarm binding relationship is successful, click OK. The icon
disappears. If applying the alarm binding relationship fails, click Details to view the failure
cause and rectify the fault accordingly. Then, apply the alarm binding relationship again.
----End
Context
You can manually trigger several external environment alarms to verify the parameter settings.
If external environment alarms can be reported, the parameter settings are correct.
Procedure
Step 1 Manually trigger several external environment alarms. For details, see the appendix Triggering
Monitoring Device Alarms.
Step 2 Check for the external environment alarms on the M2000. For details, see Rectifying Faults
and Clearing Alarms Against the eNodeB Health Check Report. If external environment
alarms can be reported, the parameter settings are correct. If no external environment alarm is
reported, set the parameters again or contact Huawei for technical support.
----End
Example
Assuming that a water sensor is installed for the fan monitoring unit (FMU), to check whether
the parameter settings for water damage alarms are correct, perform the following operations:
1. Run the MOD FMU command with WS_DISABLE(Water-Immersed Sensor
Disabled) in Special Boolean Alarm Flag cleared.
2. Immerse the water sensor or its probe in water for more than 10s, and check whether water
damage alarms are reported. If water damage alarms are reported, the parameter settings
are correct.
Prerequisites
l The RRU or RFU is connected properly.
l The local maintenance terminal (LMT) or M2000 communicates properly with the eNodeB.
l You have logged in to the M2000 as administrator.
Context
The maximum output power of the RRU or RFU is specified by the local operator.
If an eNodeB is configured with multiple RRUs or RFUs, you must use MML commands to
manually reset RRUs or RFUs one by one. If RRUs or RFUs are cascaded, set the maximum
output power for the lowest-level RRU or RFU and then for other RRUs or RFUs to reduce the
impact on upper-level RRUs.
The maximum output power for the RRU or RFU needs to be set only if it is less than the
maximum output power that the RRU or RFU can physically achieve.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the DSP RRU command to query the cabinet No., subrack No., slot No., and transmit
channel No. of the RRU or RFU.
Step 2 Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to query the maximum output power supported by the
RRU or RFU based on the information queried in Step 1.
Step 3 Run the LOC RRUTC command to set the maximum output power for the RRU or RFU.
Step 4 Run the RST BRD command to reset the RRU or RFU.
Step 5 Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to check whether the setting of the maximum output
power for the RRU or RFU takes effect.
If... Then...
The maximum transmit Set the maximum output power within the power specifications
power fails to be set supported by the RRU or RFU. If the maximum output power
still fails to be set, contact Huawei for technical support.
NOTE
Before returning a used but not faulty RRU or RFU to the Spare Parts Center, run the LOC RRUTC
command to set the maximum output power (TXMAXPWR) to 0 and reset the RRU or RFU for the setting
to take effect.
----End
Prerequisites
l The eNodeB and the MME/S-GW are properly connected.
l The negotiation data of the eNodeB to be commissioned is added to the MME/S-GW.
l The testing UE is functional and is registered in the HSS.
l The FTP server for testing the basic services is available.
l The WWW server for testing the basic services is available.
Procedure
l Test the web page browsing service.
Testing Method Access the WWW server and browse the web pages through a UE.
Perform the test 20 times.
Testing Method Access the FTP server and upload files through a UE. Perform the
test 10 times.
Testing Method Access the FTP server and download files through a UE. Perform the
test 10 times.
Expectation Connection success rate > 95%. The calls are uninterrupted and none
of the calls get dropped till they are released. The voice is clear with
no loud noise.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 Query the eNodeB state.
1. On the M2000 tab page, choose Topology > Main Topology. The Main Topology tab
page is displayed.
2. On the Main Topology tab page, select the target network element (NE) and right-click
Query Maintenance Mode. Then, the Query Maintenance Mode dialog box is displayed.
3. Check whether Current NE Maintenance Mode is set to NORMAL. If it is, the
configuration is complete. If it is not, go to Step 2.
Step 2 Set the eNodeB state.
1. On the M2000 tab page, choose Maintenance > Maintenance Mode. The Maintenance
Mode tab page is displayed.
2. Click Set NE Mode at the upper left corner of the Maintenance Mode tab page. The
Set Maintenance Mode dialog box is displayed.
3. Select the target NE and specify the time.
4. Set NE Mode to NORMAL. The eNodeB is changed to the normal state.
5. Click OK. The setting of the maintenance mode is complete.
6. Ensure that the current the eNodeB state is NORMAL by executing Step 1 again.
NOTE
The alarms that are not cleared during commissioning will be reported on the eNodeB in the normal state.
----End
Main Window
Figure 4-41 shows the main window for eNodeB commissioning. Table 4-36 describes the
window.
2 Commissioni Displays all the commissioning tasks and their progress. You can
ng task list right-click a task, and then choose the corresponding menu item
from the shortcut menu to perform an operation.
NOTE
l By default, the GUI displays only commissioning tasks created by a
specific user. To view commissioning tasks created by other users,
3 Shortcut You can right-click a task, and then choose the corresponding
menu menu item from the shortcut menu to perform an operation.
1 Alarm object After selecting an object type, you can view all alarms of this
tree object type in the alarm list in the right pane.
2 Alarm list After an object type is selected, all alarms of this object type are
displayed in the alarm list.
3 Tab named after Displays tabs named after data file types that are required for
a data file type commissioning.
4 Operation result Displays the details about the operations on uploading the type
of data file.
NOTE
Figure 4-44 Procedure for local eNodeB commissioning using a USB flash drive in
differentiated encryption mode
NOTE
You can insert the USB flash drive before or after the eNodeB is powered on. The figure takes inserting
the USB flash drive after the eNodeB is powered on as an example.
1 Local and Prepare for the local eNodeB commissioning, which Mandat
remote involves obtaining eNodeB information and ory
cooperative commissioning tools, configuring security equipment, and
operations obtaining related files and digital certificates. For details,
see 4.5.2 Preparations.
2 Local Download and activate the eNodeB software and data Mandat
operations configuration files using a USB flash drive. For details, see ory
4.5.3 Downloading and Activating the Software, Data
Configuration File, and License File Using a USB Flash
Drive.
5 Start the eNodeB commissioning task. For details, see 4.5.6 Mandat
Starting an eNodeB Commissioning Task. ory
12 Remote Set the maximum transmit power of RRUs or RFUs. RRU Optiona
operations and RFU are short for remote radio unit and radio frequency l
on the unit, respectively. For details, see 4.5.13 Setting the
M2000 Maximum Output Power for RRUs or RFUs.
13 Local and Verify the basic services of the eNodeB. For details, see Optiona
remote 4.5.14 Testing the Basic Services of the eNodeB. l
cooperative
operations
NOTE
After an eNodeB is deployed, local engineers can determine whether the eNodeB is working properly by
observing the indicators on eNodeB boards. For details about the indicator descriptions and operations for
rectifying possible faults, see 5.3 Checking the Status of Indicators.
4.5.2 Preparations
To commission an eNodeB locally using a Universal Serial Bus (USB) flash drive in
differentiated encryption mode, you need to collect related eNodeB information, obtain
commissioning tools and digital certificates, and save the required files to the USB flash drive.
Prerequisites
l In PKI-based authentication mode, the CA server is deployed so that the eNodeB can
download the operator's certificate from the CA server based on Certificate Management
Protocol version 2 (CMPv2).
l The eNodeB software package and data configuration files are available.
NOTE
In PKI-based authentication mode, APPCERT must be set to OPKIDevCert.cer, and
TRUSTCERT must be set to the name of the operator's trust certificate in data configuration files.
l The commissioning license is ready if you need to load and activate the license file using
the USB flash drive.
l The USB flash drive and commissioning files have been scanned by using the antivirus
software and no virus was detected. The commissioning files include the software package,
data configuration file, and license file.
Context
The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption.
Procedure
Step 1 Obtain the tools required for the local commissioning using the USB flash drive, as described
in Table 4-41.
Table 4-41 Tools required for the local commissioning using the USB flash drive
Tool Description
USB flash drive l The USB flash drive is equipped with an indicator that indicates
the data transmission status.
l Capacity ≥ 256 MB
l Model: The USB flash drive must be provided by Huawei.
l The USB flash drive must not provide any additional functions,
such as encryption, virus scanning, and bootstrapping. In
addition, it cannot be an MP3 player, MP4 player, or smart
phone.
l The USB flash drive used for commissioning cannot be used for
other purposes. In addition, irrelevant files, especially those with
Chinese file names, cannot be saved in the USB flash drive.
Step 2 Obtain the eNodeB software and files for automatic eNodeB deployment.
NOTE
l The eNodeB software package is ready, and can be downloaded from http://support.huawei.com.
The default configuration file (Precfg.ini) is provided in the software package.
l The name of the data configuration file must be CFGDATA.XML (case-sensitive). Perform
configurations according to eNodeB Initial Configuration Guide, change the name of the data
configuration file from M2000.XML to CFGDATA.XML, and save the file to a local computer.
Step 3 Save the files required for local commissioning using a USB flash drive in the paths (case-
sensitive) on the USB flash drive, as listed in Table 4-42. The saving paths cannot be changed
because they are defined by the system.
NOTE
l If only one data configuration file is saved to the USB flash drive, save it to usb:\eNodeB
\CFGDATA.XML. If several data configuration files are saved to the USB flash drive, create several
new ESN folders and save the data configuration files to the corresponding ESN folders. The save path
is usb:\eNodeB\ESN\CFGDATA.XML. The eNodeB preferentially reads the data configuration file
in the ESN folder.
l If you want to load BootROM version during the eNodeB deployment, save the BootROM package
(FIRMWARE.CSP) in the directory where the eNodeB software package (SOFTWARE.CSP) is saved.
l If you want to load a hot or cold patch during the eNodeB deployment, save the patch package
(SWCPATCH.CSP or SWHPATCH.CSP) in the directory where the eNodeB software package
(SOFTWARE.CSP) is saved.
l When you save the software package, save the software version file, that is, the .CSP file to usb:\eNodeB
\Software\.
l The default configuration file is used to download the files for the boards not configured yet. For details
about how to configure the default configuration file, see 5.4 Configuring the Default Configuration
File.
l If only one default configuration file is saved to the USB flash drive, save it to usb:\eNodeB
\Precfg.ini. If several default configuration files are saved to the USB flash drive, create several new
ESN folders and save the data configuration files to the corresponding ESN folders. The save path is
usb:\eNodeB\ESN\Precfg.ini. The eNodeB preferentially reads the default configuration file in the
ESN folder.
l Only one license file is allowed in the folder that contains the license file, and the value of ESN must
be ANY.
Step 4 (Optional) Encrypt files in the USB flash drive. For details, see 5.5 Encrypting Files in the
USB Flash Drive.
Step 5 Perform integrity protection for files in the USB flash drive. For details, see 5.5 Encrypting
Files in the USB Flash Drive.
----End
eNodeB before issuing operator's certificates to the eNodeB. The eNodeB uses the operator's
root certificate to authenticate the CA server before applying for an operator's device certificate.
These digital certificates are required only if the PKI-based authentication is used. If the PSK-
based authentication is used, skip this step. PKI is short for public key infrastructure, and PSK
is short for Preshared Key.
Context
Before eNodeB delivery, the Huawei root certificate and Huawei device certificate are
preconfigured in the main control board of the eNodeB by default. The two certificates are
permanently valid.
l As a default trusted CA certificate, the Huawei root certificate has been loaded to the
certificate storage area of an eNodeB before delivery. This certificate must be loaded to
the CA server before eNodeB commissioning. In this way, the CA server can authenticate
the eNodeB when the eNodeB applies for an operator's device certificate based on
Certificate Management Protocol version 2 (CMPv2).
l The Huawei device certificate is the initial device certificate of an eNodeB. This certificate
identifies the eNodeB when the eNodeB applies for an operator's device certificate based
on CMPv2.
Figure 4-45 shows the procedure for obtaining digital certificates.
Procedure
Step 1 Obtain the operator's root certificate.
Step 2 Load the Huawei root certificate to the CA server.
----End
is configured according to the user guide of a corresponding equipment type. The following
configurations and operations are based on Huawei S6500 series Ethernet switches. If the
eNodeB performs IEEE 802.1X-based access control, operations on authentication devices are
based on Huawei Authentication, Authorization and Accounting (AAA) server.
Prerequisites
l Quidway S6500 Series Ethernet Switches Operation Manual is available. You can obtain
the document from http://support.huawei.com.
l HUAWEI AAA Commissioning Guide is available. You can obtain the document from
http://support.huawei.com.
l If IEEE 802.1X-based access control is adopted, the operator must use the authentication
access equipment that supports IEEE 802.1X-based access control authentication and the
corresponding AAA server that supports Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP).
Context
When the SeGW is deployed, you are required to configure data for the SeGW. When IEEE
802.1X-based access control authentication is adopted, you must configure the authentication
access equipment and authentication server. Generally, the authentication server refers to the
AAA server.
Item Description
IP address Both the public SeGW and the serving SeGW should be configured with
the IP address of the interface for the untrusted area on the eNodeB side and
IP address of the interface for the trusted area on the evolved packet core
(EPC) side.
Route l Public SeGW: The routes to the M2000, eNodeB, and temporary
operation and maintenance (O&M) IP address must be configured.
l Serving SeGW: The routes to the M2000, S-GW, mobility management
entity (MME), eNodeB port IP address, S1 signaling and service IP
addresses, and O&M IP address must be configured.
IKE local The public SeGW and serving SeGW must be configured.
name
ike proposal l The authentication method parameter can be set to the digital
certificate mode or pre-shared key mode based on the actual networking.
l The authentication algorithm parameter can be set to SHA_1 or
MD5. Generally, this parameter is set to SHA_1.
l The encryption algorithm parameter can be set to AES or DES.
Generally, this parameter is set to AES.
l The DH group parameter can be set to DH group2.
Item Description
ike peer l Public SeGW: The key or certificate domain must be configured based
on the authentication mode specified by ike proposal. local id type is
set to name, remote name is set to p-segw, ike proposal can be set to
V1 or V2 based on the preceding setting, and ip pool must be configured
to allocate a temporary O&M IP address for the eNodeB.
l Serving SeGW: The key or certificate domain must be configured based
on the authentication mode specified by the ike proposal parameter.
local id type is set to name, remote name is set to s-segw, ike
proposal can be set to V1 or V2 based on the preceding setting.
ipsec proposal encapsulation mode can be set to tunnel or transport. Generally, tunnel
is set as the encapsulation mode. transform can be set to esp or AH.
Generally, esp is set as the transform mode. esp authentication is set to
SHA_1 and esp encryption is set to AES.
ipsec policy- The public SeGW and serving security are set to template. ACL must be
template set based on the preceding settings. If the public SeGW and serving SeGW
are the same, ACL must be set to different values. psf group must be set to
DH group2. ike peer must be set to different values for the public SeGW
and serving SeGW. ipsecproposal must be set based on the preceding
setting.
ipsec binding policy can be bound to the planned port according to the configurations of
to port ipsec policy.
If the PKI-based authentication is used, IEEE 802.1X-based access control authentication can
be performed:
l When the authentication access equipment is used, the authentication mode and the
authentication method must be set to Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service
(RADIUS) and EAP respectively, because certificate authentication is adopted currently.
l When the AAA server is used, the CA certificates of terminal users must be uploaded, and
the file names of the user certificate and private key must be configured for the AAA server.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the configuration of the SeGW by referring to Table 4-43.
The authentication access equipment may vary according to different operators. Huawei
Quidway S6500 series Ethernet switches are taken as an example.
Run sys to enter the system command state. Run dot1x to enable the global IEEE 802.1X-
based access control feature.
2. Enable the IEEE 802.1X feature on the port.
For example, to enable the IEEE 802.1X feature for port 3, run the interface
GigabitEthernet 1/0/3 command to enter the port view, and run the dot1x command to
enable IEEE 802.1X feature.
3. Run dot1x authentication-method { chap | pap | eap } to set the authentication method
to EAP.
4. Configure the VLAN and add the route relationship between the transmission network and
AAA server.
For example, run the vlan 4 command to add a VLAN whose ID is 4. Run the interface
vlan 4 command to enter the VLAN view, and run the ip add 10.147.209.38
255.255.255.0 command to add an IP address and subnet mask for the VLAN. Run the
ip route-static 10.166.27.48 24 10.147.209.1 command to add the switch-to-AAA server
route relationship.
5. Set the parameters of AAA server on the switch.
Run the radius scheme accounting command to create a RADIUS solution named
radius1, and enter the RADIUS view. Then, run the primary authentication 10.166.27.48
1812 command to set the port No. to 1812 and the IP address to 10.166.27.48 for the primary
authentication server. Then, run key authentication itellin to set the authentication key to
itellin.
For details, see Quidway S6500 Series Ethernet Switches Operation Manual.
The AAA server may vary according to different operators. The descriptions here take the
Huawei AAA server as an example. For details, see HUAWEI AAA Commissioning Guide.
----End
Prerequisites
l A USB flash drive is ready. The required files are saved in the USB flash drive.
l The hardware such as remote radio units (RRUs) and LTE baseband processing units
(LBBPs) have been properly connected.
CAUTION
When you save the required files into the USB flash drive, ensure that the locking switch on the
USB flash drive is disabled. In other words, the USB flash drive must be writable.
Context
Before downloading files from a USB flash drive, the eNodeB verifies the names and formats
of the files.
Before downloading the software and data configuration file, the eNodeB automatically checks
the working mode of the RRU. Then, the eNodeB downloads and activates the corresponding
software and data configuration file based on the working mode of the RRU.
You must pay attention to the following points when you download and activate the software,
data configuration file, and license file using the USB flash drive:
l If the software and data configuration file in the USB flash drive are already activated, they
cannot be reactivated for the same eNodeB because of the cyclic redundancy check (CRC)
function. The CRC function can prevent the software and data configuration file from being
reactivated when the USB flash drive is always inserted into the eNodeB. The CRC function
can also prevent the eNodeB from being reset again after eNodeB deployment using the
USB flash drive.
l If the USB flash drive contains only the eNodeB software and data configuration file, the
eNodeB downloads and activates the eNodeB software, and then downloads and activates
the data configuration file.
l If the eNodeB software or data configuration file is missing in the USB flash drive, the
eNodeB performs the following steps:
– If the software is missing, the eNodeB downloads and activates the data configuration
file and license file except the software.
– If the data configuration file is missing, the eNodeB upgrades to the minimum
configuration of the target version and downloads and activates the license file except
the data configuration file.
– If the license file is missing, the eNodeB downloads and activates the software and data
configuration file except the license file.
l If the eNodeB software upgrade fails, the eNodeB will roll back to the source version.
l Before downloading and activating the data configuration file, the eNodeB does not check
the compatibility between the data configuration file and the eNodeB software version. The
eNodeB performs the following activities:
– If the target software version is not the same as the active software version, the eNodeB
checks the mapping between the data configuration file and the software after the
software is upgraded and the eNodeB is reset. If the software is incompatible with the
data configuration file or the download and activation of the data configuration file fail,
the eNodeB upgrades to the minimum configuration of the target version.
– If the target software version is the same as the active software version, the eNodeB
checks the mapping between the data configuration file and the software without
upgrading the software. If the software is incompatible with the data configuration file
or the download and activation of the data configuration file fail, the eNodeB uses the
data configuration file of the source version.
l The eNodeB does not download or activate the eNodeB software, data configuration file,
or license file from the USB flash drive in any of the following cases:
– The eNodeB software and data configuration file or their saving paths do not exist in
the USB flash drive.
– The target software version is the same as the active software version. In this case, the
eNodeB software cannot be downloaded or activated, but the data configuration file and
license file can be downloaded and activated.
– The data configuration file is the same as the active data configuration. In this case, the
data configuration file cannot be downloaded or activated, but the software and license
file can be downloaded and activated.
– The license file cannot be downloaded, but the software and data configuration file can
be downloaded and activated in any of the following cases:
– The license file to be downloaded is not the commissioning license.
– The license file to be downloaded is the commissioning license, but the value of
ESN is not ANY.
– The configurations or the names of the license file to be downloaded and the active
license file are the same.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the eNodeB is powered on. If it is not powered on, power on the eNodeB. If it
is already powered on, go to Step 2.
NOTE
Ensure that the RRU is powered on and the common public radio interface (CPRI) connections are correct
before you power on the eNodeB. Check for faults by monitoring the CPRI indicator status on the LBBP
after the eNodeB is powered on. For details, see 5.3 Checking the Status of Indicators.
Step 2 When the eNodeB operates properly, insert the USB flash drive into the USB port on the
BBU3900 main control board. If an LMPT is used, the USB port is shown in Figure 4-46; if an
UMPT is used, the USB port is shown in Figure 4-47.
Step 3 Wait for the eNodeB to automatically upgrade the software and data configuration file.
If the download or activation fails, commission the eNodeB by updating the software and data
configuration file in the USB flash drive or using a new USB flash drive.
If the download or activation still fails, perform the local eNodeB commissioning on the LMT.
When the software and data configuration file are being upgraded, the normal status of the
indicators on the USB flash drive and main control board is shown in Table 4-44. If the indicators
are abnormal, see 5.3 Checking the Status of Indicators.
Automatically detecting Steady on Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
the USB flash drive
Downloading the software Blinking Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for
and data configuration file 0.125s)
from the USB flash drive
Activating the eNodeB Steady on Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for
software and data 0.125s)
configuration file
Normal eNodeB operation Steady on Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
WARNING
Do not remove the USB flash drive or reset the eNodeB when downloading or activating the
eNodeB software and data configuration file using the USB flash drive. After the download is
complete, the eNodeB automatically activates the software and data configuration file. Then,
the eNodeB is reset.
Step 4 When the download and activation are successful, rectify faults by referring to Checking the
Status of Indicators.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
CAUTION
The eNodeB software package contains the LMT software. Before downloading the eNodeB
software package, pay attention to the following points:
l When the LMPT is used: the speed of writing to the flash memory is limited, the LMPT
does not support download of the LMT complete package through the USB flash drive. To
reduce the eNodeB deployment duration, some of the files of the LMT software are
automatically downloaded from the M2000 to the eNodeB four hours after the eNodeB
deployment. If you need to use the LMT complete package immediately after the eNodeB
deployment, run the SPL SOFTWARE command on the M2000 after the eNodeB is
connected to the M2000. Set Delay Download File Supply Flag to YES(Supply File that
Support Delay). The remaining files of LMT software are downloaded to the eNodeB. If
you want the LMPT to support download of the LMT complete package through the USB
flash drive, when preparing the files in the USB flash drive, configure the value of
WEBLMT from the default configuration files as YES (case-insensitive).
l When the UMPT is used: the speed of writing to the flash memory increases. The UMPT
supports download of the LMT complete package through the USB flash drive. Therefore,
an LMT package is not required after software activation.
Prerequisites
You have logged in to the M2000 client.
Context
You need to upload data files in the following scenarios:
Configurati /export/home/sysm/ftproot/adn/AutoDeploymentData/eNodeB/CfgData/
on data file
Deploymen /export/home/sysm/ftproot/adn/AutoDeploymentData/eNodeB/ADList/
t list
RET /export/home/sysm/ftproot/OutSourcing/RETFile/
antenna
software
version and
configurati
on data file
RET /export/home/sysm/ftproot/adn/AutoDeploymentData/eNodeB/
antenna RETTemplate/
template
Commissio /export/home/sysm/ftproot/adn/AutoDeploymentData/eNodeB/
ning license CommissionLicense/
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 Click Prepare File&Data. The window for preparing files and data is displayed. Upload data
files as required.
If you Then...
need to...
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
Operation, Status, Source File Path, Destination File Path, and
Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the software versions are uploaded.
l Upload in batches
One or multiple software versions corresponding to one or multiple NE types
are uploaded at a time.
1. On the Software & Cold Patch tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS
Client to OSS Server. The NE File Transfer dialog box is displayed.
2. Click in the lower left corner of the dialog box, select an NE type
from the NE Type drop-down list, and select Software from the File
Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Repeat the preceding two steps to select one or multiple files
corresponding to multiple NE types. The selected files are displayed in
the Source Path area.
5. In the Source Path area, select one or multiple files and click Add. The
files to be uploaded are displayed in the lower part of the dialog box.
6. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
If you Then...
need to...
If you Then...
need to...
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
Operation, Status, Source File Path, Destination File Path, and
Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the cold patches are uploaded.
l Upload in batches
One or multiple cold patches corresponding to one or multiple NE types are
uploaded at a time.
1. On the Software & Cold Patch tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS
Client to OSS Server. The NE File Transfer dialog box is displayed.
2. Click in the lower left corner of the dialog box, select an NE type
from the NE Type drop-down list, and select Software from the File
Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Repeat the preceding two steps to select one or multiple files
corresponding to multiple NE types. The selected files are displayed in
the Source Path area.
5. In the Source Path area, select one or multiple files and click Add. The
files to be uploaded are displayed in the lower part of the dialog box.
6. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
If you Then...
need to...
If you Then...
need to...
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
Operation, Status, Source File Path, Destination File Path, and
Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the hot patches are uploaded.
l Upload in batches
One or multiple hot patches corresponding to one or multiple NE types are
uploaded at a time.
1. On the Hot Patch tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS Client to OSS
Server. The NE File Transfer dialog box is displayed.
2. Click in the lower left corner of the dialog box, select an NE type
from the NE Type drop-down list, and select Software from the File
Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Repeat the preceding two steps to select one or multiple files
corresponding to multiple NE types. The selected files are displayed in
the Source Path area.
5. In the Source Path area, select one or multiple files and click Add. The
files to be uploaded are displayed in the lower part of the dialog box.
6. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
If you Then...
need to...
Upload 1. On the NE Configuration Data tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS
configurati Client to OSS Server. The Upload NE Configuration Data dialog box is
on data displayed.
files 2. Select an NE type from the NE Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting files is
displayed. Select the folder where the configuration data file that you want
to upload is stored, click Select. The Upload NE Configuration Data dialog
box is displayed.
CAUTION
The path for saving the eNodeB configuration data file to be uploaded must be ..
\eNodeBName\M2000.XML on the local PC. An eNodeBName folder contains only
one XML file. To upload eNodeB configuration data files, you must select the
eNodeBName folder where the files are stored. You can select multiple
eNodeBName folders at a time.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the Destination
Path area. You can only view the path.
Upload 1. On the Deployment List tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS Client to
deploymen OSS Server. The Upload Deployment List dialog box is displayed.
t lists 2. Select an NE type from the NE Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting files is
displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click Open to return to
the Upload Deployment List dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the Upload Deployment List dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed information
about the operations at the bottom of the window: Operation, Status, Source
File Path, Destination File Path, and Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the deployment lists are uploaded.
NOTE
If the CME is not deployed, you can click Export Template to export an empty
deployment template, fill out the template based on the planned data, and upload the
template. The default names of the exported empty deployment list templates are the
same. Therefore, you are advised to change the template names after filling out these
templates.
If you Then...
need to...
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
Operation, Status, Source File Path, Destination File Path, and
Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the RET antenna software versions and
configuration data files are uploaded.
l Upload in batches
One or multiple RET antenna software versions and configuration data files
corresponding to one or multiple NE types are uploaded at a time.
1. On the RET tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS Client to OSS
Server. The NE File Transfer dialog box is displayed.
2. Click in the lower left corner of the dialog box, select an NE type
from the NE Type drop-down list, and select Software from the File
Type drop-down list.
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting
files is displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click OK to
return to the NE File Transfer dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Repeat the preceding two steps to select one or multiple files
corresponding to multiple NE types. The selected files are displayed in
the Source Path area.
5. In the Source Path area, select one or multiple files and click Add. The
files to be uploaded are displayed in the lower part of the dialog box.
6. Click OK to close the NE File Transfer dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
If you Then...
need to...
on data The data file preparation window displays the following detailed
files information about the operations at the bottom of the window:
Operation, Status, Source File Path, Destination File Path, and
Progress.
7. When Progress is 100%, the RET antenna software versions and
configuration data files are uploaded.
Upload 1. On the RET Template tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS Client to
RET OSS Server. The Upload RET Template dialog box is displayed.
antenna 2. Select an NE type from the NE Type drop-down list.
templates
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting files is
displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click Open to return to
the Upload RET Template dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the Upload RET Template dialog box. The system starts
uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed information
about the operations at the bottom of the window: Operation, Status, Source
File Path, Destination File Path, and Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the RET antenna templates are uploaded.
NOTE
If the CME is not deployed, you can click Export Template to export an empty RET
antenna template, fill out the template based on the planned data, and upload the
template.
Upload 1. On the Commission License tab page, choose Transfer > From OSS Client
commissio to OSS Server. The Upload Commission License dialog box is displayed.
ning 2. Select an NE type from the NE Type drop-down list.
licenses
3. In the Source Path area, click . The dialog box for selecting files is
displayed. Select files that you want to upload and click Open to return to
the Upload Commission License dialog box.
The save path for the files to be uploaded to the server is displayed in the
Destination Path area. You can only view the path.
4. Click OK to close the Upload Commission License dialog box. The system
starts uploading the data files.
The data file preparation window displays the following detailed information
about the operations at the bottom of the window: Operation, Status, Source
File Path, Destination File Path, and Progress.
5. When Progress is 100%, the commissioning licenses are uploaded.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l eNodeB commissioning preparations are complete.
l If the M2000 is deployed in SLS mode, radio network planning engineers need to plan the
area to which the eNodeB belongs.
l If the eNodeB and the M2000 server are located on different network segments, you need
to configure the router nearest to the eNodeB as the DHCP relay.
– In an insecure scenario, you need to set the DHCP relay IP address on the router to the
DHCP server IP address of the M2000. In a secure scenario, you need to set the DHCP
relay IP address on the router to the common DHCP server IP address and on the security
gateway, you need to set the IP address of the DHCP server to the DHCP server IP
address of the M2000.
– In situations where the M2000 is deployed in SLS mode, the preceding DHCP server
IP address of the M2000 refers to the host IP address.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Import a Select From Server and choose a deployment list from the drop-
deployment list down list box.
from the server
Import a
Select From Client and click to select a deployment list.
deployment list
from the client
3. (Optional) Select the area to which an eNodeB belongs in the Sub-area area. This step is
mandatory when theM2000 is deployed in SLS mode.
NEs belong to different areas when they are managed by different M2000 servers. If the
M2000 is deployed in SLS mode, NEs are managed by different servers. On the CME client,
these NEs belong to different areas. Select the active or slave M2000 server that the NE
belongs to based on the planned data. Configure the data as follows:
l If the NE was created on the active M2000 server, set the PEERIP parameter for the
OMCH to the IP address of the active M2000 server.
l If the NE was created on the slave M2000 server, set the PEERIP parameter for the
OMCH to the IP address of the slave M2000 server.
l Set the Destination IP parameter for the IP router from the NE to the M2000 server to
an IP address on the the network segment where the M2000 server is located.
NOTE
Onsite deployment engineers need to perform operations based on the areas that have been planned
for eNodeBs by radio network planning engineers.
l If eNodeBs belong to one area, import one deployment list to create eNodeBs in batches.
l If eNodeBs belong to different areas, import multiple deployment lists by area to create eNodeBs.
4. In NE Connection Mode, set a mode for connecting the M2000 and NEs.
After the import is complete, the M2000 checks for mandatory parameters with empty values
and invalid base station configuration data. In addition, the information indicating whether the
import succeeded or failed is displayed on the Operation Information tab page.
l If the import is successful, the M2000 automatically creates a commissioning task for each
eNodeB. The imported eNodeB deployment lists are displayed on the Deployment List tab
page.
l If the import fails, the causes of the failure are displayed on the Operation Information tab
page.
Step 4 (Optional) Modify data in the imported deployment lists as required. This step is mandatory
when you need to modify the data in the imported deployment lists.
NOTE
You can check whether the parameters in eNodeB deployment lists can be modified by referring to
Parameters for the eNodeB Deployment List.
1. Select a commissioning task from the commissioning task list, and double-click the cells
containing parameter values to change the values.
You can change ESNs by double-clicking the cells containing ESNs. Alternatively, you
can perform the following operations to change the ESNs:
a. Click in the ESN value cell. The Bind ESN dialog box is displayed.
b. Select an ESN that is not bound, and click OK to return to the Deployment
Parameter dialog box.
NOTE
You can change the ESNs before OM links are established between base stations and the
M2000.
2. The changed parameter values are displayed in the commissioning task window and
highlighted in red.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l eNodeB commissioning tasks have been started.
Context
A maximum of 500 commissioning tasks can be started at a time. In which, a maximum of 200
commissioning tasks can be being executed and the rest are waiting to be executed in the queue.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 On the Deployment List tab page, right-click one or multiple commissioning tasks and choose
Start from the shortcut menu. The Task Settings dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Select steps in the Select column based on the actual plan.
NOTE
l : Indicates the step that is performed by default. You can choose whether to perform it.
l : Indicates the step that is not performed by default. You can choose whether to perform it.
For details about commissioning procedures and steps, see Table 4-46.
Wait for manual After the OM channel is set up, the status of the
operation commissioning task changes to Waiting for
manual operation. Manually confirm the
completion and proceed with the commissioning
after the commissioning environment of the
network is ready.
Monitor cell Check whether any active cells exist under the
service status eNodeB.
You can monitor alarms of the eNodeB on the
M2000 during software commissioning to locate
and handle exceptions in time.
7 Perform Perform NHC You can perform health check to learn the
NHC eNodeB operating status.
NOTE
The system checks whether all configured RF modules are usable before starting project quality check.
l If all configured RF modules are usable, the system issues project quality check commands to proceed
with subsequent operations.
l If only some configured RF modules are usable, the system sets a timer (2.5 minutes in length and a
maximum of 5 times) to wait until all RF modules are usable. After all RF modules are usable, the
system issues project quality check commands to proceed with subsequent operations. If some RF
modules are still unusable after the timer expires, the system ends the project quality check task.
Step 4 Click OK. The M2000 automatically checks whether the data files required for procedures are
available.
If... Then...
Not all the 1. The Data Preparation Check dialog box is displayed, showing check
required data results about the required data files.
files are available l : Indicates that all the required data files are available.
l : Indicates that not all the required data files are available.
2. Click OK. The Data Preparation Check dialog box is closed.
3. Obtain relevant data files based on the check results.
For detailed operations, see Uploading Data Files.
4. After the required data files are uploaded, start the commissioning
tasks again.
All the required The M2000 starts commissioning. The selected commissioning tasks enter
data files are the Running state.
available NOTE
If all the required data files are available, the Data Preparation Check dialog box
is not displayed.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l eNodeB commissioning tasks have been started.
Context
l By default, the GUI displays only commissioning tasks created by a specific user. To view
commissioning tasks created by other users, click on the toolbar.
l When the system performs NE upgrades during the automatic configuration phase of a
commissioning task, if you restart or delete the commissioning task, the system does not
restart NE upgrades but proceeds until the related NE upgrade task is complete. When the
system displays The NE is performing the following task: ******. Please try later. in
Description for a commissioning task, the NE upgrade task is running. If you want to
perform automatic deployment again, wait until the NE upgrade task is complete. You can
choose Software > NE Upgrade Task Management > NE Upgrade Task to query the
NE upgrade task.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 View the status and progress of commissioning tasks in the commissioning task list.
TIP
You can quickly view the status of commissioning tasks by using either of the following methods:
l In the commissioning task list, the status of the tasks is displayed in Status, the current procedures are
displayed in Current Phase, and details about each procedure are displayed in Description.
l In the commissioning task list, select one or multiple commissioning tasks whose status you want to
view, and then click . The right pane displays execution status of
steps for commissioning procedures.
The displayed information includes the execution status, description, start time and end time of each
commissioning substep.
Step 3 (Optional) Click . The Statistics dialog box is displayed, showing the number of
commissioning tasks in each status. Click OK to close the dialog box.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l Software commissioning monitoring has already started, and the completion of the
commissioning has not yet been confirmed.
Context
The alarms are categorized into E1/T1 port alarms, transmission path alarms, antenna alarms,
software and configuration alarms, board alarms, cell alarms, external alarms, and other alarms
by object type. Other alarms refer to the alarms that cannot be categorized on the basis of specific
objects.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 In the commissioning task list, select one or multiple commissioning tasks for which you want
to handle alarms. Right-click the tasks, and then choose Open Monitor Window from the
shortcut menu. The alarm monitoring window is displayed.
In the displayed window, you can view alarms on eNodeBs by monitored object. For details
about the alarm monitoring window, see Interface Description: eNodeB Commissioning
Window.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l Commissioning tasks are at the monitoring stage, and the completion of the commissioning
tasks has not yet been confirmed.
Context
CAUTION
eNodeB services are interrupted upon antenna fault diagnosis. Therefore, you need to perform
the diagnosis when the eNodeB is not providing services or the services are isolated.
eNodeB fault diagnosis aims to check whether antennas are functioning normally. It involves
the VSWR test, offline intermodulation interference test, and crossed pair test.
After one fault diagnosis operation is performed, the M2000 creates a fault diagnosis task and
displays the diagnosis progress. After the fault diagnosis is complete, you can obtain the fault
diagnosis report.
If you delete a fault diagnosis task, the corresponding diagnosis report is deleted accordingly.
If you restart the M2000 server, all fault diagnosis tasks and reports are deleted.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 In the commissioning task list, select one or multiple commissioning tasks for which you want
to handle alarms. Right-click the tasks, and then choose Open Monitor Window from the
shortcut menu. The alarm monitoring window is displayed.
During the fault diagnosis, a diagnosis task is added to the diagnosis task list.
NOTE
Fault diagnosis may take a long time when there are a large number of detection services executed
by the detection script and there are a large number of NE configuration services.
4. After fault diagnosis is complete, you can right-click a diagnosis task in the diagnosis task
list, and choose Diagnose Report from the shortcut menu to view diagnosis results.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l eNodeB commissioning tasks have been created or started.
Context
For details about operations on commissioning tasks, see Table 4-47.
Opera Description
tion
Delete You can perform this operation on commissioning tasks in any state.
Restart You can perform this operation on commissioning tasks in the Running,
Abnormal, Paused, or Waiting for Confirmation state.
Pause You can perform this operation on commissioning tasks in the Running state.
Resum You can perform this operation on commissioning tasks in the Paused state.
e
Opera Description
tion
Cancel You can perform this operation on commissioning tasks in the Running,
Abnormal, or Paused state.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 On the Deployment List tab page, select one or multiple commissioning tasks and perform
operations as required.
If you Then...
need to...
Restart Right-click the tasks and choose Restart from the shortcut menu. The tasks
return to the Running state.
Pause Right-click the tasks and choose Pause from the shortcut menu. The tasks are
in the Paused state.
Resume Right-click the tasks and choose Resume from the shortcut menu. The tasks
proceed from where they are paused.
Cancel Right-click the tasks and choose Cancel from the shortcut menu. The tasks
return to the Wait for Start state.
Delete 1. Right-click the tasks and choose Delete from the shortcut menu. The
Confirm dialog box is displayed.
2. Click OK. The system starts deleting the tasks.
----End
Prerequisites
l If the direct or M2000-assisted certificate management mode based on Certificate
Management Protocol (CMP) is used for applying for certificates, the CA server must be
deployed with the Huawei root certificate loaded.
l If the direct certificate management mode based on CMP is used for applying for
certificates, the eNodeB data configuration file must contain correct information about the
CA and certificate request file.
l APPCERT in the eNodeB data configuration file is set to appcert.pem, which indicates
the preconfigured device certificate. If the operator's device certificate is applied for in
offline mode, this setting is not required.
Procedure
l If the eNodeB communicates with the CA server through the non-security domain and CMP
is used as the method for updating certificates, the direct certificate management mode
based on CMP is recommended. The procedure is as follows:
1. Log in to the M2000. Remove the original operator's trust certificate by running the
RMV TRUSTCERT command with CERTNAME specified according to the
operator's naming rules. Assume that the operator's trust certificate is named
OperationCA.cer.
2. Download an operator's trust certificate file by running the DLD CERTFILE
command with DSTF specified according to the operator's naming rules, and IP,
USR, PWD, and SRCF specified based on site requirements.
3. Add an operator's trust certificate by running the ADD TRUSTCERT command with
CERTNAME set to OperationCA.cer.
4. Modify the registration information used to create a certificate request by running the
MOD CERTREQ command with COMMNAME set to ESN(ESN) and
USERADDINFO set to ESN.huawei.com.
5. Apply for an operator's device certificate by running the REQ DEVCERT command
with CANAME set to basestationCert.pem and other parameters specified based on
site requirements.
6. Modify information about the eNodeB device certificate by running the MOD
APPCERT command with APPTYPE set to IKE(IKE) and APPCERT set to
basestationCert.pem, which is the name of the operator's device certificate obtained
in the preceding step.
7. (Optional) If the common connection mode is configured in the eNodeB
commissioning task, but the SSL connection mode is used, change the NE connection
mode by performing the following operations: Select the corresponding NE on the
Main Topology tab page of the M2000 client. Right-click the NE and select
Properties. In the displayed NE Property dialog box, change NE Connection
Mode to SSL Connection and OSS Authentication Mode to OSS Authentication
NE.
8. (Optional) If the operator's certificates are also required in SSL connection mode,
modify information about the eNodeB device certificate by running the MOD
APPCERT command with APPTYPE set to SSL(SSL) and APPCERT set to
basestationCert.pem, which is the name of the operator's device certificate obtained
in the preceding step.
9. Remove the original operator's device certificate by running the RMV CERTMK
command with APPCERT set to OPKIDevCert.cer.
10. (Optional) Modify the configuration of the CA server based on the deployment of the
operator's CA server.
a. Query the the CA name and uniform resource locator (URL) for eNodeB
deployment by running the LST CA command and check the values of
Certificate Authority Name and Certificate Authority URL in the command
output.
– If the CA name after a certificate update in the future is the same as the queried
value of Certificate Authority Name, go to b.
– If the CA name after a certificate update in the future is different from the
queried value of Certificate Authority Name, go to c.
b. Change the CA URL by running the MOD CA command with URL set to the
CA URL after the certificate update.
c. Remove the CA URL that is different from the operator's CA URL by running
the RMV CA command.
d. Modify the CA configuration by running the ADD CA command with
CANAME and URL set to the CA name and URL after the certificate update,
respectively.
l If the eNodeB cannot directly communicate with the CA server through the non-security
domain but the M2000 can directly communicate with the CA server, proxy is used as the
method for updating certificates, and an M2000 client serves as a proxy of the CA server,
the M2000-assisted certificate management mode based on CMP is recommended. The
procedure is as follows:
1. Log in to the M2000. Remove the original operator's trust certificate by running the
RMV TRUSTCERT command with CERTNAME specified according to the
operator's naming rules. Assume that the operator's trust certificate is named
OperationCA.cer.
2. Download an operator's trust certificate file by running the DLD CERTFILE
command with DSTF specified according to the operator's naming rules, and IP,
USR, PWD, and SRCF specified based on site requirements.
3. Add an operator's trust certificate by running the ADD TRUSTCERT command with
CERTNAME set to OperationCA.cer.
4. Modify the registration information used to create a certificate request by running the
MOD CERTREQ command with COMMNAME set to ESN(ESN) and
USERADDINFO set to ESN.huawei.com.
5. Apply for an operator's device certificate.
a. On the M2000 client, choose Security > Certificate Authentication
Management > Certificate Management to open the Certificate
Management window.
b. Select the corresponding NE in the navigation tree, and select the certificate to
be applied for on the Device Certificate Registration tab page on the right of
the window. Then, click Apply for Certificate to open the Apply for
Certificate dialog box.
c. In the Apply for Certificate dialog box, click Apply for Certificate to start the
certificate application task. When Status in the lower part is Success, the task is
complete.
6. Activate the operator's device certificate.
a. Select the corresponding NE in the navigation tree on the left of the Certificate
Management window, and select the certificate to be activated on the Device
Certificate tab page on the right of the window. Then, click Activate. In the
displayed Confirm dialog box, click Yes. The Select Application Type dialog
box is displayed.
b. In the Select Application Type dialog box, select IKE and click OK to start the
certificate activation task. When Status in the lower part is Success, the task is
complete.
7. (Optional) If the common connection mode is configured in the eNodeB
commissioning task, but the SSL connection mode is used, change the NE connection
mode by performing the following operations: Select the corresponding NE on the
Main Topology tab page of the M2000 client. Right-click the NE and select
Properties. In the displayed NE Property dialog box, change NE Connection
Mode to SSL Connection and OSS Authentication Mode to OSS Authentication
NE.
8. (Optional) If the operator's certificates are also required in SSL connection mode,
repeat step 6 but select SSL in the Select Application Type dialog box.
9. Remove the original operator's device certificate by running the RMV CERTMK
command with APPCERT set to OPKIDevCert.cer.
10. (Optional) Modify the configuration of the CA server based on the deployment of the
operator's CA server.
a. Query the the CA name and uniform resource locator (URL) for eNodeB
deployment by running the LST CA command and check the values of
Certificate Authority Name and Certificate Authority URL in the command
output.
– If the CA name after a certificate update in the future is the same as the queried
value of Certificate Authority Name, go to b.
– If the CA name after a certificate update in the future is different from the
queried value of Certificate Authority Name, go to c.
b. Change the CA URL by running the MOD CA command with URL set to the
CA URL after the certificate update.
c. Remove the CA URL that is different from the operator's CA URL by running
the RMV CA command.
d. Modify the CA configuration by running the ADD CA command with
CANAME and URL set to the CA name and URL after the certificate update,
respectively.
l If neither of the eNodeB and the M2000 can directly directly communicate with the CA
server through the non-security domain, the operator's device certificate must be applied
for in offline mode. The procedure is as follows:
1. Log in to the M2000. Remove the original operator's trust certificate by running the
RMV TRUSTCERT command with CERTNAME specified according to the
operator's naming rules. Assume that the operator's trust certificate is named
OperationCA.cer.
2. Download an operator's trust certificate file by running the DLD CERTFILE
command with DSTF specified according to the operator's naming rules, and IP,
USR, PWD, and SRCF specified based on site requirements.
3. Add an operator's trust certificate by running the ADD TRUSTCERT command with
CERTNAME set to OperationCA.cer.
4. Modify the registration information used to create a certificate request by running the
MOD CERTREQ command with COMMNAME set to ESN(ESN) and
USERADDINFO set to ESN.huawei.com.
5. Create a certificate request file.
a. On the M2000 client, choose Security > Certificate Authentication
Management > Certificate Management to open the Certificate
Management window.
b. Select the corresponding NE in the navigation tree, and select the certificate to
be applied for on the Device Certificate Registration tab page on the right of
the window. Then, click Create Request File to open the Create Request
File dialog box.
c. Select the corresponding NE in the Create Request File dialog box and specify
the path in which the certificate request file is to be saved. Then, click OK to
start the file creation task. When Status in the lower part is Success, the task is
complete.
6. Submit the certificate request file to the operator to obtain the operator's device
certificate.
7. Download the operator's device certificate to the eNodeB by running the DLD
CERTFILE command.
8. Load the operator's device certificate to the eNodeB by running the ADD
CERTMK command.
9. Modify information about the eNodeB device certificate by running the MOD
APPCERT command with APPTYPE set to IKE(IKE) and APPCERT set to the
name of the operator's device certificate obtained in the preceding step.
10. (Optional) If the common connection mode is configured in the eNodeB
commissioning task, but the SSL connection mode is used, change the NE connection
mode by performing the following operations: Select the corresponding NE on the
Main Topology tab page of the M2000 client. Right-click the NE and select
Properties. In the displayed NE Property dialog box, change NE Connection
Mode to SSL Connection and OSS Authentication Mode to OSS Authentication
NE.
11. (Optional) If the operator's certificates are also required in SSL connection mode,
modify information about the eNodeB device certificate by running the MOD
APPCERT command with APPTYPE set to SSL(SSL) and APPCERT set to
basestationCert.pem, which is the name of the operator's device certificate obtained
in the preceding step.
12. Remove the original operator's device certificate by running the RMV CERTMK
command with APPCERT set to OPKIDevCert.cer.
13. (Optional) Modify the configuration of the CA server based on the deployment of the
operator's CA server.
a. Query the the CA name and uniform resource locator (URL) for eNodeB
deployment by running the LST CA command and check the values of
Certificate Authority Name and Certificate Authority URL in the command
output.
– If the CA name after a certificate update in the future is the same as the queried
value of Certificate Authority Name, go to b.
– If the CA name after a certificate update in the future is different from the
queried value of Certificate Authority Name, go to c.
b. Change the CA URL by running the MOD CA command with URL set to the
CA URL after the certificate update.
c. Remove the CA URL that is different from the operator's CA URL by running
the RMV CA command.
d. Modify the CA configuration by running the ADD CA command with
CANAME and URL set to the CA name and URL after the certificate update,
respectively.
----End
Prerequisites
l The eNodeB is properly connected to the M2000.
l The status of the eNodeB commissioning task is Waiting for Confirmation.
Procedure
Step 1 On the M2000 client, choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto
Deployment. The eNodeB Auto Deployment tag page is displayed.
Step 2 Right-click one or more eNodeB commissioning tasks to be confirmed from the commissioning
task list, and choose Confirm Completion from the shortcut menu.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have logged in to the M2000 client.
l Commissioning tasks are running.
Context
The exported commissioning report records the information about only the selected
commissioning tasks. After you manually delete a commissioning task, the generated
commissioning report does not contain the information about this task.
The deployment report can be stored for a maximum of 30 days. The start date is specified as
the date when the deployment report is generated for the first time.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment from the main menu
of the Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto Deployment client. The eNodeB
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
Step 2 In the commissioning task list, select one or multiple commissioning tasks for which you want
to export the report, right-click the tasks, and then choose Export Deployment Report from
the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed, asking you whether to export alarm data at the
same time.
If... Then...
You need to export alarm data Click Yes. The Save dialog box is displayed.
You do not need to export alarm data Click No. The Save dialog box is displayed.
You can customize a filename for the commissioning report. If you do not specify the filename,
the M2000 names and saves the file based on the naming convention
eNodeB_Auto_Deployment_Report_user name_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.zip. For example,
eNodeB_Auto_Deployment_Report_admin_20100812202524.zip.
Step 4 (Optional) Decompress the generated report file. In the decompressed folder, double-click
index.html to view the commissioning report.
If you choose to export alarm data at the same time in Step 2, the file containing the alarm data
is saved in the alarm sub-folder.
----End
Rectifying Faults and Clearing Alarms Against the eNodeB Health Check Report
This section descries how to rectify faults and clear alarms against the eNodeB health check
report to ensure that the eNodeB runs properly.
Prerequisites
The eNodeB commissioning report is available.
Context
Table 4-48 shows the eNodeB health checklist.
eNodeB software eNodeB software status Check the operating status of the
version eNodeB software.
Configuration data Configuration data consistency Check whether the effective data
applied to modules is consistent
with the configured data in the
database.
Procedure
Step 1 Open the eNodeB commissioning report and view the health check report to determine the
eNodeB operating status.
Step 2 Check the health check report for faults and alarms, and rectify the faults and clear the alarms
by referring to eNodeB Alarm Reference. If all the alarms are cleared but the eNodeB does not
work properly, contact Huawei for technical support.
Step 3 Check for eNodeB alarms.
You can check for eNodeB alarms using one of the following methods:
l on the M2000 client, choose Monitor > Browse Current Alarm. Set the search criteria in
the displayed Filter dialog box to check for eNodeB alarms. For details, see Browse Current
Alarm in the M2000 Online Help.
l On the M2000 client, choose Topology > Main Topology. On the Main Topology tab page,
right-click the eNodeB and choose Query Alarm/Event > Alarm List from the shortcut
menu. Then, double-click an alarm to view details
Step 4 Clear the alarms by taking recommended actions or by referring to eNodeB Alarm Reference.
----End
Prerequisites
l The antenna line device (ALD) is installed correctly.
l The LMT communicates with the eNodeB properly.
l The RET software and data configuration file are available.
l The FTP server functions properly and is connected to the eNodeB correctly.
l Each FTP user has the permission to read a specified folder.
l There is no firewall between the FTP server and the eNodeB.
Context
l Commissioning the RET antenna includes downloading the RET software and data
configuration file, calibrating the RET antenna, setting the RET downtilt, and query RET
overcurrent or undercurrent alarms.
l The RET downtilt must be configured based on the planned network data. Otherwise, the
RET downtilt affects antenna coverage.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the ALD power switch and overcurrent or undercurrent alarm thresholds.
If... Run...
NOTE
The ALD power switch is OFF by default. Before using the RET, set the ALD power switch to ON and
set current alarm thresholds. If the current exceeds the overcurrent or undercurrent alarm threshold, the
ALD power switch automatically turns off. This affects the subsequent RET commissioning.
You can set Operation Mode to SITE(Site) to query all ALD information.
If... Then...
The current RET software Record the device number of the RET antenna, and perform
version is the same as the Step 7 to download the RET data configuration file.
target RET software
version
The current RET software Record the device number of the RET antenna, and perform
version is different from the Step 6 to download the RET software.
target RET software
version
The subunits of an RET antenna are numbered from 1 in ascending order. You must
download the data configuration file for each subunit.
2. Download the data configuration file for each subunit.
MML command: DLD RETCFGDATA
If the RET downtilt fails to be calibrated, check for the cabinet, subrack, and slot configurations and the
mapping between the RET antenna and the sector. If the configurations and mapping are incorrect, run the
MOD RETSUBUNIT command to set them gain, and calibrate the RET downtilt again.
If you run this command without specifying any parameters, RET antennas can be calibrated in batches.
If multiple sectors are configured, repeat Step 9.1 and Step 9.2 to set the downtilts for other
RET antennas.
3. Query the current RET downtilt. If the queried downtilt is the same as the configured
downtilt, the RET downtilt is set successfully.
MML command: DSP RETSUBUNIT
Step 10 Check whether overcurrent or undercurrent alarms are generated on the RET antenna. If
overcurrent or undercurrent alarms are generated, clear them by referring to eNodeB Alarm
Reference.
MML command: DSP RETPORT
----End
Prerequisites
l The TMA is installed correctly.
l The TMA software has been uploaded to the M2000 server.
l The eNodeB is properly connected to the M2000.
l Each FTP user has the permission to read a specified folder.
l The File Transfer Protocol (FTP) port has been enabled on the firewall between the eNodeB
and the M2000 server.
Context
l The FTP server transmits data in plaintext mode by default.
l As a part of the antenna system, the TMA is used to amplify the received weak signals.
l The TMA software is supplied by the antenna line device (ALD) vendor.
l If incorrect TMA software is loaded, the TMA may not work property.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the ALD power switch and overcurrent or undercurrent alarm thresholds.
If... Run...
NOTE
The ALD power switch is OFF by default. Before using the TMA, set the ALD power switch to ON and
set current alarm thresholds. If the current exceeds the overcurrent or undercurrent alarm threshold, the
ALD power switch automatically turns off. This affects the subsequent TMA commissioning.
Step 4 Check whether the TMA starts working and whether the TMA gain is set correctly.
MML command: DSP TMASUBUNIT
l If the maximum gain is the same as the minimum gain, the TMA has a fixed gain. In this
situation, you are not allowed to set any gains.
l If the TMA is not working, contact Huawei for technical support.
You can set Operation Mode to SITE(Site) to query all ALD information.
If... Then...
The current TMA software Perform Step 8 to set the TMA gain as required, and perform
version is the same as the Step 9 to check whether the TMA generates overcurrent or
target TMA software undercurrent alarms.
version
If... Then...
----End
Prerequisites
l The M2000 communicates properly with the eNodeB.
l Environment monitoring devices have been configured.
l The dual in-line package (DIP) switches on the environment monitoring device are properly
set. For details, see APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T(Ver.B) Product
Description, APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T(Ver.C) Product Description
and EMUA User Guide.
Context
The remote radio unit (RRU), universal power environment unit (UPEU) in the baseband unit
(BBU), environment monitoring unit type A (EMUA), and power monitoring unit (PMU) in the
APM30H are all equipped with extended alarm ports. Setting environment alarm parameters
includes adding user-defined alarms and binding the user-defined alarms to the eNodeB.
Environment alarms are used to monitor the equipment room where the eNodeB is located. When
setting environment alarm parameters, you need to bind a user-defined alarm to the specific
subrack, slot, and port on the eNodeB.
Procedure
Step 1 Add a user-defined alarm.
1. Choose Monitor > Alarm Setting > NE Alarm Settings.
2. On the User-Defined Alarm tab page, click the Alarm Definition tab, and click Add. The
Add User-Defined Alarm dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-48.
3. Select an NE type on the left, and set the user-defined alarm parameters, including Alarm
Name, Alarm ID, Alarm Severity Level, and Alarm Type.
NOTE
l Each type of user-defined alarm is allocated a unique alarm ID. The alarm ID ranges from 65033
to 65233.
l The same type of alarm must use the same alarm ID for all eNodeBs. For example, if the door
status alarm ID for an eNodeB is 65035, the door status alarm IDs for other eNodeBs must also
be 65035.
4. Click OK. The information about the added user-defined alarm is displayed in the NE
Alarm Setting window.
5. Click Apply to save the user-defined alarm.
A message is displayed, indicating that saving the user-defined alarm is successful or fails.
If saving the user-defined alarm is successful, click OK. The icon disappears. If
saving the user-defined alarm fails, click Details to view the failure cause and rectify the
fault accordingly. Then, add the user-defined alarm again.
Step 2 Bind the user-defined alarm to the eNodeB.
1. Choose Monitor > Alarm Setting > NE Alarm Settings.
2. On the User-Defined Alarm tab page, click the Alarm Binding tab. Then, add the user-
defined alarm binding relationship.
l Single binding
a. Choose Edit > Add. The Add Alarm Binding dialog box is displayed, as shown
in Figure 4-49.
b. Select an NE from the Select NE navigation tree or enter an NE name in the Search
by name text box on the left. Select an alarm from the Select Alarm/Event
navigation tree or enter an alarm name in the Search by name text box in the
middle. Select an alarm or event ID based on the NE type, and set binding
parameters, including port type, cabinet No., subrack No., and slot No. of the port,
alarm voltage, and upper and lower alarm thresholds.
NOTE
If a digital port is used for the monitoring board, you must set alarm voltage to specify a
condition for reporting alarms. If an analog port is used for the monitoring board, you must
set upper and lower alarm thresholds to specify a condition for reporting alarms.
c. Click OK. The information about the added user-defined alarm is displayed in the
NE Alarm Setting window.
l Batch binding
a. Choose Import/Export > Export Template. The Export Alarm Binding
Template dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-50.
Alternatively, choose Import/Export > Export to export the existing records on
the Alarm Binding tab page by NE type.
b. In the displayed Export Alarm Binding Template dialog box, select the NE type,
and specify the save path and name for the exported template.
c. Open the template and edit it based on actual requirements by referring to the
example in the template.
d. Choose Import/Export > Import to import the edited template to the M2000.
Then, click OK.
The user-defined alarm binding relationship in the template is displayed on the
Alarm Binding tab page. Each record is prefixed with the icon.
3. Select an alarm binding relationship record and click Apply to apply it to the NE.
A message is displayed, indicating that applying the alarm binding relationship is successful
or fails. If applying the alarm binding relationship is successful, click OK. The icon
disappears. If applying the alarm binding relationship fails, click Details to view the failure
cause and rectify the fault accordingly. Then, apply the alarm binding relationship again.
----End
Context
You can manually trigger several external environment alarms to verify the parameter settings.
If external environment alarms can be reported, the parameter settings are correct.
Procedure
Step 1 Manually trigger several external environment alarms. For details, see the appendix Triggering
Monitoring Device Alarms.
Step 2 Check for the external environment alarms on the M2000. For details, see Rectifying Faults
and Clearing Alarms Against the eNodeB Health Check Report. If external environment
alarms can be reported, the parameter settings are correct. If no external environment alarm is
reported, set the parameters again or contact Huawei for technical support.
----End
Example
Assuming that a water sensor is installed for the fan monitoring unit (FMU), to check whether
the parameter settings for water damage alarms are correct, perform the following operations:
1. Run the MOD FMU command with WS_DISABLE(Water-Immersed Sensor
Disabled) in Special Boolean Alarm Flag cleared.
2. Immerse the water sensor or its probe in water for more than 10s, and check whether water
damage alarms are reported. If water damage alarms are reported, the parameter settings
are correct.
Prerequisites
l The RRU or RFU is connected properly.
l The local maintenance terminal (LMT) or M2000 communicates properly with the eNodeB.
l You have logged in to the M2000 as administrator.
Context
The maximum output power of the RRU or RFU is specified by the local operator.
If an eNodeB is configured with multiple RRUs or RFUs, you must use MML commands to
manually reset RRUs or RFUs one by one. If RRUs or RFUs are cascaded, set the maximum
output power for the lowest-level RRU or RFU and then for other RRUs or RFUs to reduce the
impact on upper-level RRUs.
The maximum output power for the RRU or RFU needs to be set only if it is less than the
maximum output power that the RRU or RFU can physically achieve.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the DSP RRU command to query the cabinet No., subrack No., slot No., and transmit
channel No. of the RRU or RFU.
Step 2 Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to query the maximum output power supported by the
RRU or RFU based on the information queried in Step 1.
Step 3 Run the LOC RRUTC command to set the maximum output power for the RRU or RFU.
Step 4 Run the RST BRD command to reset the RRU or RFU.
Step 5 Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to check whether the setting of the maximum output
power for the RRU or RFU takes effect.
If... Then...
The maximum transmit Set the maximum output power within the power specifications
power fails to be set supported by the RRU or RFU. If the maximum output power
still fails to be set, contact Huawei for technical support.
NOTE
Before returning a used but not faulty RRU or RFU to the Spare Parts Center, run the LOC RRUTC
command to set the maximum output power (TXMAXPWR) to 0 and reset the RRU or RFU for the setting
to take effect.
----End
Prerequisites
l The eNodeB and the MME/S-GW are properly connected.
l The negotiation data of the eNodeB to be commissioned is added to the MME/S-GW.
l The testing UE is functional and is registered in the HSS.
l The FTP server for testing the basic services is available.
l The WWW server for testing the basic services is available.
Procedure
l Test the web page browsing service.
Testing Method Access the WWW server and browse the web pages through a UE.
Perform the test 20 times.
Testing Method Access the FTP server and upload files through a UE. Perform the
test 10 times.
Testing Method Access the FTP server and download files through a UE. Perform the
test 10 times.
Expectation Connection success rate > 95%. The calls are uninterrupted and none
of the calls get dropped till they are released. The voice is clear with
no loud noise.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 Query the eNodeB state.
1. On the M2000 tab page, choose Topology > Main Topology. The Main Topology tab
page is displayed.
2. On the Main Topology tab page, select the target network element (NE) and right-click
Query Maintenance Mode. Then, the Query Maintenance Mode dialog box is displayed.
3. Check whether Current NE Maintenance Mode is set to NORMAL. If it is, the
configuration is complete. If it is not, go to Step 2.
Step 2 Set the eNodeB state.
1. On the M2000 tab page, choose Maintenance > Maintenance Mode. The Maintenance
Mode tab page is displayed.
2. Click Set NE Mode at the upper left corner of the Maintenance Mode tab page. The
Set Maintenance Mode dialog box is displayed.
3. Select the target NE and specify the time.
4. Set NE Mode to NORMAL. The eNodeB is changed to the normal state.
5. Click OK. The setting of the maintenance mode is complete.
6. Ensure that the current the eNodeB state is NORMAL by executing Step 1 again.
NOTE
The alarms that are not cleared during commissioning will be reported on the eNodeB in the normal state.
----End
Main Window
Figure 4-51 shows the main window for eNodeB commissioning. Table 4-49 describes the
window.
2 Commissioni Displays all the commissioning tasks and their progress. You can
ng task list right-click a task, and then choose the corresponding menu item
from the shortcut menu to perform an operation.
NOTE
l By default, the GUI displays only commissioning tasks created by a
specific user. To view commissioning tasks created by other users,
3 Shortcut You can right-click a task, and then choose the corresponding
menu menu item from the shortcut menu to perform an operation.
1 Alarm object After selecting an object type, you can view all alarms of this
tree object type in the alarm list in the right pane.
2 Alarm list After an object type is selected, all alarms of this object type are
displayed in the alarm list.
3 Tab named after Displays tabs named after data file types that are required for
a data file type commissioning.
4 Operation result Displays the details about the operations on uploading the type
of data file.
NOTE
Figure 4-54 Procedure for eNodeB commissioning on the LMT when the SeGW is deployed
7 Handle eNodeB alarms on the LMT. For details, see 4.6.8 Mandat
Handling the eNodeB Alarms on the LMT. ory
8 Check the running status of the eNodeB on the LMT. For Mandat
details, see 4.6.9 Checking the Operating Status of the ory
eNodeB on the LMT.
9 Verify the basic services of the eNodeB. For details, see Mandat
4.6.10 Testing the Basic Services of the eNodeB. ory
NOTE
After an eNodeB is deployed, local engineers can determine whether the eNodeB is working properly by
observing the indicators on eNodeB boards. For details about the indicator descriptions and operations for
rectifying possible faults, see 5.3 Checking the Status of Indicators.
4.6.2 Preparations
Before local eNodeB commissioning on the LMT when the SeGW is deployed in the network,
you need to collect related eNodeB information, obtain commissioning tools, and configure the
File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. If digital certificate files are unavailable in PKI-based
authentication mode, obtain digital certificates and add them to the eNodeB using the LMT.
Procedure
Step 1 Collect the information related to the eNodeB, as described in Table 4-54.
Step 2 Obtain the tools required for local commissioning on the LMT, as described in Table 4-55.
Table 4-55 Tools required for local eNodeB commissioning on the LMT
Tool Description
Ethernet cable LMPT: The Ethernet cable directly connects the laptop to the
eNodeB. UMPT: The Ethernet cable connects the laptop to the USB-
to-Ethernet port transfer cable.
Local maintenance The LMA connects the USB port on the UMPT to the Ethernet cable.
adapter (LMA)
Testing UE The testing UE is functional and has been registered with the home
subscriber server (HSS).
----End
Context
Figure 4-55 shows the procedure for obtaining digital certificates.
Procedure
Step 1 Obtain the operator's root certificate.
Step 2 Generate the certificate request file on the eNodeB.
Run the CRE CERTREQFILE command with FILENAME set to the name of the certificate
request file (in the XXX.req format) and REQMODE set to NEW.
----End
Prerequisites
l Quidway S6500 Series Ethernet Switches Operation Manual is available. You can obtain
the document from http://support.huawei.com.
l HUAWEI AAA Commissioning Guide is available. You can obtain the document from
http://support.huawei.com.
l If IEEE 802.1X-based access control is adopted, the operator must use the authentication
access equipment that supports IEEE 802.1X-based access control authentication and the
corresponding AAA server that supports Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP).
Context
In scenarios with the security gateway (SeGW) deployed, the SeGW must be configured. If the
eNodeB performs IEEE 802.1X-based access control, authentication access equipment and
authentication server must be configured. Generally, the authentication server refers to the
Authentication, Authorization and Accounting (AAA) server.
l Table 4-56 describes the SeGW configuration.
IP address Both the public SeGW and the serving SeGW should be configured with
the IP address of the interface for the untrusted area on the eNodeB side
and IP address of the interface for the trusted area on the evolved packet
core (EPC) side.
Route l Public SeGW: The routes to the M2000, eNodeB, and temporary
operation and maintenance (O&M) IP address must be
configured.
l Serving SeGW: The routes to the M2000, S-GW, mobility
management entity (MME), eNodeB port IP address, S1 signaling
and service IP addresses, and O&M IP address must be
configured.
IKE local The public SeGW and serving SeGW must be configured.
name
ike proposal l The authentication method parameter can be set to the digital
certificate mode or pre-shared key mode based on the actual
networking.
l The authentication algorithm parameter can be set to SHA_1 or
MD5. Generally, this parameter is set to SHA_1.
l The encryption algorithm parameter can be set to AES or DES.
Generally, this parameter is set to AES.
l The DH group parameter can be set to DH group2.
Item Description
ike peer l Public SeGW: The key or certificate domain must be configured
based on the authentication mode specified by ike proposal. local
id type is set to name, remote name is set to p-segw, ike
proposal can be set to V1 or V2 based on the preceding setting, and
ip pool must be configured to allocate a temporary O&M IP
address for the eNodeB.
l Serving SeGW: The key or certificate domain must be configured
based on the authentication mode specified by the ike proposal
parameter. local id type is set to name, remote name is set to s-
segw, ike proposal can be set to V1 or V2 based on the preceding
setting.
ipsec policy- The public SeGW and serving security are set to template. ACL must
template be set based on the preceding settings. If the public SeGW and serving
SeGW are the same, ACL must be set to different values. psf group
must be set to DH group2. ike peer must be set to different values for
the public SeGW and serving SeGW. ipsecproposal must be set based
on the preceding setting.
ipsec binding policy can be bound to the planned port according to the configurations
to port of ipsec policy.
l When the authentication access equipment is used, the authentication mode and the
authentication method must be set to Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service
(RADIUS) and EAP respectively, because certificate authentication is adopted currently.
l When the AAA server is used, the CA certificates of terminal users must be uploaded, and
the file names of the user certificate and private key must be configured for the AAA server.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the configuration of the SeGW by referring to Table 4-5.
Step 2 Ensure that the Huawei root CA certificate and Huawei CRL file are configured on the SeGW.
The authentication access equipment may vary according to different operators. Huawei
Quidway S6500 series Ethernet switches are taken as an example.
For example, to enable the IEEE 802.1X feature for port 3, run the interface
GigabitEthernet 1/0/3 command to enter the port view, and run the dot1x command to
enable IEEE 802.1X feature.
3. Run dot1x authentication-method { chap | pap | eap } to set the authentication method
to EAP.
4. Configure the VLAN and add the route relationship between the transmission network and
AAA server.
For example, run the vlan 4 command to add a VLAN whose ID is 4. Run the interface
vlan 4 command to enter the VLAN view, and run the ip add 10.147.209.38
255.255.255.0 command to add an IP address and subnet mask for the VLAN. Run the
ip route-static 10.166.27.48 24 10.147.209.1 command to add the switch-to-AAA server
route relationship.
5. Set the parameters of AAA server on the switch.
Run the radius scheme accounting command to create a RADIUS solution named
radius1, and enter the RADIUS view. Then, run the primary authentication 10.166.27.48
1812 command to set the port No. to 1812 and the IP address to 10.166.27.48 for the primary
authentication server. Then, run key authentication itellin to set the authentication key to
itellin.
For details, see Quidway S6500 Series Ethernet Switches Operation Manual.
Step 4 Configure the eNodeB CA certificate for the AAA server.
The AAA server may vary according to different operators. The descriptions here take the
Huawei AAA server as an example. For details, see HUAWEI AAA Commissioning Guide.
1. Upload the CA certificate of a terminal user to the iscc2/config/secert directory of infoX
AAA server.
2. Change the file names of the user certificate and private key in the SCPCFG.INI file. Ensure
that the file names are consistent with the file names of the user certificate and private key
uploaded in Step 4.1.
----End
Prerequisites
l The firewall has been disabled between the FTP server and the eNodeB.
l All the FTP servers on the LMT PC have been disabled.
l The software and data configuration file are available and saved in the same directory on
the LMT PC.
CAUTION
The save path must contain folders of less than three levels. If the save path contains folders
of more than three levels, downloading files using the FTP server may fail.
Context
The FTP server IP address refers to the IP address of the LMT PC and must be on the same
network segment as the local maintenance IP address of the LTE main processing transmission
unit (LMPT).
Procedure
Step 1 Type the local maintenance IP address of the LMPT in the address box of the Internet Explorer.
The default IP address is 192.168.0.49.
Step 2 Click Go to. The LMT login page is displayed. The default user name and password are admin
and hwbs@com (case sensitive), respectively.
Step 3 Download the FTP server software if no FTP server is available.
1. On the LMT, click the Software Management tab. The Software Management tab page
is displayed.
2. In the navigation tree, double-click FTP Server Configuration. The FTP Server
Configuration window is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-56.
3. Click Download FTP Tool. The File Download-Security Warning dialog box is
displayed.
4. Click Save to save the FTP server software package (SFTPServer.exe) to the LMT PC.
Step 4 Configure the FTP server.
1. Double-click SFTPServer.exe to start the FTP server. The FTP server icon is displayed as
in the status area on the right of the taskbar.
2. Right-click and choose FTP server configure from the shortcut menu. The FTP server
configuration dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-57.
3. Set User name, Password, and Working directory for the FTP server. The default user
name and password are admin. Working directory must be set to the directory where the
software and data configuration file are saved. The default transmission security mode is
Both.
4. Click OK.
Step 5 Save the FTP server configuration on the LMT main window.
1. On the LMT, click Software Management. The Software Management tab page is
displayed.
2. On the FTP Server Configure tab page, set IP address for the FTP server.
3. Enter User name and Password based on the settings in Step 4.3. The default name and
password are admin.
4. Click Save to save the FTP server configuration.
----End
Prerequisites
l The LMT communicates properly with the eNodeB.
l The File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server functions properly and is connected to the eNodeB
in the same Intranet.
l The FTP user can access the specified directory.
l There is no firewall between the FTP server and the eNodeB.
l The FTP server configuration is complete.
l The operator's root Certificate Authority (CA) certificate and Charging Rule Language
(CRL) file are available, and they are saved in the same directory as that of the eNodeB
software and data configuration files.
CAUTION
The saving path cannot contain folders saved in more than three levels. If the saving path
contains folders saved in more than three levels, the downloading of files from the FTP
server fails.
Procedure
Step 1 Download the operator's root CA certificate and CRL file to the eNodeB by running the DLD
CERTFILE command.
Step 2 Add the operator's root CA certificate by running the ADD TRUSTCERT.
Step 3 Add the operator's CRL file by running the ADD CRL command.
Step 4 Export the certificate request file by running the ULD NEFILE command.
Step 5 Use the certificate request file to apply for the operator's device certificate in offline mode.
Step 6 Download the operator's device certificate to the eNodeB by running the DLD CERTFILE
command.
Step 7 Load the operator's device certificate to the eNodeB by running the ADD CERTMK command.
Step 8 Activate the operator's device certificate on the eNodeB by running the MOD APPCERT
command.
----End
Prerequisites
l The LMT communicates properly with the eNodeB.
l The FTP server is connected to the eNodeB in the same network segment and is functioning
properly.
l Each FTP user has the permission to read a specified folder.
l There is no firewall between the FTP server and the eNodeB.
Context
l You can obtain the eNodeB software package from http://support.huawei.com/ and save
it onto the local computer. The eNodeB software package has been digitally signed. If the
eNodeB software package has been tampered with, a warning message is displayed when
the package is being downloaded. In this situation, you must obtain a correct eNodeB
software package.
l The name of the data configuration file for local commissioning on the LMT is LMT.xml.
The file name is case-sensitive. You can configure the data configuration file by referring
to the eNodeB Initial Configuration Guide and save it onto the local PC. Then, change the
file name to LMT.xml.
l If you configure eNodeB parameters by running MML commands, do not download or
activate the LMT.xml file.
Procedure
Step 1 In the MML window on the LMT, run the LST VER command to query the active eNodeB
software version.
If... Then...
The active software version is Download and activate only the data configuration file.
the target software version
The active software version is Download and activate both the eNodeB software and data
not the target software version configuration file.
Step 2 Download and activate the eNodeB software and data configuration file using the GUI or MML
commands.
l Using GUI
1. On the LMT, click Software Management. The Software Management dialog box is
displayed.
NOTE
If the software management function on the LMT is unavailable, the LMT provides a minimum
configuration. In this case, you must supplement the LMT software package to a complete one
to download the eNodeB software and data configuration file using the software management
function. For details, see How to Switch a Minimum LMT Package to a Complete LMT Package
in eNodeB LMT User Guide.
2. In the navigation tree, double-click Download and Activate Software. The Download
and Activate Software window is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-58.
3. Select tasks to be performed according to Step 1 and set the parameters related to the
tasks.
NOTE
l You are advised to select YES(Delay Download) before downloading the eNodeB software.
After the software activation is complete, you can use only the basic LMT functions. To use
all LMT functions, run the SPL SOFTWARE command with Delay Download File Supply
Flag set to YES(Supply File that Support Delay).
l If you have selectedYES(Delay Download), but did not supplement the software, you can
use only the basic LMT functions. However, this does not affect the establishment of an OML
between the M2000 and the eNodeB.
l If you have selectedNO(Not Delay Download), you can use all LMT functions after the
software is activated. However, the eNodeB deployment will be prolonged for 10 minutes.
l You can select XML or DBS, depending on the type of the data configuration file to be
downloaded and activated.
l You must enter the version number of the target software for activation.
l You must save the eNodeB software package, data configuration file, and license file in the
same directory on the FTP server.
4. Click Execute. The eNodeB performs the selected tasks in sequence. There is a progress
bar under the Execute button, indicating the current progress and task status. When the
progress bar of each task displays 100%, the download and activation are complete.
NOTE
l If a task is not selected, the eNodeB skips the task and goes to the next task.
l If a task fails, the eNodeB stops the task and subsequent tasks.
l After the data configuration file is activated, it will take effect by default when the eNodeB is
reset.
l After the eNodeB software is activated, the software will take effect when the eNodeB
automatically resets. If the data configuration file has been activated, it will also take effect when
the eNodeB resets.
l Using MML commands
1. Select tasks to be performed according to Step 1. Table 4-57 describes the mapping
between tasks and MML commands.
CAUTION
l After the eNodeB software is downloaded and activated and the eNodeB resets, log in to the
eNodeB using the LMT within 30 minutes. Otherwise, the eNodeB will roll back to the source
version.
l The eNodeB automatically resets after the eNodeB software is activated. Before the eNodeB
automatically resets, do not run a reset command to reset the eNodeB or boards, power off
the eNodeB, or remove any boards. Because such operations may lead to download and
activation failures, or may clear or damage the software and files on the eNodeB.
----End
Prerequisites
l The LMT communicates properly with the eNodeB.
l The commissioning license is available on the FTP server.
Context
Apply for the commissioning license of the eNodeB with the help of Huawei technical support.
NOTE
The commissioning license has a time limit. Replace the commissioning license with a commercial license in
time after the eNodeB commissioning is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the INS LICENSE command to download and activate the license file on the eNodeB.
----End
Prerequisites
l The LMT communicates properly with the eNodeB.
l The license for ALD management is available.
Prerequisites
l The antenna line device (ALD) is installed correctly.
l The LMT communicates with the eNodeB properly.
l The RET software and data configuration file are available.
l The FTP server functions properly and is connected to the eNodeB correctly.
l Each FTP user has the permission to read a specified folder.
l There is no firewall between the FTP server and the eNodeB.
Context
Figure 4-59 shows the procedure for commissioning the RET antenna.
Table 4-58 describes the preparations for commissioning the RET antenna.
RET data configuration file The RET data configuration file is supplied
by the ALD vendor. The configuration data
varies according to the vendor and RET
antenna model.
Information about the RET downtilt The RET downtilt is defined in the network
plan.
l The RET antenna does not provide the file check function. If an incorrect RET data
configuration file is downloaded, the RET antenna may become unavailable.
l Calibrating the RET antenna is mandatory after the RET antenna is installed. If you skip
this step, the RET downtilt may be incorrect and the network coverage is affected.
l The RET antenna does not need to be calibrated again after you reset or power off the RET
antenna. After calibrating the RET antenna, you must set the RET downtilt again to ensure
that the downtilt is correct without affecting the network coverage.
l Setting an RET downtilt takes a maximum of 2 minutes.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the ALD power switch and overcurrent or undercurrent alarm thresholds.
If... Run...
NOTE
The ALD power switch is OFF by default. Before using the RET, set the ALD power switch to ON and
set current alarm thresholds. If the current exceeds the overcurrent or undercurrent alarm threshold, the
ALD power switch automatically turns off. This affects the subsequent RET commissioning.
Step 4 Check whether the RET antenna is working. If the RET antenna is not working, contact Huawei
for technical support.
MML command: DSP RETSUBUNIT
You can set Operation Mode to SITE(Site) to query all ALD information.
If... Then...
The current RET software Record the device number of the RET antenna, and perform
version is the same as the Step 7 to download the RET data configuration file.
target RET software
version
If... Then...
The current RET software Record the device number of the RET antenna, and perform
version is different from the Step 6 to download the RET software.
target RET software
version
If the eNodeB is configured with multiple RET antennas, repeat Step 6 to download the software
of other RET antennas.
Step 7 Download the RET data configuration file supplied by the ALD vendor.
1. Query the number of subunits for each RET antenna and record the query results.
MML command: DSP RET
The subunits of an RET antenna are numbered from 1 in ascending order. You must
download the data configuration file for each subunit.
2. Download the data configuration file for each subunit.
MML command: DLD RETCFGDATA
If the RET downtilt fails to be calibrated, check for the cabinet, subrack, and slot configurations and the
mapping between the RET antenna and the sector. If the configurations and mapping are incorrect, run the
MOD RETSUBUNIT command to set them gain, and calibrate the RET downtilt again.
If you run this command without specifying any parameters, RET antennas can be calibrated in batches.
If multiple sectors are configured, repeat Step 9.1 and Step 9.2 to set the downtilts for other
RET antennas.
3. Query the current RET downtilt. If the queried downtilt is the same as the configured
downtilt, the RET downtilt is set successfully.
MML command: DSP RETSUBUNIT
Step 10 Check whether overcurrent or undercurrent alarms are generated on the RET antenna. If
overcurrent or undercurrent alarms are generated, clear them by referring to eNodeB Alarm
Reference.
----End
Prerequisites
l The TMA is installed correctly.
l The TMA software is available.
l The LMT communicates properly with the eNodeB.
l The FTP server functions properly and is properly connected to the eNodeB on the same
network segment.
l Each FTP user has the permission to read a specified folder.
CAUTION
Ensure that there is no firewall between the FTP server and the eNodeB. If a firewall is installed
on the PC, disable it.
Context
l As a part of the antenna system, the TMA is used to amplify the received weak signals.
l The TMA software is supplied by the antenna line device (ALD) vendor.
l If incorrect TMA software is loaded, the TMA may not work property.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the ALD power switch and overcurrent or undercurrent alarm thresholds.
If... Run...
NOTE
The ALD power switch is OFF by default. Before using the TMA, set the ALD power switch to ON and
set current alarm thresholds. If the current exceeds the overcurrent or undercurrent alarm threshold, the
ALD power switch automatically turns off. This affects the subsequent TMA commissioning.
You can set Operation Mode to SITE(Site) to query all ALD information.
If... Then...
The current TMA software Perform Step 8 to set the TMA gain as required, and perform
version is the same as the Step 9 to check whether the TMA generates overcurrent or
target TMA software undercurrent alarms.
version
----End
Prerequisites
l The antenna system has been properly installed on the eNodeB.
l The local maintenance terminal (LMT) communicates properly with the eNodeB.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST RRU command to query the VSWR alarm threshold.
If... Then...
The test value is less than The antenna system is properly installed. End the
the VSWR alarm threshold commissioning.
The test value is greater The antenna system is not properly installed. Rectify the faults
than or equal to the VSWR by referring to the handling procedures for the VSWR alarm in
alarm threshold the eNodeB Alarm Reference.
----End
Prerequisites
l The local maintenance terminal (LMT) communicates properly with the eNodeB.
l The environment monitoring equipment has been configured.
l The DIP switches on the environment monitoring device are properly set. For details, see
the APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T(Ver.B) Product Description,
APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T(Ver.C) Product Description and EMUA
User Guide.
Context
The remote radio unit (RRU), universal power environment unit (UPEU) in the baseband unit
(BBU), environment monitoring unit type A (EMUA), and power monitoring unit (PMU) in the
APM30H are all equipped with extended alarm ports.
The external environment alarm and the extended alarm port are already bound together. For
details, see Table 4-59.
AlmPort SET ALMPORT This command is used to set the input port of
environment signals.
If the alarm ID of an external environment alarm is predefined, the following steps can be
skipped. For details about the predefined alarm IDs, see eNodeB Alarm Reference.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the LST ALMPORT command to check whether external alarm ports are configured
correctly, whether ports are enabled, and whether port types and alarm severities are the same
as the configured values.
Step 2 Run the SET ENVALMPARA command to set the name, severity, and event type of an external
environment alarm.
NOTE
ALM ID is configured when the external environmental alarm and the extended alarm port are bound.
----End
Context
You can manually trigger external environment alarms to verify the parameter settings. If the
external environment alarms can be reported correctly, the parameter settings are correct.
Procedure
Step 1 Manually trigger external environment alarms. For details, see the appendix Triggering
Monitoring Device Alarms.
Step 2 Check for active alarms on the local maintenance terminal (LMT). For details, see 3.4.8
Handling the eNodeB Alarms on the LMT. If the external environment alarms can be reported
correctly, the parameter settings are correct. If no external environment alarm is reported, reset
the parameters or contact Huawei for technical support.
----End
Example
Assuming that a water sensor is installed for the fan monitoring unit (FMU), to check whether
the parameter settings for water damage alarms are correct, perform the following operations:
Prerequisites
l The RRU or RFU is connected properly.
l The local maintenance terminal (LMT) or M2000 communicates properly with the eNodeB.
l You have logged in to the M2000 as administrator.
Context
The maximum output power of the RRU or RFU is specified by the local operator.
If an eNodeB is configured with multiple RRUs or RFUs, you must use MML commands to
manually reset RRUs or RFUs one by one. If RRUs or RFUs are cascaded, set the maximum
output power for the lowest-level RRU or RFU and then for other RRUs or RFUs to reduce the
impact on upper-level RRUs.
The maximum output power for the RRU or RFU needs to be set only if it is less than the
maximum output power that the RRU or RFU can physically achieve.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the DSP RRU command to query the cabinet No., subrack No., slot No., and transmit
channel No. of the RRU or RFU.
Step 2 Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to query the maximum output power supported by the
RRU or RFU based on the information queried in Step 1.
Step 3 Run the LOC RRUTC command to set the maximum output power for the RRU or RFU.
Step 4 Run the RST BRD command to reset the RRU or RFU.
Step 5 Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to check whether the setting of the maximum output
power for the RRU or RFU takes effect.
If... Then...
The maximum transmit Set the maximum output power within the power specifications
power fails to be set supported by the RRU or RFU. If the maximum output power
still fails to be set, contact Huawei for technical support.
NOTE
Before returning a used but not faulty RRU or RFU to the Spare Parts Center, run the LOC RRUTC
command to set the maximum output power (TXMAXPWR) to 0 and reset the RRU or RFU for the setting
to take effect.
----End
Prerequisites
The LMT communicates properly with the eNodeB.
Procedure
Step 1 On the LMT, click the Alarm/Event button. The Alarm/Event tab page is displayed.
Step 2 Check for active alarms on the Engineering Alarm tab page under the Browse Alarm/Event
tab page.
Step 3 Double-click an active alarm. The Detailed Information dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Click Solution... to know the detailed information and alarm handling procedure. Clear the active
alarm by following the alarm handling procedure.
----End
Prerequisites
The LMT communicates properly with the eNodeB.
Context
Table 4-60 lists the eNodeB device checklist.
eNodeB Check the active eNodeB software, including the version and operating
software version status.
Hardware status Check the status of the radio frequency (RF) unit, receive channel,
transmit channel, and boards.
Interface status Check the configuration related to IP paths, common public radio
interface (CPRI) ports, remote maintenance channels, E1/T1 ports,
Ethernet ports, and Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP) links
of the eNodeB.
Procedure
Step 1 On the LMT, click Self-Test. On the displayed Self-Test tab page, a man-machine language
(MML) command script with the complete parameter settings is automatically imported to the
command area.
Step 2 Click Execute. The execution result is displayed in the area below Execute.
NOTE
If all items pass the check, the eNodeB operates properly. Otherwise, check for active alarms and clear them. If
all active alarms are cleared but the fault persists, contact Huawei for technical support.
----End
Prerequisites
l The eNodeB and the MME/S-GW are properly connected.
l The negotiation data of the eNodeB to be commissioned is added to the MME/S-GW.
l The testing UE is functional and is registered in the HSS.
l The FTP server for testing the basic services is available.
l The WWW server for testing the basic services is available.
Procedure
l Test the web page browsing service.
Testing Method Access the WWW server and browse the web pages through a UE.
Perform the test 20 times.
Testing Method Access the FTP server and upload files through a UE. Perform the
test 10 times.
Testing Method Access the FTP server and download files through a UE. Perform the
test 10 times.
Expectation Connection success rate > 95%. The calls are uninterrupted and none
of the calls get dropped till they are released. The voice is clear with
no loud noise.
----End
Prerequisites
l The transmission link between the eNodeB and M2000 is functioning properly.
l The M2000 server and client are running properly.
l You have obtained the eNodeB information such as the name, IP address, version, and
administrative region of the eNodeB.
Context
To reduce maintenance workload, the M2000 enables you to create eNodeBs in batches in the
topology. For details, see Creating Multiple Physical NEs in the M2000 Online Help. This
section describes the procedure for creating an eNodeB.
Procedure
Step 1 Create an eNodeB in the topology.
1. On the M2000 client, choose Topology > Main Topology. The Main Topology tab page
is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-60.
2. In the Physical Root navigation tree or the physical view, right-click the subnet for the
eNodeB to be created and choose New > NE from the shortcut menu. The Create NE dialog
box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-61.
3. In the Create NE dialog box, select the specific eNodeB from Access Network Series.
4. Configure the eNodeB information in the right window of the dialog box.
The Create NE Progress dialog box is displayed, indicating the NE creation progress. After the eNodeB
is successfully created, the M2000 automatically obtains the eNodeB configuration information.
If the network connection between the M2000 and the created eNodeB is faulty, the eNodeB is still
displayed in the specified location in the topology. However, the eNodeB is disconnected and is shown
as .
6. Click Close to close the Progress dialog box.
Step 2 About 5 minutes later, observe the eNodeB icon on the Main Topology tab page.
If... Then...
----End
Procedure
Step 1 Query the eNodeB state.
1. On the M2000 tab page, choose Topology > Main Topology. The Main Topology tab
page is displayed.
2. On the Main Topology tab page, select the target network element (NE) and right-click
Query Maintenance Mode. Then, the Query Maintenance Mode dialog box is displayed.
3. Check whether Current NE Maintenance Mode is set to NORMAL. If it is, the
configuration is complete. If it is not, go to Step 2.
2. Click Set NE Mode at the upper left corner of the Maintenance Mode tab page. The
Set Maintenance Mode dialog box is displayed.
3. Select the target NE and specify the time.
4. Set NE Mode to NORMAL. The eNodeB is changed to the normal state.
5. Click OK. The setting of the maintenance mode is complete.
6. Ensure that the current the eNodeB state is NORMAL by executing Step 1 again.
NOTE
The alarms that are not cleared during commissioning will be reported on the eNodeB in the normal state.
----End
5 Appendix
This chapter describes how to encrypt files in a Universal Serial Bus (USB) storage device and
provides the eNodeB commissioning data sheet.
Prerequisites
l eNodeB IDs have been planned, and a deployment list has been imported to the M2000.
For details about how to import a deployment list, see Uploading Data Files.
l A printer for printing bar codes has been ready and is communicating properly with the
M2000.
Context
Bar codes are identified by the width of black and white bars. The resolution for printing bar
codes must be set to 1200 DPI or a greater value to ensure that a bar code scanner can successfully
read bar codes. A professional bar code printer or a common laser printer can be used.
The M2000 supports the printing of Code39 and Code128 bar codes.
Figure 5-1 shows the process of binding the eNodeB using a bar code scanner.
Figure 5-1 Process of binding the eNodeB using a bar code scanner
Procedure
Step 1 In the iManager M2000, choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > eNodeB Auto
Deployment. The eNodeB Auto Deployment dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure
5-2.
Step 2 In the eNodeB Auto Deployment dialog box, click the Deployment List tab. On the
Deployment List tab page, select a list to be printed, right-click it, and then choose Print
Barcode from the shortcut menu. The Print Barcode dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 5-3.
In this dialog box, you can set BarCode Type and preview a print result.
NOTE
l You can print one deployment list separately or more deployment lists in batches.
l You can print only the information about one eNodeB ID on a bar code sheet.
Step 3 Click OK. The print page setup dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Select a correct printer, set print attributes, and then click OK.
----End
Prerequisites
l A personal computer (PC) is available.
l A Honeywell 3800G (USB-type) bar code scanner with configurations before shipment is
available.
l An electronic operation guide to the bar code scanner is available.
Context
The bar code scanner must meet the following requirements:
l Supporting Code128 and Code39 bar codes.
l Supporting a USB port and low-speed interrupt transmission mode and complying with
general USB keyboard specifications.
l Supporting plug-and-play. No driver is required for the operating systems such as Windows
XP and Windows 2003.
l Supporting laser scanning.
l Complying with Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS).
NOTE
You need to set a bar code scanner only once before using it on eNodeBs.
Procedure
Step 1 Print the electronic operation guide on a piece of A4 paper to facilitate scanning of setting codes.
Step 2 Connect the bar code scanner to the PC through a USB port.
NOTE
Do not connect a bar code scanner that is not set to the eNodeB because this may result in abnormal eNodeB
data processing.
For details about how to check whether a bar code scanner is set, see step 4.
NOTE
To prevent configured parameters from being lost, you are advised to scan the Save code once after
two parameters are configured.
4. Scan the Manual Trigger code, as shown in Figure 5-7.
----End
Prerequisites
l A bar code sheet containing bar code information is available.
l The bar code information is consistent with the actual eNodeB information.
l A bar code scanner is available.
l The eNodeB has been powered on
l The eNodeB communicates with the M2000 properly.
Context
After the bar code scanner scans a bar code successfully, the eNodeB reports the eNodeB ID on
the bar code to the M2000. If the eNodeB ID is consistent with that in the eNodeB deployment
list on the M2000, the M2000 automatically binds the eNodeB.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the bar code scanner to the USB port on the main control board.
NOTE
l You can scan a bar code about 10s after the indicator on the bar code scanner turns on.
l Ensure that the scanner camera is less than 30 cm away from the bar code.
Step 2 Use the bar code scanner to read the eNodeB ID on the bar code to the eNodeB.
After the eNodeB obtains the eNodeB ID, the bar code scanner emits a sound and its laser
indicator turns off. In addition, you can check whether the eNodeB binding is successful by
viewing the RUN indicator on the main control board and checking download of the software
package. For details, see 5.3 Checking the Status of Indicators.
Step 3 Remove the bar code scanner after the bar code is successfully scanned.
NOTE
----End
Prerequisites
l The PMU is running properly.
l PMU parameters are set correctly.
Context
Diesel generator or solar device alarms can be triggered only when a diesel generator or a solar
device is configured.
Procedure
l Trigger PMU alarms. For details, see Table 5-1.
25672 Burglar Special Boolean 1. Run the MOD PMU command with
Alarm Alarm Flag GS_DISABLE(Gating Sensor
Disabled) in the Special Boolean
Alarm Flag selected.
2. Install the door status sensor properly
and keep the cabinet door open for
more than 10s.
25670 Water Special Boolean 1. Run the MOD PMU command with
Alarm Alarm Flag WS_DISABLE(Water-Immersed
Sensor Disabled) in the Special
Boolean Alarm Flag selected.
2. Install the water sensor properly and
immerse the water sensor or its probe
in water for more than 10s.
25671 Smoke Special Boolean 1. Run the MOD PMU command with
Alarm Alarm Flag SS_DISABLE(Smog Sensor
Disabled) in the Special Boolean
Alarm Flag selected.
2. Install the smoke sensor properly and
produce smoke around the smoke
sensor for more than 30s. Generally,
smoke alarms are difficult to trigger.
NOTE
You must clear smoke alarms manually.
25626 Power None Use a small rod to stop the PSU fan until
Module the indicator on the PSU turns yellow or
Abnormal red. Ensure that the system power is
(PSU sufficient after you remove a PSU.
alarm: A
PSU must
be
configure
d.)
----End
Prerequisites
l The FMU is running properly.
l FMU parameters have been correctly set.
Context
No burglar, water, smoke, or external Boolean alarm is available for indoor eNodeBs.
Procedure
l Trigger FMU alarms. For details, see Table 5-2.
25672 Burglar Special Boolean 1. Enter the MOD FMU command with
Alarm Alarm Flag the GS_DISABLE(Gating Sensor
Disabled) check box in the Special
Boolean Alarm Flag drop-down list
box cleared.
2. Install the door status sensor properly
and keep the cabinet door open for
more than 10s.
25670 Water Special Boolean 1. Run the MOD FMU command with
Alarm Alarm Flag the WS_DISABLE(Water-
Immersed Sensor Disabled) check
box in the Special Boolean Alarm
Flag drop-down list box cleared.
2. Install the water sensor properly and
immerse the sensor probe or the
water sensor in water for more than
10s.
25671 Smoke Special Boolean 1. Run the MOD FMU command with
Alarm Alarm Flag the SS_DISABLE(Smog Sensor
Disabled) check box in the Special
Boolean Alarm Flag drop-down list
box cleared.
2. Install the smoke sensor properly and
generate smoke around the smoke
sensor for more than 30s (smoke
alarms are generally difficult to
trigger).
NOTE
Smoke alarms must be manually cleared.
25602 Sensor Special Analog Remove the temperature sensor from the
Failure Alarm Flag TEMP port on the FMU.
25656 Cabinet Upper threshold for Trigger the cabinet air inlet temperature
Air Inlet cabinet air inlet to be greater than the upper threshold or
Temper temperature alarms to be less than the lower threshold (this
ature (60° by default) and alarm is difficult to trigger because the
Unaccep lower threshold for upper and lower thresholds cannot be
table cabinet air inlet changed).
temperature alarms
(-20° by default)
25655 Cabinet Upper threshold for Trigger the cabinet air outlet temperature
Air cabinet air outlet to be greater than the upper threshold or
Outlet temperature alarms to be less than the lower threshold (this
Temper (80° by default) and alarm is difficult to trigger because the
ature lower threshold for upper and lower thresholds cannot be
Unaccep cabinet air outlet changed).
table temperature alarms
(-20° by default)
----End
Prerequisites
l The TCU is running properly.
l TCU parameters have been correctly set.
Procedure
l Trigger TCU alarms. For details, see Table 5-3.
25672 Burglar Special Boolean Alarm 1. Enter the MOD TCU command
Alarm Flag with the GS_DISABLE
(Gating Sensor Disabled)
check box in the Special
Boolean Alarm Flag drop-
down list box cleared.
2. Install the door status sensor
properly and keep the cabinet
door open for more than 10s.
25670 Water Special Boolean Alarm 1. Run the MOD TCU command
Alarm Flag with the WS_DISABLE
(Water-Immersed Sensor
Disabled) check box in the
Special Boolean Alarm Flag
drop-down list box cleared.
2. Install the water sensor properly
and immerse the sensor probe or
the water sensor in water for
more than 10s.
25671 Smoke Special Boolean Alarm 1. Run the MOD TCU command
Alarm Flag with the SS_DISABLE(Smog
Sensor Disabled) check box in
the Special Boolean Alarm
Flag drop-down list box cleared.
2. Install the smoke sensor
properly and generate smoke
around the smoke sensor for
more than 30s (smoke alarms
are generally difficult to
trigger).
NOTE
Smoke alarms must be manually
cleared.
25655 Cabinet Upper threshold for 1. Run the DSP TCU command to
Air Outlet cabinet air outlet query the current air outlet
Temperat temperature alarms temperature.
ure (80° by default) and 2. Run the MOD TCU command
Unaccept lower threshold for to set the upper threshold for
able cabinet air outlet cabinet air outlet temperature
temperature alarms alarms to be less than the current
(-20° by default) air outlet temperature or the
lower threshold for cabinet air
outlet temperature alarms to be
greater than the current air outlet
temperature.
----End
Prerequisites
l The EMU is running properly.
l EMU parameters have been correctly set.
Context
To trigger EMU alarms, turn on the related alarm switches.
Procedure
l Trigger EMU alarms. For details, see Table 5-4.
NOTE
Burglar, infrared, and smoke alarms must be manually cleared.
----End
Context
Indicator status of the functional eNodeB
If the status of the indicators on the boards or auxiliary devices is the same as that shown in
Table 5-5, the eNodeB is running properly.
Indicator Status
RUN indicator on each board in the BBU Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
Procedure
Step 1 Check the indicator on each board in the BBU.
1. Check the RUN indicator on each board.
If the RUN It Indicates that... Then...
Indicator Is...
Blinking (on for The board is loading Wait 5 minutes and then check the
0.125s and off for software, or the board status of the RUN indicator again.
0.125s) is in the incorrect slot. If the RUN indicator is still blinking
(on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s),
check whether the board is inserted into
the correct slot. If not, reinstall the
board.
2. Check the ALM indicators on the LMPT, UMPT, LBBP and UTRP.
If the ALM It Indicates that... Then...
Indicator Is...
Blinking red The module is faulty. Reinstall the board to check whether
the fault is rectified. If the fault
persists, replace the board.
Red indicator off The optical module is not If the RRU or LRFU is
configured properly or connected to this port,
powered on, or no cable is check whether the
connected to the optical installation conforms to the
module. Or the indicator is configuration plan.
faulty. l If the installation does
not conform to the
configuration plan,
reinstall the RRU
according to the
configuration plan.
l If the installation
conforms to the
configuration plan,
replace the boards.
Steady red The optical module does Handle the alarm according
not receive or send data to the related suggestions.
correctly, the CPRI For details, see eNodeB
connection is faulty, or the Alarm Reference
optical cable is broken.
Blinking red (on for 1s and The CPRI link is out of If the ACT indicator is in
off for 1s) lock, or the RRU or LRFU the testing state (on for 1s
on the CPRI link reports and off for 1s), handle the
VSWR alarms. alarm according to the
related suggestions. If the
ACT indicator is not in the
testing state, the CPRI link
is unlocked due to dual-
clock-source lock or
incompatible CPRI rate.
For details, see the eNodeB
Alarm Reference.
Blinking red (on for 0.25s The RRU or LRFU Handle the alarm according
and off for 0.25s) hardware on the CPRI link to the related suggestions,
is faulty. see eNodeB Alarm
Reference
Blinking at 4 Hz (on for The OM channel is faulty. Check the OM channel and
0.125s and off for 0.125s) rectify the fault.
Blinking at 4 Hz (blinking The service is not ready. l Check the cell status. If
for 2s and off for 2s, the cell is not activated,
blinking for 2s means on for activate the cell. If the
0.125s and off for 0.125s.) Cell Unavailable alarm
is generated, handle the
alarm according to the
related suggestions.
l Check whether the S1
interface is normal. If
not, handle the alarm
according to the related
suggestions.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 Enter the board software package name.
In the PRECONFIG of the default configuration file, enter the board software package name
based on the format ALL=XXXX.
NOTE
.
l XXXX indicates the board software package name.
l Querying the board software package name: The board software package name corresponding to a
board type can be queried by checking the notes in the default configuration file. The notes in the
default configuration file are classified based on the format ;AAAA:BBBB. BBBB indicates the board
type. AAAA indicates the corresponding board software package name. For example, in the
note ;LRRUFDD:LRFU,RRU3808,RRU3201/RRU3203, the board software package name of
RRU3201 is LRRUFDD.
l If multiple board software packages are downloaded, use the character "|" to separate the names. For
example, ALL=1800|LRRUFDD..
----End
Prerequisites
l The files in the USB flash drive are ready.
l The USB security protection tool is ready, which is available in M2000 installation
folder \client\client\USBProtector on the computer where the M2000 client is installed.
Context
The USB security protection tool performs integrity protection or encryption on selected files
or files in the specified folder. After integrity protection or encryption is performed, the
USBConf.xml file is generated in the USB flash drive. The file name is unchangeable.
Procedure
Step 1 Copy the files in the USB flash drive to a computer where the USB security protection tool is
installed.
NOTE
The file hierarchy in the computer must be the same as that in the USB flash drive.
The tool directly performs integrity protection and encryption on the files. Therefore, back up the files to
be encrypted and protected beforehand.
Step 2 Use the USB security protection tool to perform integrity protection or encryption on the files
in the computer.
NOTE
The software package, hot patch, cold patch, and BootROM package cannot be encrypted or protected.
1. Start the USB security protection tool, as shown in Figure 5-10.
2. On the menu bar, choose Setting > Set Security Policies. In the displayed dialog box, set
the encryption algorithm and protection algorithm, and specify the path for saving the
generated file USBConf.xml, as shown in Figure 5-11. The generated file is in the path E:
\.
NOTE
5. Click Execute Protection to perform encryption and integrity protection on the added files.
NOTE
If the Is Encrypted: Index check box before the number indicating a file is selected, the file is
encrypted and integrity protected. If the serial number is not selected, only integrity protection is
performed on the file.
Step 3 Delete all files from the USB flash drive. Then, copy the protected or encrypted files to the USB
flash drive based on the original file hierarchy. For example, if the root path is E:\ eNodeB, copy
the eNodeB folder to the USB flash drive. Copy the USBConf.xml file to the path usb:\eNodeB
\USBConf.xml. The path name is case-sensitive.
After integrity protection or encryption is performed on the USB flash drive, you cannot delete
the file USBConf.xml. If you delete it, the eNodeB cannot download files from the USB flash
drive.
----End
eNodeB
ID
eNodeB
Type
ESN
Commiss
ioning
Time
Commiss
ioning
Engineer
Unsolved
Problems
After
Commiss
ioning
Component P/N
Faulty
Board
Record
6 FAQ
This chapter describes some common problems and solutions during commissioning.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the eNodeB is working properly by observing the eNodeB indicator. For details,
see 5.3 Checking the Status of Indicators.
Step 2 Ensure that the USB flash drive is correctly inserted into the USB port on the LTE main
processing and transmission unit (LMPT). If an LMPT is used, the USB port is shown in Figure
6-1. If a UMPT is used, the USB port is shown in Figure 6-2.
Step 3 Remove the USB flash drive and then power off the eNodeB. After about 1 minute, power on
the eNodeB and insert the USB flash drive into the USB port on the LMPT.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 Ensure that the USB flash drive meets requirements in Table 6-1.
Table 6-1 Tools required for the local commissioning using the USB flash drive
Tool Description
USB flash drive l The USB flash drive is equipped with an indicator that indicates
the data transmission status.
l Capacity ≥ 256 MB
l Model: The USB flash drive must be provided by Huawei.
l The USB flash drive must not provide any additional functions,
such as encryption, virus scanning, and bootstrapping. In
addition, it cannot be an MP3 player, MP4 player, or smart
phone.
l The USB flash drive used for commissioning cannot be used for
other purposes. In addition, irrelevant files, especially those with
Chinese file names, cannot be saved in the USB flash drive.
Step 2 Ensure that the version software package and data configuration files are named correctly and
saved in correct paths.
l In scenarios without the security gateway (SeGW), see Preparing a USB Flash Drive for
Local Commissioning.
l In scenarios with the SeGW, see Preparing a USB Flash Drive for Local
Commissioning.
Step 3 Remove the USB flash drive and then power off the eNodeB. After about 1 minute, power on
the eNodeB and insert the USB flash drive into the USB port on the LMPT.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 Local commissioning using a USB flash drive in combination with remote commissioning on
the M2000
1. Ensure that the version software package and data configuration files are named correctly
and saved in correct paths.
l In scenarios without the security gateway (SeGW), see Preparing a USB Flash Drive
for Local Commissioning.
l In scenarios with the SeGW, see Preparing a USB Flash Drive for Local
Commissioning.
2. Remove the USB flash drive and then power off the eNodeB. After about 1 minute, power
on the eNodeB and insert the USB flash drive into the USB port on the LMPT. Redeploy
the eNodeB.
Step 2 Remote eNodeB commissioning on the M2000
Ensure that the version in the eNodeB deployment list is consistent with the target version. If it
is inconsistent with the target version, change the eNodeB deployment list according to the target
version and then redeploy the eNodeB.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 Check the information in and saving path of the default configuration file. If they are incorrect,
modify the default configuration file.
l In scenarios without the security gateway (SeGW), see Preparing a USB Flash Drive for
Local Commissioning.
l In scenarios with the SeGW, see Preparing a USB Flash Drive for Local
Commissioning.
Step 2 Check whether the default configuration file is integrity protected. If it is not integrity protected,
see 5.5 Encrypting Files in the USB Flash Drive.
Step 3 Delete the board information not to be downloaded from the default configuration file.
Step 4 Check the software version in the USB flash drive and ensure the target version is not the same
as the active version.
NOTE
If the target version is the same as the active version, the eNodeB does not read the default configuration
file in the USB flash drive, which leads to the failure of downloading.
----End